Novell GroupWise. www.novell.com 6.5 WINDOWS* CLIENT USER GUIDE September 19, 2005 Novell. Legal Notices Novell, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents or use of this documentation, and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Novell, Inc. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to its content, at any time, without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes. Further, Novell, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with respect to any software, and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Novell, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any and all parts of Novell software, at any time, without any obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes. Any products or technical information provided under this Agreement may be subject to U.S. export controls and the trade laws of other countries. You agree to comply with all export control regulations and to obtain any required licenses or classification to export, re-export, or import deliverables. You agree not to export or re-export to entities on the current U.S. export exclusion lists or to any embargoed or terrorist countries as specified in the U.S. export laws. You agree to not use deliverables for prohibited nuclear, missile, or chemical biological weaponry end uses. Please refer to www.novell.com/info/exports/ for more information on exporting Novell software. Novell assumes no responsibility for your failure to obtain any necessary export approvals. Copyright © 2003-2005 Novell, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied, stored on a retrieval system, or transmitted without the express written consent of the publisher. Novell, Inc. has intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in the product that is described in this document. In particular, and without limitation, these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U.S. patents listed at http://www.novell.com/company/legal/patents/ and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U.S. and in other countries. Novell, Inc. 404 Wyman Street, Suite 500 Waltham, MA 02451 U.S.A. www.novell.com GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide September 19, 2005 Online Documentation: To access the online documentation for this and other Novell products, and to get updates, see www.novell.com/documentation. Novell Trademarks C3PO is a trademark of Novell, Inc. eDirectory is a trademark of Novell, Inc. Group Wise is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NDS is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetMail is a trademark of Novell, Inc. Novell is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Nterprise is a trademark of Novell, Inc. ZENworks is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Third-Party Materials All third-party trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Contents About This Guide 15 1 Getting Started 17 Starting:thé GroupWise Client s s cic: AA ee al e tae RÉ ne EE AT de den 17 Running the Setup Program .. iones orar a deb due NU da do à 17 Starting “GroupWise 0:5 1,4 24 Les Lit me te eh ee nt © ee A A A a lé dE has ee 17 Using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)... 18 Setting Up an Account and Starting the Collaboration Client. . ........................... 18 Using the Collaboration Client . ........................................... 19 Getting Acquainted with the Main GroupWise Window. . ................................ 20 Toolbar 2 5 24,5 mn Re ae Pa Pn ESAS Lie ee Pa eae be a a a 21 Folder:and:ltemi List Héader s-s koi hs e Sed rn A Se Red ee ee den Oe BR ed 21 Folder List: o o a etara g Lalique due dee en à deu bo ee be ah ee ba Ge ed 22 tenista ee Be SE E Grae it eet SO DU ee re de ht ED ee de 26 Quick Viewer sry coa a a es Glee eb eh ate ed a eb ae Pare ee a E ee hae eet as 26 Using Different GroupWise Modes (Online, Caching, and Remote) ........................... 26 Online Mode. i e sce guala ee ee a ep Ee ke ee Ba a ee a ed 26 Gaċhing Modes 24.2 4 Sa ace es Salt ee RE Se ee Em kee LAS Lars de 27 Remote:Môde: coimas bs ee SOS ee be ae a dae ba ee Rae ba Sal ee Pa ae a 27 Remote (Offline) Mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)... 2. o... 27 Understanding Your Mailbox. .............................................. 27 Bolded Items in Your Mailbox. . ........................................... 28 Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar ............................ 28 Viewing Options in Your Mailbox ........................................... 30 Using the Toolbar: :. mois... dub Ba eee baigne ar de pete due db uote ee ee be 32 Customizing the Toolbar Display . .......................................... 32 Using Shortcut Keys. : 2: 4 4 544 $20 Pade eh ba e Pade bas POR bE acte ee bee ee bbe 34 Learning More; ee os a ee OR ee hors Gees eine a we ee eee ee te SA EE 36 Online Help. cock Le Sopp aoe th Aus dope bebe ee poh ee a Re bee dee be 36 GroupWise 6.5 Documentation Web Page... 2... aaa a a 36 GroupWise Cool Solutions Web Community... 1... 2 aaa a a 37 2 Logging In to GroupWise 39 Logging: In to GroupWiS@r2 9 pida a eee EG ee Ee es Pe Re ae alk at 39 Logging:In:to Your Mailbox: ; ss s 44 ua paar Be Te a Rage eo Se a ee à 39 Logging In to Your Mailbox from Another User's Workstation . ........................... 40 Logging in to Your Mailbox from a Shared Workstation. . .............................. 40 Logging In to the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) 41 Assigning Passwords to Your Mailbox .......................................... 41 LDAP ‘Authentication: 3.2.5 22 e we eS pus oh Pe ee ES AU dose ane oe gs der HOT EN à 42 Adding, Changing, and Removing Your Password. ................................. 42 Bypassing Your GroupWise or LDAP Password . .................................. 43 Proxies and Mailbox Passwords .. 1... 2. a 43 Mailbox Passwords and Remote Mode. ....................................... 44 Contents 5 Mailbox Passwords and Caching Mode ............ a 44 3 Working with Items in Your Mailbox 45 Understanding GroupWise Item Types . . 2... a 45 Sending and Receiving Items:: ros sey ste uc ee Ee a ee Ee ae 46 Sending Mail Messages- v mrotes ied idk ra ee oe di cet ada haga et ae es du a 46 Sending Phone Messages. . +. + 2 co sortara ara i wuna goi da ior d s ea BAEO abaoe ioa Eoi ua 48 Changing the Font of Items You Send. ........................................ 49 Formatting Bulleted and Numbered Lists . ...................................... 50 Adding a Signature or vCard to Items You Send ... 1... 0... e... 51 Spell-Checking Items" You Send. ice eck gets st à ag Re eS ee ee pea 52 Undoing. the Last TeXt'ACtION e siae eon a eee bh ae BR ee Bk Ro eee eee Re Bk à 54 Delaying, Delivery ofan Item... 52: 2-2 2 ee foe eee PE Se ee er ee WE Has ee 55 Using Roùting Slip: dodo wie ete eee A e AS ne a ea des A ES AE ed 55 Creating’ a‘Routed Hemi. vicios qua wea pete Ben A ae Bees oboe ge bob Goel eee à 55 Requiring a Password before Marking a Routed Item Completed. .......................... 56 Completing a Routed Item... s c a 4, à 4 4, ee ee ee ee 56 Addressing a Routed Item with an Address Book... 2 2 2. 2. ... . . e... eee 57 Notifying Recipients About an Item You have Sent. ................................... 58 Downloading POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise . ................................ 58 Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to GroupWise. .................................. 60 Modifying Properties of a POP3 or IMAP4 Account. ................................. 61 Downloading Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts. . ............................... 61 Downloading New Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts Automatically. . . . ................... 62 Downloading Only the Header (Subject) for IMAP4 Accounts. ............................ 62 Using GroupWise to Send POP3 and IMAP4 Mail. ................................. 63 Deleting an Item from a POP3 or IMAP4 Account. .................................. 63 Connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 Server Using SSL. ................................. 64 Importing POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts. ........................................ 64 Storing Your POP3 Items on a Mail Server ...................................... 65 Changing the Length of Time for POP3 and IMAP4 Server Timeouts. . ....................... 66 Subscribing and Unsubscribing to IMAP4 Folders. . ................................. 66 Alphabetizing the Folders in an IMAP4 Account. ................................... 66 Downloading Voice Mail Attachments through an IMAP4 Account .......................... 66 Sharing an IMAP4 Folder (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0). .................................... 67 Seeing IMAP4 Folders That Are Shared with You (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)........................ 67 Attaching Fles e cece ere ell ce Be Mahe eae E eae ec ee Bees ee A E aE à 67 Attaching’ a: File toan Hem: «a ene ek oe LA Re nd eWeek ee nee dh A ee art 68 Attaching a Document Reference to an tem ... 2... .. o... 68 Embedding an OLE Objectinanltem.. 2... aaa a 70 Viewing Attached: Files? 2.0 ci 425 2-4 note a Sete de ce OR eae Ge a ee oe 71 Opening:Attached: Files: sud dou ae e Ae ef ae ek ed Peel Ge he he Ged e 71 Managing: Sentiltems: ac. wue 42202 a ev A ee page Ee Ree eee BOR Bal eae!) Re à 72 Confirming Delivery of Items You’ve Sent... 2... aaa a 72 Displaying: Sent Hems o or e ie a A la eb See WE A A eee 72 Resendingiitems:: >. otra Bo pee es Ae e AA a ee St he a Gai E eA Oe dis 73 Retracting Items: You've Sent i e e d na sinale ee ms RO ee ee A A A à 73 Checking the Status of Your Items . :...::..., 444, ee eee 73 Receiving Notification About Items You Send . . 1.2... aaa a a 74 Requesting a Reply for Items You Send. ....................................... 75 Changing the Subject of a Sent Item ......................................... 75 Managing: Received: Items... 2 4 8 ia vas este Bee Oe eh iii ant 5 db Ÿ 76 Reading tems You: Receive s.s ss miarana na né ptet et A A OS EUR das age i 77 Changing the Font of Items You Receive ....................................... 79 Replying to Items You Receive ............................................ 79 6 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Forwarding Items to Other Users... 2... 2 2 81 Using Categories to Organize Items . .. 2. 1. aa a 81 Changing the Subject of an Item You’ve Received... 2... 2. .. . o... 85 Creating:a: Checklist: race e Ha ke ae le Ee ee oe Nee ee te oe a AAS ab A ae Ge et 86 Delegating:temSih unis ah eee pee ee là a eth eh A ee ee hs bo as 91 Händling.Unwanted Mall 0% 5.5 Bont eee he wee e Reel AE Pe une eet Bb is 92 Changing tem Types. : 2224252 52 ee ea PAPE A ee ERE AA Ee ee Oe es 98 Viewing and Composing Items in HTML ................. e... 100 Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise 103 Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise... 2... e... e... 103 Sending an Instant Message . : son ros . ee 104 Displaying the GroupWise Messenger Contact List. . 2... 0... ... . . . . . .o. e... 104 Specifying Whether or Not to Start GroupWise Messenger When GroupWise Starts ............... 104 Displaying GroupWise Messenger Options. . ................................... 104 Scheduling Group and Posted Items 105 scheduling Appointments: s dss oe ORE oe ee a eh oe ae ee ie Re BAe 105 Scheduling an Appointment for Other Users... 2... 2 0... ... e... o... 106 Rescheduling an Appointment... 107 Rescheduling Recurring Appointments . ............ a 107 Canceling an Appointment... 108 Scheduling an Appointment for Yourself . ................. a 108 Checking When Everyone Is Available . ...................................... 109 Formatting Your Appointments in ICAL. ............... 111 Sending Tasks: 5 c ss ar a E aoa a a ek ee ee 112 Assigning a Task to Other Users ............... a 112 Assigning a Task to Yourself... 2... 2 114 Marking: Tasks:Gompleted os ci dee ls ee et ee ee A eee a ee te eS Be 115 Sending Reminder Notes. ............................................... 115 Scheduling a Reminder Note for Yourself. . .. 2... aaa a 115 Scheduling a Reminder Note for Other Users .. 2... e... eo... 116 Accepting or Declining Scheduled Items . ....................................... 117 Accepting and Declining Resource Requests. . .................................. 117 Specifying a Time Zone for an Appointment... 2... a 118 Scheduling Recurringiltems . ss i 4 4.2 2 nahea a a Ba hat ba ee ba ee ho 119 Scheduling a Recurring Item by Dates... 2... .. e... 119 Scheduling a Recurring Item by Example... 2... a 119 Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on Another Day of the Week ......................... 120 Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on the Last Day of the Month. ........................ 120 Scheduling Auto-Dates by Formula... .. oa aa aaa 121 Using Auto-Date Formula Functions and Operators . ............................... 121 Using Your Calendar 127 Viewing: Your Calendar. ta 452 8 bck ok ate ae Ae Se ele hate Sd de bei de al eh eel ee Bt Eee 128 Opening the Calendar Folder or a Calendar View ... 2... 2. e... . . e... 128 Navigating.in'the:Galendar corsa a e eee eS A AA AE nc 129 Viewing As Calendar : 2. : : 4.4.4 e... serra a ed eu se due 130 Understanding the Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Calendar. ....................... 130 Reading an Item in Your Calendar. .......................................... 130 Saving'aniltéem:in Your Calendar: suis ee Gg we ee QE ee Rok fe le nb nn de FER ce 130 Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources . ............................... 131 Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources. . ............................. 131 Modifying a Multi-User List. . ........................................... 132 Creating a Multi-User Calendar View. ....................................... 132 Printing Calendar Items. : : . .. eb A A A 133 Printing Your Calendar, Task List, or Reminder Note List . ............................ 133 Contents 7 Printing the Calendars of Multiple Users... 2... e... 134 Changing the First Day of the Week in Your Calendar ................................. 135 Viewing a Different Date in the Calendar... . 2... 2. a 135 Setting Alarms for Calendar Items. . .......................................... 135 Settingan Alarmi ix ae ore! a A OE Gen ay A a BER PURER bath à 136 Specifying How Long Before an Event the Alarm Sounds. . ............................ 136 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager. . .................................... 137 Managing Your Mailbox 139 Using: the- Folder List i-s An. 4 Sse dus wee teta Lea PE Bet eA Ss ae A o a A 140 Renaming-Folders:: & suria 2524 M eeu eee ey a ae ra eee ek Bo ue Baa) à 141 Deleting Folders. F522 tt bok Bon ie eee, ee Ane eg ek Ee ee a A né gt 4 141 Creating a-Personal: Folder: : goa s mg pe ERP ee pee i doing E Ee ee a 141 Creating::a: shared Folder: i. isu ee thal Bah ee dO ee A A ha ee A 142 Moving or Linking an Item to Another Folder... 2... 1 o... e... 142 Understanding Find Results Folders... 2... . e... . e... 142 Changing or Deleting Folder Display Settings... . . 2... 0.0.00 0. .................... 144 Using: Shared :Folders:+ 4,244 eae ae esa ik a os BAe ee AE ara ERAS a fA wee i 144 Sharing an Existing Folder with Other Users (v6.5 and v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)..................... 145 Posting a Message toa Shared Folder... 1... 2. aaa a 145 Viewing Discussion Threads in a Shared Folder ... 2... 2. o... a 146 Managing Contacts Through Your Mailbox . . 2... a 146 Managing Contacts: cu eo ess ars a a A A a O aa al alahala 147 Managing Groups: 2 242 4428 a e e a E Bae e e e aE Re ke ee et 149 Managing Resources: 52,48 A De pal A AA Ge oe a a We 150 Managing: Organizations: + oriol LÉ Sharan Boe i Ae tee) are ac aE ay a 151 Changing the Address Book the Contacts Folder Displays . . . .......................... 151 Sending a Mail Message from a Contact... . 2... a a 152 Changing the Display Name ofa Contact... . 2... aa a 153 Viewing All Correspondence You Have Had with a Contact. ............................ 155 Using Mailbox Storage Size Information .. 2... a 155 Viewing Your Mailbox Size Information... 2... e... 156 Deleting Items from Your Mailbox Using Mailbox Storage Size Information. . ................... 156 Archiving Items from Your Mailbox Using Mailbox Storage Size Information. . .................. 157 Running: Notify 2% sanse oe eee ee Oke rra had oe eh us Ba A a a 4 4h) a 157 Starting. Notify’ s tena ee Bk sa Poke i a ce Bele eR E be eo Re ee ee ma 158 Reading an Item from Notify.. >.. saco ccacacca crac esa aatar aa danaa aaa 158 Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager . . .................................... 158 Displaying the Notify Dialog Box When You Receive Notification. . . ....................... 158 Turning Off Notification e e eani e ee ee ne AE Ra ek Hood pee ne ren ae Be RU Ree H 159 Setting How Often Notify Checks for New Items. . ................................. 159 Setting'HOW't0:Be:Nôtiféd'. Hi kee tat ee Ree GR ee a wi A ee eB eho ah Bel UE 159 setting the Alarm Options wi 2. ke a ke mans AA a map bone Pa e Oa à 159 Setting Notify Options for Return Status Messages... 2... 2. e... . . .o uo... 160 Setting How to Be Notified When Outgoing Messages Change Status. ...................... 160 Setting How to Be Notified of Items in Your Mailbox. . ............................... 160 Being Notified of Someone Else's Messages . .............. .. 161 Archiving the Items in Your Mailbox. . 2... a 162 Archiving an Item in Your Mailbox. ......................................... 162 Viewing, Archived tems- na 2.2.2 e sp oes eee SD ok bee ee E WP eee ee RE à 162 Unarchiving les: 2. gece Go Gee TA AAA bed gs Be Ee GSR Sa ye 162 Archiving Items Automatically . ................. a 163 Printing Items in Your Mailbox. ........... a 163 Printing:GrotipWise'ltems; ssi eue a e Ao ee ds eee ee A A Be ea Pad 164 Printing Status Information about an Item. ..................................... 164 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Printing. Calendars: oc de os io cea a 24 Pe bapa be db ea hee eb hee ba us 164 CréatingiRUISS:.; sok ue we Wi ee lens Bok Bln de Re a Re e Vio ee Ee ee AUA ie mas E 165 Actions a Rule Can Perform: : : . 2.0. 24 4 Lu ek ee a 165 Events ‘That Tigger a Rule. etna es eR Et a Shae Bae E oe ib ee ae A aed ee a 167 Creating'a:Rüle::.: 4202 ea ee ar i ee le A ee, be be ee A a 167 Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply .. 2... a 168 Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to a Private Mail Account . .......................... 169 Copying a Rule to Make a New Rule... 2... e... a 169 Editing'a:Rule::#52 1 8888 ee mone oh dg A A te Bie SA, SE e 170 Deleting a RUE n cc 22.004 n an te Re Se SARE ew Bhi Bh ah lg eek ow e ee as ok a 170 Limiting Items Affected bya Rule... 2... a 170 Running a Rule Manually... 2... 2 2. 170 Enabling or Disabling a Rule... aa aoaaa anaran a aaa a aaa 171 Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox ..................................... 171 Receiving Proxy Rights 2. pos 4 air i ke E A A A 40 171 Assigning Proxy Rights to Another User ...................................... 172 Adding and Removing Proxy Names and Rights in Your Access List . ...................... 172 Managing Someone Else's Mailbox or Calendar .................................. 173 Adding and Removing Users in Your Proxy List . ................................. 174 Marking:an:ltem: Private... o sacrae nee ou e la a Re a e ae ee o 174 Saving.ltems: in Your: Mailbox: -corau na a a a OR A a a paa 174 Saving an Item to Disk or to a GroupWise Library . . ............................... 175 Saving Status. Information... eso a BU ee ee Bones HU à 175 Saving:an Unfinished Item: 255 Mf as a e dune ee eA ee AeA be O a E 176 Owning! ReSOUICES? 2.5 noe pa a AAA ek GE a a a a aT © u 176 Accepting and Declining Resource Requests. ................................... 176 Receiving Notification for Another User or Resource... 2... e... . . o... 177 Creating a Rule for:a Resource. costei 4 ie ee a ee ee Re ee 177 Opening and Emptying the Trash ........................................... 178 Opening'Your Trash cio y eben eee eh eu ce eink ER ale bee elie ie ce OR a AY 178 Undeleting; an Item inthe. Trash: < s <o ce ee a a ee Ee ee 178 Saving an Item That Is in Your Trash. .. a aaa aaa a 178 Emptying the- Trash;::.:.5 i na t disait tas ee min a DA sue Bo RY eg a tait ae pe ee 178 Emptying Selected Items from the Trash... 2. 1. e... o... 179 Emptying the Trash Automatically . . ....................................... 179 Deleting Items from Your Mailbox . .......................................... 179 Deleting an Item from Your Mailbox... 2... a 180 Deleting and Emptying Items from Your Mailbox . ................................. 180 Backing: Up Your.Maïlbox:. >: sogi oks e Ee a eu ee A ones te i 180 Backing: Up Your Mailbox... 2: oido a Ae drame e EAS es don PE eee ER 180 Restoring Items‘from:Backup.. e. 44-530 ds eS paor bis ds à BRP BU fu us ee de 181 Finding lt@mss:. + sic athe o ab wk A eh ek A Pan a A BR A US hee Am au ee ms E 181 Finding an Item By Example ............................................ 182 Finding an Item Using Search Criteria . . .. . .................................. 182 Saving the Results. Gf a: Find”: Gee gon ue ue à a eG a en ue op ai 184 Finding a Document and Creating a Reference to It in Your Mailbox. . ...................... 185 Finding an Item Using Advanced Find ....................................... 185 Narrowing an Advanced Find Using Filter Operators. . .............................. 186 Finding: Text'in:HemMS:.s e 2 08,2 2.6 eon de AS at BA as AA ee ea ey a us es fe x 186 Filtering Hems rs see Es he ee A UE A Ra tO ane lk OE RR Soke oh 187 Creating a:'New: Filter vs 22.5 28 ad A ee a ee a Le 187 Creating a New Filter Using Advanced Filter . . 2 2... 0... .. o... . e... 189 Selectinga Fiter oei A a poaa eA ee a A AA A a Lee As be de 190 Clearing:a-Filtefes.2 ace 28-8 hab el a See ee Re fe eh a a R 190 Deletingia Fillets: 38,5 Seg ce hk ae eek ASS pare AGE dee ete Ge ee Seats ee ake See eo a Aa 190 Contents 9 10 Narrowing Your Filter’... 34 44 4 4 ia rose rr ba bo des ee bib dope da 190 Using Filter and Rule Wildcard Characters and Switches . ............................. 191 Using Filter and Rule Operators... 2. 2. a 192 Understanding Filter and Rule Fields ... 2... 2 o... e... 193 Using the Columns in Your Mailbox. .......................................... 197 Changing Columns in Your Mailbox . . ....................................... 197 Sorting Items in Your Mailbox by Column ...................................... 198 Repairing Your MailbOx,2 i: bak Ae ch Be a Ey Ee Ew ES ERA AE eae swe OEE Oe 198 About Your GroupWise Mailbox... 2... accor ary a s mat ouea e a D Op aD p a a E a E a e i 199 Analyze/Fic Databases 440525 e AOR A ERR du RE Re on eR ee A ae à 199 Strúctural Rebúild cio das Bee oe ee Re Sb oe ee Be nu ed Roe we oe WE 200 Using the Address Book 203 Understanding Address. Books: 6 2. 154,44 ee dede Dew ph Se ee na aa ee bbe te ae 203 Using the Address Book, the Address Selector, and the Contacts Folder. ..................... 204 System Address Book... :. 44 5 85 à dan Rh ERS Ob ua Rue do 4 Ph A Re A 206 Frequent Contacts Address Book... 1 2. 1. a a 207 Personal Address ‘Books: 3. oxen eo Be eee dt haa RA A a Rob à 207 LDAP Address: BOOKS: 3) 3 iie t 4h, eS Elegie AR A eee ge hve a A GSR SG) ye 207 Shared Address: Books: y eos 8b an ee le er ar a Bh lee ee he ee ee a 208 QUICRINO SE 0 odia Ach he ed ae at ee AO ce Be i E ee a AS 208 Searching for Users and Resources... 1 ioa oe e roa toe toa e a da a a a a a a a a 209 Searching for User, Resource, Organization, and Group Addresses ........................ 210 Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search. .................................... 210 Defining Name Completion Search Order. ..................................... 211 Using LDAP in the Address BO0k.............. 211 Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book. .................................. 212 Searching for a Person Through a Directory Service . ............................... 212 Establishing a Secure Connection to a Directory Service . . ............................ 213 Modifying the Properties of a Directory Service . .................................. 213 Specifying the Search Criteria a Directory Service Uses .............................. 213 Changing the Length of Time a Directory Service Searches ............................ 214 Using Groups to Address Items... 2. 1 a 214 Creating and Saving a Personal Group... 2. 2. aaa a 214 Addressing Items toa Group: -=s sa 4 tas ds A a AA A RA 216 Adding and Removing Contacts from a Personal Group .............................. 217 Viewing Group Information ......... a 218 Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books ................................ 218 Importing Addresses into a Personal Address Book. ................................ 219 Exporting Addresses from the Address Book... 2... .. . . o... 219 Importing Third-Party Address Books . .............. a 219 Changing How Information Displays in the Address Book ............................... 221 Opening and Closing Address Books . ............. a 222 Specifying the Columns to Display in an Address Book. .............................. 222 Sorting'an Address Book. : :..: 44 e A Gé eg a a 223 Viewing Links to the System Address Book. .................................... 223 Choosing the Display Format of Names. ...................................... 223 Printing Labels and Lists from the Address Book. ................................... 224 Printing.Labels: “22 tbe de ee ter og mu eee oe ce een nets Be ee he de 224 PiintingiLIStS EE ie Asie e eke tee ae ek haa Bee BU ee iE CE LR on BA ed 225 Using the Address Selector and Address Book to Send Messages. .......................... 226 Using the Address Selector to Address an Item... 2... e... . e... 226 Sending Mail from the Address Book ........................................ 227 Using Frequent:Contacts: À eximio a ra E de ie EDE a AP tei eed apa e due age Bs mr el 227 Using Frequent Contacts to Address Items... 2... .. . . mo... 228 Setting Frequent Contacts Options ... 2... aaa a 228 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 10 11 Using Predefined Filters for the Frequent Contacts Address Book. ............ Creating Personal Address Books ............................... Creating a Personal Address Book... 2... 2 0... e... . . . .. eo... Deleting a Personal Address Book ............................. Editing a Personal Address Book. ............................. Synchronizing Address Book Entries... ......................... Setting Personal Address Book Properties. . ......................... Viewing an Address Book's Properties . .......................... Sharing an Address Book with Another User. ....................... Viewing Groups, Organizations, or Resources in the Address Book. ............. Advanced Address Book Options ............................... Defining: Copy Options: + secati ir ee eres Ba eee oe ur GE o Changing Your MAPI Configuration. . ........................... Using Remote Mode Remote Password)! ..0 a%.4 ais ok A uen Sek ME A Ae Be AU SA ee ie Remote Requests: sois- orari a a ED ge ea ee Remote Connection Types... . 2 ee 1,4. If Your Remote Connection Is Expensive. ......................... Remote: Features: si sado ho Ee ek, Dr ee a eS e ee ea Smart Docking: 25 tos it See Re OEP be ae Ewe eee TS Preparing to Use Remote: 511: aca i ee a ah de Setting Up Your Remote Mailbox . ............................. Setting Up Multiple Remote Mailboxes on a Shared Computer .............. Specifying Remote Properties . .............................. Sending and Retrieving Items in Remote Mode ........................ Downloading Items, Rules, Addresses, and Documents to Your Remote Mailbox Sending Items in Remote Mode .............................. Viewing Pending Requests... aoaaa aaa 4,44. Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded . ................ Using Busy Search in Remote Mode. ........................... Filtering the System Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox . .............. Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox . ........................ Configuring Your Remote Connections. . ........................... Connections: ssc ek pus eee ep NE acute Had sen our à Creating a Modem Connection ............................... Creating a TCP/IP Connection ............................... Creating a Network Connection. . ............................. Copying a Remote Connection . . ............................. Editing a Remote Connection. . .............................. Deleting a Remote Connection . .............................. Specifying Your Remote Location ............................. Remote (Offline) Mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) .......................... Working! Offline: : ai i era Bee ak Soe add Bond le ees EE de age à Ra dt a Using Caching Mode CachingiFeatureS. eii. rd ee paint a ne ee à Re ee eS Setting Up Your Caching Mailbox ............................... Synchronizing Your Caching Mailbox with Your Online Mailbox. ............... Deleting Items in Your Caching Mailbox . ........................... Opening a Different Version of a Document in Your Caching Mailbox. ............ Viewing Pending Requests .................................. Connection: Status o soi dese eA. aS Re Rd ees Ga eal As EA A a Using Newsgroups Adding a News Account .................................... Contents 11 12 13 12 Deleting a News Account... .. 2... 2 a 262 Subscribing to: Newsgroup: -isas ee RR RO A eR BOR A de E A Ee OR ee md 262 Posting a New Discussion to a Newsgroup... 1... a 263 Replying to a Message ina Newsgroup. ........................................ 263 Adding a Signature to All Newsgroup Items You Send ................................. 264 Changing the Display Name for Newsgroup Postings... ............................... 264 Updating the Local Newsgroup Folder ......................................... 264 Deleting an Item in a Newsgroup from Your GroupWise Item List . .......................... 265 Collapsing or Expanding All Threads ina Newsgroup ................................. 265 Performing a Search on a Newsgroup Server. . .................................... 265 Marking Items in a Newsgroup According to Your Interests. . ............................. 265 Indenting Newsgroup Reply Text with a Specific Character. . ............................. 265 Specifying Download Settings for Individual Newsgroups. ... 2... e... o... 266 Sending Secure Message (S/MIME) 267 secure Message Concepts: ior racs Hon atout de de oe BOR EE AUA EA eh RE Ee E 267 Digitally Signing or Encrypting an Item . 2... aaa a 269 Digitally Signing or Encrypting All Items. ................. a 269 Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority . ............................. 270 Selecting a Security Service Provider... : paru telea go a e e a EE ee 4 271 Selecting a Security Certificate for Digitally Signing Items ............................... 271 Searching for Recipient Encryption Certificates Using LDAP .............................. 271 Selecting the Method Used for Encrypting Items .. 2... 2... e... 272 Checking If the Digital Signature of an Item Was Verified. . .............................. 273 Viewing Security Certificates You Have Received and Changing the Trust. . ..................... 273 Viewing Your Own Security Certificates... 2... . ................................. 273 Importing or Exporting Security Certificates... . ... .... .. ... ....................... 274 Creating and Working with Documents 275 Managing Your Documents in GroupWise ....................................... 275 Storing Documents in Libraries . . ......................................... 276 Understanding Document References. ........... a a 277 Specifying Document Properties. 2... cerro RS ee np db a don 278 Creating Documents. .......... 8... 279 Creating a Document Using an Application's Template . .............................. 280 Creating a Document Using a GroupWise Template . ............................... 280 Creating a Document Using a File as a Template. . ................................ 281 Making Any Documenta Template ......................................... 282 Creating a Reference to a Document ........................................ 282 Organizing Your Documents .............................................. 282 Specifying When Document References Are Added to the Documents Folder. .................. 283 Changing the Maximum Number of References in the Documents Folder . .................... 284 Importing Documents into a GroupWise Library... 2... e... 284 Specifying Files:to Import... isc PP ae ea pe Pa ae be bea ee eee ba ew eb ee 285 Choosing an:Import Method ass 4 s a Mes Bode me a a ee eins e BE ee SS Se ite e à 285 Importing Documents Using Quick Import. . .................................... 285 Importing Documents Using Custom Import. . ................................... 286 Sharing Documents <i. ee Pa bee a Ge at bee hae ee ep ea baa eae de D Ce ee ba es 289 Specifying Users Who Can Share the Document . ................................. 289 Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents. . ................................ 290 Specifying Users’ Rights to the Document. . .................................... 290 Giving a User Rights for All Document Versions. . . ................................ 290 Giving a User Rights to a Specific Document Version. . .............................. 291 Giving Users Rights to Modify the Sharing Settings for a Document ........................ 292 Preventing Other Users from Accessing Your Document .............................. 292 Publishing Documents to the Web with WebPublisher . ................................ 292 Publishing a Document to the Web . . :. 1... 1,1, 1,84 ss she au eue 294 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Unpublishing a Document from the Web... 2... aaa a 295 Viewing the History ofa Document. ........... a 295 Viewing the Activity Log for Deleted Documents . ................................. 295 Viewing the Activity of a Document. ........................................ 295 Viewing Who Has a Document Open or Checked Out. .............................. 296 Checking Out Documents: st oa BORE Sk tanins eek PR on ru anni ee ee a KS 296 Checking Out:a Document: ss 4 28.8 spe a PE eG eke À dat A HU a 297 Checking Out Multiple Documents ......................................... 297 Viewing All the Documents You Have Checked Out ................................ 298 Updating a Checked-Out Document Without Checking It In . ........................... 298 Checking:In Documents: oos 2.5 8e o a ee ee ae ee ee ee ee ee at Bk 299 Checking in a Document and Leaving a Copy in the Check-Out Location . .................... 300 Checking in an Unchanged Document . ...................................... 301 Checking in a Document and Deleting It from the Check-Out Location. . ..................... 301 Checking In a Document and Making It a New Version. . ............................. 301 Deleting DOCUMENTS +.) dior LUE a nt a ae ea ee ee A AA par er 301 Deleting Groups of Documents. . ......................................... 302 Deleting a Document Reference from Your Mailbox . ............................... 302 Deleting a Specific Version of a Document. .................................... 303 Deleting All Versions of a Document ........................................ 303 Copying: DOCUMENTS. f s Æ 4 pt laitages AAA A RR es a Ae paa 303 Copying a Docüment + s votaan a ee oe Ronan woe Boh on Beat manie Eire ee Pa ES 304 Copying a Document to Another Library . ..................................... 304 Saving Documents eiet den a Bae de Pa de a ee ee ig RE AE ee def ho PEE 304 Saving Items:as Documents: . : : 4 42342, à 40h deg a bg à a à he pu tes pe na 304 Saving Changes to a Document's Contents . ................................... 305 Saving Documents Outside of the GroupWise Library . . ............................. 305 Opening Documents: 3. as dus cul as Ed Ghee eus td gs GAME eee aOR kona ae Awe PR 306 Opening'a Document: s se s 0 mien a tea ee A AA a A AA ee 307 Opening Multiple Versions of a Document ..................................... 307 Storing Multiple Versions of a Document. ....................................... 307 Creating a New Version of a Document. ...................................... 308 Viewing Version Information fora Document. ................................... 308 Specifying the Official Version ofa Document ................................... 309 Managing Groups of Documents. ........................................... 309 Preparing fora Mass:Opératlon: dai ann eee ce eh a eee ee A ee AE ee n ae ee QD 310 Selecting Documents for the Mass Operation . .................................. 310 Acting as the Librarian’ eis siss heen ee o Ok oe eee Bee ee a ee Po ES 311 Copying a Group of Documents .. 2... 2 aa a a 312 Moving. a Group'of Documents... 1124444 cera a hu un a de ae eee ban te 315 Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents. ................................ 318 Changing Sharing fora Group of Documents. ................................... 322 Deleting a Group of Documents . ......................................... 326 Viewing Documents When Your Network or GroupWise Is Unavailable . . ...................... 328 Enabling Document Echoing... 2... te a eean p a ap p e a a aaa a E a aie aA p a 329 Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library. . ........................... 330 Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications... .................................. 330 Integrating Applications During Setup . ...................................... 331 Integrating Applications After Setup ........................................ 331 Turning Off Integrations s s. 22 bora eek Bs E e RO BR E 2h ee Re SA ee oe A s 331 Tuming On:Integrations:. 5. 2,44 Soe a La he et pe ee ee ee a Due 332 Using Non-Integrated Applications .. 2... o... 333 Returning Documents to the Library . . . 2... a 334 Using Reset Document Status .. 2... Coree ni e n E E E e EOR Ea E eon Pos a A a a F oe R 335 Using Reset Document Status in Remote/Caching Mode ............................. 335 Contents 13 14 14 Using the Unreturned Documents Dialog Box. ................................... Replacing a Document with a File from Backup... 2... 0... .... e... a Customizing GroupWise Delaying Delivery of an Item. .............. e Getting a Return Receipt for Items You Send. ..................................... Requesting a Reply for All Items You Send. ...................................... Specifying Where Archived Items Are Stored ..................................... Setting the File Attachment Behavior . ......................................... Changing the Priority of Items You Send . ....................................... Customizing: Headers’ sgn tanpi le net a aanp dé le oe tie in delete RITA Gok a apte Hosts à Changing the GroupWise Interface Language ............ a L Changing Your Default Views. . = s e a +... 2... . o... ee Specifying How Long Before an Event an Alarm Sounds. ............................... Automatically Spell-Checking Every Message You Send. ............................... Customizing Your Toolbar: : 4 saie o ua RA mue ER e A Reis BE EAE A eA Ke ee à Customizing Your Library Settings . .............. e Setting the Default, Library -2 se + aon e te ee e he eat Re Dee ee oe, A S 0 E A Using, Startup*Opuons:. cut a al ee oe COA A 2G ea as Boe aa Ge eae à Using a GroupWise Startup Option... 2... aaa a a GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions Documentation Updates September 19, 2005 (GroupWise 6.5SP5). 0... aa a a February 28, 2005 (GroupWise 6.5 SP4).. 0... a Oclober:20 200420 cc tna las tae ne Meese ee Dod, Sh eat Be Pe a ae SO ate ik de O eed hy Bi Pog a October 820044: rica ns Ae te Mabe Mesh RS Rien ody & ae oa December 18, 2003 (Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0) ............................... October 3120030: taa hae es Aeon swe Gok alae Got aul ive A Bh a kee awe aed oe 4 July 16; 2003'(GroupWise:6:5:'SP1)~ =. se kes aoc iE fim See A itn Se E eo Se eee ee eS à GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide About This Guide This Novell® GroupWise® 6.5 Windows Client User Guide explains how to use the GroupWise Windows* client. The guide is divided into the following sections: “Getting Started” on page 17 “Logging In to GroupWise” on page 39 “Working with Items in Your Mailbox” on page 45 “Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise” on page 103 “Scheduling Group and Posted Items” on page 105 “Using Your Calendar” on page 127 “Managing Your Mailbox” on page 139 “Using the Address Book” on page 203 “Using Remote Mode” on page 239 “Using Caching Mode” on page 257 “Using Newsgroups” on page 261 “Sending Secure Message (S/MIME)” on page 267 “Creating and Working with Documents” on page 275 “Customizing Group Wise” on page 339 “Documentation Updates” on page 353 Additional Documentation For additional GroupWise documentation, see the following guides at the Novell GroupWise 6.5 documentation Web site (http://www.novell.com/documentation/lg/gw65): ¢ Installation Guide + Administration Guide + Multi-System Administration Guide + Interoperability Guide + Troubleshooting Guides + GroupWise WebAccess Client User Guide + GroupWise Cross-Platform Client User Guide Documentation Updates For the most recent version of the GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide, visit the Novell GroupWise 6.5 documentation Web site (http://www.novell.com/documentation/lg/gw65). This User Guide has been updated with information about the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise™ Linux* Services 1.0. Information that applies to this release only is marked with (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0). For installation instructions, see the Novell About This Guide 15 16 Nterprise Linux Installation Guide (http://www.novell.com/documentation/lg/nnls/install/data/ front.html). For a list of known issues, see the Novel! Nterprise Linux Services Release Notes (http: //www.novell.com/documentation/Ig/nmnls/readme/data/front.html). Documentation Conventions In Novell documentation, a greater-than symbol (>) is used to separate actions within a step and items in a cross-reference path. A trademark symbol CC TM, etc.) denotes a Novell trademark. An asterisk (*) denotes a third-party trademark. User Comments We want to hear your comments and suggestions about this manual and the other documentation included with this product. Please use the User Comment feature at the bottom of each page of the online documentation, or go to www.novell.com/documentation/feedback.html and enter your comments there. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Getting Started Group Wise is a robust, dependable messaging and collaboration system that connects you to your universal mailbox anytime and anywhere. This section gives you an introductory overview of the GroupWise® client to help you start using the GroupWise client quickly and easily. + + “Starting the GroupWise Client” on page 17 “Using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 18 “Getting Acquainted with the Main GroupWise Window” on page 20 “Using Different GroupWise Modes (Online, Caching, and Remote)” on page 26 “Understanding Your Mailbox” on page 27 “Using the Toolbar” on page 32 “Using Shortcut Keys” on page 34 “Learning More” on page 36 Starting the GroupWise Client To begin using Group Wise, you or your system administrator must install GroupWise on your computer. Your system administrator might prompt you to install GroupWise by using ZENworks”. This section contains the following topics: + + “Running the Setup Program” on page 17 “Starting GroupWise 6.5” on page 17 Running the Setup Program 1 If you are not automatically prompted to install GroupWise, contact your system administrator to find out the location of the GroupWise client Setup program, setup.exe. 2 Make sure you are logged in as yourself on your computer. 3 Click Start, click Run, browse to the file location, select setup.exe, then click OK. 4 Follow the instructions in the Setup Wizard. Starting GroupWise 6.5 1 Double-click 9 on your desktop to display the GroupWise Main Window. Getting Started 17 Using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) The following is information about the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0. + + “Setting Up an Account and Starting the Collaboration Client” on page 18 “Using the Collaboration Client” on page 19 For installation instructions, see the Novell Nterprise Linux Installation Guide (http:// www.novell.com/documentation/lg/nnls/install/data/front.html). Setting Up an Account and Starting the Collaboration Client 18 When you start the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 for the first time, you need to set up an account to access your NetMail™ 3.5 account on the NNLS server. oa bh © 14 16 Double-click $ on your desktop. If you are prompted to enter a GroupWise password without an option to select Remote Mailbox Path, click Cancel. Select Remote Mailbox Path, then click OK. When prompted to create the folder for this path, click Yes. When prompted to set up an account, click OK. Ifthe Location Information dialog box displays, specify the required information, then click OK twice. In the Create Account dialog box, type a name for the account, such as your NetMail username. In the Account Type drop-down list, select IMAP4. Click Next. In the Incoming Mail Server field, type the full DNS name of the NNLS server. In the Login Name field, type the account name you typed in Step 7. Click the next two fields to populate them with the correct information. In the From Name field, type the name you want to display when sending items from this account. Click Next twice. Using the Up and Down buttons, position the new folder in the Folder List. Click Finish. In the Folder List, click the account you just created. Log in to the NNLS server by entering your username and password. You might see a momentary delay while the database is populated on the local hard drive. In the Folder List, click the Inbox folder to display messages and appointments in the Item List. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Now that this account is set up, when you want to log in to the GroupWise Collaboration Client, double-click the desktop icon, make sure Remote Mailbox Path is selected (or add the /pr- path_to_remote_mailbox startup switch to the Target field in your desktop shortcut), then click OK. Click the account in the Folder List. Using the Collaboration Client Features Using this client, you can access your NetMail 3.5 account messages, as well as messages from any POP3, IMAP4, or NNTP account. You can set up any accounts you want to connect to under the Accounts menu. For information, see “Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to Group Wise” on page 60 and “Adding a News Account” on page 261. The following features are new in the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0: IMAP4 Shared Folders You can share your IMAP4 account folders with other users in the same IMAP4 domain. For example, you can share your NetMail folders with other users in the NetMail domain. The IMAP4 domain must support sharing folders. For more information, see “Downloading POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to Group Wise” on page 58, “Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to GroupWise” on page 60, “Sharing an IMAP4 Folder (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 67, and “Seeing IMAP4 Folders That Are Shared with You (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 67. Free Busy Search on a CAP Server You can perform a free busy search on other users in your NetMail account domain or on users in any other IMAP4 account domain that supports CAP (Calendar Access Protocol). Before you can perform a free busy search, you need to add a CAP server account on the CAP tab in the Accounts dialog box. For more information, see “Scheduling an Appointment for Other Users” on page 106, “Performing a Busy Search” on page 109, “Adding a CAP Account to Group Wise (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111, and “Modifying Properties of a CAP Account (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111. Remote (Offline) Mode You can run this client in two different modes: + Remote, which automatically connects to your NetMail system and IMAP4/POP3/NNTP accounts at periods you specify. + Remote (Offline), which never automatically connects. Working offline is beneficial when you are working on a disconnected laptop and do not need to connect, and also when you want to reduce charges for online time. If you select to connect while in Remote (Offline) mode, your mode is changed to Remote mode and a connection is made. After the connection has completed, you can return to Remote (Offline) mode by clicking File, then clicking Work Offline. For more information, see “Using Different GroupWise Modes (Online, Caching, and Remote)” on page 26 and “Remote (Offline) Mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 255. Getting Started 19 Unsupported Features Because this client will generally be running against a NetMail back end and not a GroupWise back end, some functionality in the user interface is not supported. Unless you run this client against a Group Wise back end, the following GroupWise functionality is not supported: + + + + + + + Online and Caching Modes Proxy GroupWise Client Rules (although NetMail rules that are set up in NetMail are supported) Document Management Junk Mail Handling Shared Address Books Routing Slip Status Tracking (seeing status information on the Properties tab of a sent item) Notify GroupWise Messenger For a list of known issues, see the Novell Nterprise Linux Services Release Notes (http:// www.novell.com/documentation/lg/nnls/readme/data/front.html). Getting Acquainted with the Main GroupWise Window 20 Your main work area in GroupWise is called the Main Window. From the Main Window of GroupWise, you can read your messages, schedule appointments, view your Calendar, manage contacts, change the mode of GroupWise you’re running in, open folders, open documents, and much more. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Toolbar Folder and Item List Header File Edit View Actions TiJols Accounts Window Help Folder List Toolbar 2 Mailbox Show: All Categories «2 ® Sophie Jones | rom Subject ate | of [5] Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM rand Sent Items Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM = ar (le Mike Palu Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM ontacts El Documents fa) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM Y Checklist ul Claudia Wong Project status report due Wijdnesd. 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM El Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM [F Work In Progress EJ Cabinet B Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employ|»e oftl 1/3/2003 2:04:17 PM © Trash E Samantha Murphy Afternoon doughnuts in the |linchre 1/3/2003 2:05:34 PM > Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM ie |vl4|B3 =] aja | © + Brey > Foward - From: Tabitha Hu To: Sophie Jones Subject: Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM] 4 Okay, let's make it 10:30.| >>> Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:52:01 PM >>> How about next Tuesday before lunch? ` Sue Tahithe Lis 199s 7.0449 NM nue | Selected: 1 | Total: 10 Quick Viewer Item List You can open more than one Main Window in GroupWise by clicking Window, then clicking New Main Window.This is useful if you proxy for another user. You can look at your own Main Window and the Main Window belonging to the person you are proxying for. You might also want to open a certain folder in one window and look at your Calendar in another. You can open as many Main Windows as your computer’s memory will allow. The basic components of the Main Window are explained below. The toolbar lets you quickly accomplish common GroupWise tasks, such as opening the Address Book, sending mail messages, and finding an item. The Display drop-down list on the toolbar lets you change the display of your Item List. For information about the toolbar, see “Using the Toolbar” on page 32 and “Customizing Your Toolbar” on page 345. Folder and Item List Header The Folder and Item List header provides a drop-down list where you can select the mode of GroupWise you want to run (Online, Caching, Remote, or Remote (Offline) (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)), select to open your archived or backup mailbox, and select a proxy mailbox. For information about these features, see “Using Different GroupWise Modes (Online, Caching, and Remote)” on page 26, “Archiving the Items in Your Mailbox” on page 162, “Backing Up Your Mailbox” on page 180, and “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171. This header also provides the Show drop-down list, from which you can select to see only items of a specific category. For information about categories, see “Using Categories to Organize Items” on page 81. Getting Started 21 Folder List User Folder Mailbox Folder The new Filter icon (Y) is also on this header, giving you convenient access to predefined and custom filters. For information about filtering, see “Filtering Items” on page 187. To change how information displays in headers, right-click the header and choose options. For more information, see “Customizing Headers” on page 342. The Folder List at the left of the Main Window lets you organize your GroupWise items. You can create new folders to store your items in. Next to any folder (except for shared folders), the number of unread items is shown in square brackets. Next to the Sent Items folder, the number in square brackets shows how many items are pending to be sent from Caching or Remote mode. For information about the different GroupWise folders, see “Using the Folder List” on page 140. If you want, you can close your folder list to leave more room for other views, such as the Calendar, in the Main Window. Click View, then click Folders List to open or close the Folder List display. Here is what you’ll find in each of the default folders: + “User Folder” on page 22 + “Mailbox Folder” on page 22 + “Sent Items Folder” on page 23 + “Calendar Folder” on page 23 + “Contacts Folder” on page 23 + “Checklist Folder” on page 23 + “Cabinet” on page 24 + “Documents Folder” on page 24 + “Work in Progress Folder” on page 25 + “Junk Mail Folder” on page 25 + “Trash Folder” on page 25 + “Shared Folders” on page 25 + “IMAP4 Account Folder” on page 26 + “NNTP Newsgroup Account Folder” on page 26 Your user folder $ (indicated by your name) represents your GroupWise database. All folders in you Main Window are subfolders of your user folder. The Mailbox # displays all the items you have received, with the exception of scheduled items (appointments, tasks, and reminder notes) you have accepted or declined. Accepted scheduled items are moved to the Calendar. 22 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Sent Items Folder Calendar Folder Contacts Folder Checklist Folder The Sent Items folder 4h displays all sent items from the Mailbox and Calendar. The Sent Items folder in versions prior to GroupWise 6.5 was a query folder, which had some differences from the current Sent Items folder. The following is a comparison between the previous Sent Items query folder and the current Sent Items folder. Sent Items Folder (Current) Sent Items Query Folder (Previous) A system folder that cannot be deleted. A Find Results folder that can be deleted and re- created. (For more information about Find Results folders, see “Understanding Find Results Folders” on page 142.) All sent items reside in this folder unless they are No items actually reside in this folder. This folder is moved to a folder other than the Mailbox or a Find Results folder, which means a Find is Calendar. If a sent item is moved to another performed when you click the folder and the results folder, it no longer displays in the Sent Items of the Find (all sent items) are displayed in the folder. folder. If you delete an item from this folder, the original item remains in its original folder and redisplays the next time you open this folder. You can resend, reschedule, and retract sent You can resend, reschedule, and retract sent items items from this folder. from this folder. The Calendar folder El shows several calendar view options. If you hide your Folders list by clicking View, then clicking Folders List, the Main Window shows a better view of your Calendar. The Contacts folder Æ, by default, represents the Frequent Contacts address book in the Address Book. (You can change the folder properties so that it represents a different address book in the Address Book. For information, see “Changing the Address Book the Contacts Folder Displays” on page 151.) Any modification you make in the Contacts Folder will also be made in the Frequent Contacts address book. From this folder, you can view, create and modify contacts, resources, organizations and groups. Your proxies will never see your Contacts folder. Use the Checklist folder 4 to create a task list. You can move any items (mail messages, phone messages, reminder notes, tasks, or appointments) to this folder and arrange them in the order you want. Each item is marked with a check box so that you can check items off as you complete them. If you want another folder to work the way the Checklist folder does, click the folder, click the Display drop-down list on the toolbar, then select Checklist. The folder will then have a Checklist area at the top of the folder where you can drag items. The following is a comparison between the Checklist folder and the Task List query folder (found in previous versions of GroupWise). Getting Started 23 Cabinet Documents Folder 24 Checklist Folder A system folder that cannot be deleted. This folder contains the following items: + Items you have moved to this folder + Items you have created in this folder + Items in other folders that you have marked Show in Checklist + Items that are part of a checklist that you have created in another folder Any item type can reside in this folder. To mark an item completed, click the check box next to the item in the Item List. To set a due date, open the item, click the Checklist tab, then specify a date. To set the priority of an item, drag the task toa new position in the checklist. Checklist items do not display in the Task List of the Calendar. If a checklist item is due today, the check box in the Checklist is green. If a checklist item is past due, the check box is red. Task List Folder A Find Results folder that can be deleted and re- created. (For more information about Find Results folders, see “Understanding Find Results Folders” on page 142.) No items actually reside in this folder. This folder is a Find Results folder, which means a Find is performed when you click the folder and the results of the Find (all scheduled tasks) are displayed in the folder. If you delete an item from this folder, the original item remains in its original folder and redisplays the next time you open this folder. Only tasks show in this folder. Tasks are scheduled items that are associated with a due date. To mark an item completed, open the item, then click Completed. Due dates are set by the person who sent you the task. If you post a task for yourself, you can set a due date. To set the priority of an item, open the item, then type a priority in the Priority field. Tasks display in the Task List of the Calendar and can be marked Completed from the Calendar. Tasks that are past due show as red in the Calendar. The Cabinet LJ contains all your personal folders. You can rearrange and nest folders by clicking Edit, then clicking Folders. You can change how the folders are sorted by right-clicking the Cabinet folder, clicking Properties, then selecting what you want to sort by. Your document references are organized in the Documents folder El so you can locate them easily. Any document references you create or open will be added to the Documents folder; if you specify, any document references you view or import will also be added. You can also specify that none of these actions adds a document reference to the Documents folder. The Documents folder can contain only documents. If any other type of item is moved to this folder by a GroupWise client older than version 5.5 (for example, from an older version of Group Wise Remote), the item will be deleted. The Documents folder contains, by default, your 20 most recent document references. You can change this number from 0 to 5000 document references. After the maximum number is reached, GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide the oldest document reference will be deleted. You can also manually delete document references from the Documents folder. The Documents folder has two Find Results folders. Authored contains document references for all the documents which you are the author of. Default Library contains document references for all the documents you have access to in the default library. You can change or delete the Author and Default Library folders. You can create other document Find Results folders according to your needs. For example, you can create a Find Results folder for a specific library, subject, author, or document type. Work in Progress Folder Junk Mail Folder Trash Folder Shared Folders The Work In Progress folder [À is a folder where you can save messages you have started but want to finish later. All e-mail items from addresses and Internet domains that are junked through Junk Mail Handling are placed in the Junk Mail folder Gd. This folder is not created in the folder list unless a Junk Mail option is enabled. While Junk Mail options are enabled, this folder cannot be deleted. However, the folder can be renamed or moved to a different location in the folder list. If all Junk Mail options are disabled, the folder can be deleted. The folder can also be deleted if the Junk Mail Handling feature is disabled by the system administrator. To delete items from the Junk Mail Folder, right-click the folder, click Empty Junk Mail Folder, then click Yes. For more information about Junk Mail Handling, see “Handling Unwanted Mail” on page 92. All deleted mail and phone messages, appointments, tasks, documents, and reminder notes are stored in the Trash folder Y. Items in the Trash can be viewed, opened, or returned to your Mailbox before the Trash is emptied. (Emptying the Trash removes items in the Trash from the system.) You can empty your entire Trash, or empty only selected items. Items in the Trash are automatically emptied according to the days entered in the Cleanup tab in Environment Options, or you can empty the Trash manually. The system administrator may specify that your Trash is emptied automatically on a regular basis. A shared folder 13 is like any other folder in your Cabinet, except other people have access to it. You can create shared folders or share existing personal folders in your Cabinet. You choose whom to share the folder with, and what rights to grant each user. Then, users can post messages to the shared folder, drag existing items into the folder, and create discussion threads. You can't share system folders, which include the Cabinet, Trash, and Work In Progress folders. If you place a document in a shared folder, people with rights to the shared folder don't automatically have rights to edit the document. Before they can edit the document, you must give them Edit rights on the Document Sharing tab. Getting Started 25 IMAP4 Account Folder If you add a folder for an IMAP4 account, a Y icon displays in your Folder List. NNTP Newsgroup Account Folder Item List QuickViewer If you add a folder for an NNTP newsgroup account, a Y icon displays in your Folder List. The Item List on the right side of the Main Window displays your mail and phone messages, appointments, reminder notes, tasks, and document references. You can sort the Item List by clicking a column heading. To reverse the sort order, click the column heading a second time. For information about the icons used with different items, see “Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar” on page 28. The Quick Viewer opens below the Folder and Item List. You can quickly scan items and their attachments in the Quick Viewer rather than open each item in another window. For information about the Quick Viewer, see “Reading Items in the Quick Viewer” on page 77. Using Different GroupWise Modes (Online, Caching, and Remote) Online Mode GroupWise provides four different ways to run the GroupWise client: Online mode, Caching mode, Remote mode, and Remote (Offline) mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0). You might be able to run GroupWise in any of the four modes, or your system administrator might require that you use only a certain mode. Most GroupWise features are available in all four GroupWise modes, with some exceptions. Subscribing to other users’ notifications is not available in Caching mode. Subscribing to other users’ notifications and Proxy are not available in Remote mode. Any feature that requires a connection, for example to the GroupWise system or to an IMAP4 account, is not available in Remote (Offline) mode. If you are running GroupWise against a NetMail back end, only Remote mode and Remote (Offline) modes are available. See “Using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 18 for more information. When you use Online mode, you are connected to your post office on the network. Your mailbox displays the messages and information stored in your network mailbox (also called your Online Mailbox). Online mode is connected to your network mailbox continuously. In Online mode, if your Post Office Agent shuts down or you lose your network connection, you will temporarily lose your connection to your mailbox. You should use this mode if you do not have a lot of network traffic, or if you use several different workstations and do not want to download a local mailbox to each one. 26 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Caching Mode Remote Mode Caching mode stores a copy of your network mailbox, including your messages and other information, on your local drive. This allows you to use Group Wise whether or not your network or Post Office Agent is available. Because you are not connected to the network all the time, this mode cuts down on network traffic and has the best performance. A connection is made automatically to retrieve and send new messages. All updates are performed in the background so your work is not interrupted. To use Caching mode, the client installation must be a standard installation, not a workstation installation. You should use this mode if you have enough disk space on your local drive to store your mailbox. Several users can set up their Caching Mailboxes on a single shared computer. If you run Caching Mode and Remote Mode on the same computer, the same local mailbox (also called the Caching Mailbox or Remote Mailbox) can be used to minimize disk space usage. If disk space is limited, you can restrict the items that are downloaded to your local mailbox. You can specify to get the subject line only or specify a size limit. For more information about setting up Caching Mode, see Chapter 10, “Using Caching Mode,” on page 257. Remote mode is familiar to Group Wise users on the road. Similar to Caching mode, a copy of your network mailbox, or the portion of the mailbox you specify, is stored on your local drive. You can retrieve and send messages on a periodic basis with the type of connection you specify (modem, network, or TCP/IP). If you do not want a complete copy of your network mailbox, you can restrict what is retrieved, such as only new messages or only message subject lines. To use Remote mode, the client installation must be a standard installation, not a workstation installation. For more information about setting up Remote Mode, see Chapter 9, “Using Remote Mode,” on page 239. Remote (Offline) Mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) Remote (Offline) mode is the same as Remote mode except that connections are not made automatically. Working offline is beneficial when you are working on a disconnected laptop and do not need to connect, and also when you want to reduce charges for online time. If you want to connect to your accounts, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click the account. A message displays asking if you want to stop working offline. After you click Yes, your mode is changed to Remote mode and a connection is made. After the connection has completed, you can return to Remote (Offline) mode by clicking File, then clicking Work Offline. Understanding Your Mailbox All of your items, whether you send or receive them, are stored in your GroupWise Mailbox. You can quickly display only received items, sent items, posted items, or draft items by clicking a setting on the Display drop-down list. You can further restrict which items display in your Mailbox by using filters. See Chapter 7, “Managing Your Mailbox,” on page 139 for more information. Getting Started 27 You can organize your messages by moving them into folders within your Cabinet, and you can create new folders as necessary. See “Using the Folder List” on page 140 for more information. You can also organize your messages by assigning them categories. Each category displays as a different color in your Mailbox. You can filter on categories. See “Using Categories to Organize Items” on page 81 for more information. Bolded Items in Your Mailbox All unopened items in your Mailbox are bolded to help you easily identify which items and documents you have not yet read. The icon appearing next to an item also indicates if it is unopened. Collapsed discussion threads are marked with bold text to show that there are items in the thread that are unread. This saves you the time of expanding each thread to check if there are newly posted items. Sent items are also bolded to show when they are queued but not uploaded, status information has not been received about the item being delivered, or they have not yet been transferred to the Internet. Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar 28 The icons that appear next to items in your Mailbox and Calendar show information about the items. The following table explains what each icon means. Icon Description L Next to an item you have sent in Remote or Caching mode, the [Sl icon indicates that the item has been queued, but the queue has not been uploaded. After the item has been uploaded, this icon indicates that status information has not been received about the item being delivered to the destination post office or transferred to the Internet. Next to the Sent Items folder, the T icon indicates that there is at least one item that has been queued but the queue has not been uploaded. Appears next to an item you have sent. If the item has been opened by at least one person, this icon will appear until all recipients have 1) opened the mail, phone message, or reminder note; 2) accepted the appointment; or 3) completed the task. J Appears next to an item you have sent. The item couldn't be delivered to the destination post office or it failed to transfer to the Internet. Appears next to an item you have sent. Next to an appointment or task, this icon indicates that at least one person has declined/deleted the item. Next to a mail message, phone message, or reminder note, this icon indicates that at least one person has deleted the item without opening it. E One or more attachments are included with the item. eli One or more sound annotations are included with the item, or the item is a voice mail message. # Draft item. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Icon Description Appears next to an item you have sent. Appears next to an item you have replied to. Appears next to an item you have forwarded. Appears next to an item you have delegated. Appears next to an item you have replied to and forwarded Appears next to an item you have replied to and delegated. Appears next to an item you have forwarded and delegated. Appears next to an item you have replied to, forwarded, and delegated Posted item. Specific version of a document. Official version of a document. Unopened mail message with a low, standard, or high priority. Opened mail message with a low, standard, or high priority. Unopened appointment with a low, standard, or high priority. Opened appointment with a low, standard, or high priority. Unopened task with a low, standard, or high priority. Opened task with a low, standard, or high priority. TA ss ww wees Case Unopened reminder note with a low, standard, or high priority. eee Opened reminder note with a low, standard, or high priority. Unopened phone message with a low, standard, or high priority. DIRA Opened phone message with a low, standara, or high priority. The sender has requested that you reply to this item. The item can be a low, standard, or high priority. gs uy $ Getting Started Icon Description @ This icon appears in a Busy Search. If it appears to the left of a username or resource, you can click a scheduled time across from the username or resource on the Individual Schedules tab to display more information about the appointment in the box below. However, the user or resource owner must give you appointment Read rights in the Access List before this icon appears. See “Adding and Removing Proxy Names and Rights in Your Access List” on page 172. wW This icon appears on your Calendar. An alarm is set for the item. This icon appears on your Calendar. The item is a group appointment, reminder note, or task. a This icon appears on your Calendar. The item is marked private. a This icon appears on your Calendar. You declined the item but didn’t delete it. Viewing Options in Your Mailbox Details 30 You can view the items in your Mailbox five different ways, depending on how you want the information organized. Details, Discussion Threads, Panels, As Calendar, and As Checklist are all found on the View menu. You can choose to have the display settings be temporary or permanent depending how you set them. To permanently set your display setting: 1 Right-click the folder you want to change the display settings for, then click Properties. 2 Click the Display tab, then click More Display Settings. 3 Select the display setting from the View By drop-down list. 4 Click OK twice. To temporarily set your display settings: 1 Click View > Display Settings, then the display setting you want. Details displays a list of your items and information about them in columns, including Subject, Date, CC, Priority, Document Type, Due Date, Size, Version#, and many other categories. Details is the default Mailbox view if you have not changed your Mailbox properties. For information about adding or rearranging columns, see “Using the Columns in Your Mailbox” on page 197. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Novell GroupWise - Mailbox ($ Sophie Jones cé Sent Items E Calendar 3) Contacts [El Documents [%, Checklist [A Work In Progress E Cabinet © Trash Pr oY Mai box Show: All Categories 42 a Els Tabitha Hu Xander Dominguez Re: What's a good time... Customer Satisfaction Reports Els | Mike Palu Final Test Plan Sophie Jones Claudia Wong Jason Stevens Samantha Murphy Grace Smith Matt Barnard Final Test Plan Project status report due Wednesd. I forgot to mention... Afternoon doughnuts in the lunch rc Submit your vote for Employee of tl Project Meeting 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM 1/3/2003 2:05:34 PM 1/6/2003 11:59:59 AM 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM Y | Selected: 1 | Total: 1004 Discussion Threads Discussion Threads shows the e-mail discussion of an original item and all its replies grouped in hierarchical order. $ô Novell GroupWise - Mailbox af x] File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | @ address Book B Q | Brewmal + DNewappt ~ GyNewtak + À | D E- 0 - ¿2 Mailbox = = | © - rer > Gr Show: All Categories ($) Sophie Jones 9 SUE ap Sent Items [E] Calendar @® Contacts [El Documents [%, Checklist [F Work In Progress a er a a Tabitha Hu Sophie Jones 2 Tabitha Hu $ Xander Dominguez What's a good time... Re: What's a good time... Re: What's a good time... Customer Satisfaction Reports $ | Mike Palu Final Test Plan Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM 1/2/2003 7:52:01 PM 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM 8 Cabinet Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... = Pr -a e e a 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM x X Cal ains enen ana | Selected: 1 | Total: 11 A As Calendar As Calendar displays all scheduled items saved in a particular folder. This is useful if you organize all your appointments and other items for a specific project in one folder. $ô Novell GroupWise - Mailbox l File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | E Address Book D Q | Brewmal + GBnew Appt + GyNewtak + À | D E- 0 - || > Br + Fr ($) Sophie Jones ¿Pro aa Sent Items E Calendar 3) Contacts ¢ GI Technology Ideas [6] (3 Messages from Director o Status Reports POP3 Account © Trash C3 Feedback From Training Meetit [El Documents [% Checklist it Core ream [ Work In Progress Meeting S Cabinet [1/13/2003 ao dib 47b 431)» 4365)» MEN Tue Jan 14, 2003 | Wed Jan 15, 2003 Thu Jan 16, 2003 oM Ga Es] Ea olaa Friday Jan 17, 21 Getting Started 31 As Checklist As Checklist displays a checklist area at the top of your Item List where you can create a checklist using the items in your Item List. Each item that is dragged to the checklist area displays with a check box so that you can mark it completed. You can assign due dates, priorities, and more to checklist items. Any items you move to the checklist area will also display in the Checklist folder in the Folder List. For more information about creating a checklist, see “Creating a Checklist” on page 86. $ô Novell GroupWise - Mailbox PETES] File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | E address Book Ba | É New Mail ~ Ef) New Appt ~ GeyNewTask + Ñ | E En >| ES | © - Br + Fr? LP Mailbox Show: All Categories “, ($ Sophie Jones © YA TES) O[E Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM dl Sent Items Ol Ge Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM E Calendar o E] Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesd. 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM a Hesse o B Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee of tl 1/6/2003 11:59:59 AM Y Checklist 6 Tabitha Hu What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM A Work In Progress A Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM Cabinet (je Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM © Trash Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM El Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM En Camanth>s Murenhu fiftornoon doughnut. in the hunch ee 12/2002 7-15-24 DM xl | Selected: 1 | Total: 1004 Using the Toolbar Use the toolbar to access many of the features and options found in GroupWise. The toolbar at the top of a folder or item is context sensitive; it changes to provide the options you need most in that location. You can customize each toolbar by adding and deleting buttons, choosing button order, and placing separators between buttons. Customizing the Toolbar Display 1 Ifthe toolbar is not displayed, click View, then click Toolbar. 2 Right-click the toolbar, then click Customize Toolbar. 3 Click the Show tab. 32 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 5 7 10 11 12 Toolbar Properties 2) xi Show | Customize | © Picture © Picture and text sja [E] LA | Q | | Address Book | Find | Property al i @& Address Book | Q | | m Display options © Single row of buttons only. C Multiple rows of buttons, if necessary. All buttons will be displayed. JV Show display settings drop-down list I Show item context toolbar J” Show folder context toolbar Click how you want the toolbar to display. To remove or show the Display drop-down list, deselect or select the Show Display Settings Drop-Down List check box. To show the buttons that are most useful for the selected item, select Show Item Context Toolbar. To show the buttons that are most useful for the selected folder, select Show Folder Context Toolbar. Click the Customize tab. To add a button, click a category in the Categories list box, click a button in the Controls box, then click Add Button. Categories are menu titles in the Main Window. The buttons in the Controls box correspond to features found under the menu title. For example, the buttons for the File category are actions under the File menu (opening views, printing, saving, and so on). To remove a button, leave the Toolbar Properties dialog box open, then drag the button off the toolbar in the Main Window. To change the order of a button on a toolbar, leave the Toolbar Properties dialog box open, then drag the button to a new location on the toolbar in the Main Window. To add space between buttons, leave the Toolbar Properties dialog box open, then drag one button away from the other button. or To remove space between buttons, leave the Toolbar Properties dialog box open, then drag one button toward another button. Getting Started 33 13 Click OK. Using Shortcut Keys You can use a number of shortcut keys in GroupWise for accessibility or to save time when you perform various operations. The table below lists some of these keystrokes, what they do, and the context where they work. Keystroke Action Where It Works F1 Open online help Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box F2 Search for text In an item F4 Open the selected item Item List F5 Refresh the view Main Window, Calendar F8 Mark the selected item Private Item List F9 Open the Font dialog box In an item Ctrl+A Select all items; select all text Item List; text Ctri+B Bold text In text Ctrl+C Copy selected text In text Ctrl+D Open a new document Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog management document box Ctrl+F Open the Find dialog box Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Ctrl+G Go to today’s date Calendar Ctrl+I Italicize text In text Ctrl+L Attach a file to a message In a new item Ctrl+M Open a new mail message Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Ctrl+N Normal text In text Ctrl+O Open the selected message Item List Ctrl+P Open the Print dialog box Main Window, item Ctrl+Q Turn the QuickViewer on and off Main Window, Calendar Ctrl+R Mark the selected item unread Item List Ctrl+S Save a draft in the Work in In an item Progress folder Ctrl+U Underline text In text Ctrl+V Paste selected text In text GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Keystroke Ctrl+X Ctrl+Z Ctrl+Enter Ctrl+Del Ctrl+F 1 Ctrl+Up-arrow or CtrltDown-arrow Ctrl+Shift+Left-arrow or Ctrl+Shift+ Right- arrow Ctrl+Shift+L Ctrl+Shift+A Ctrl+Shift+D Ctrl+Shift+T Ctrl+Shift+R Ctrl+Shift+P Alt+F4 Alt+F6 Alt + [letter] Alt + D Alt+Enter Action Cut selected text Undo the last action Open the selected item Delete an item Open the Spell Checker Open the previous or next item Select text one word at a time Insert numbered or bulleted list Open a new appointment Open a new document reference Open a new task Open a new reminder note Open a new phone message From the Main Window or Calendar, exit GroupWise. From an item, exit the item. From a dialog box, exit the dialog box. Toggle between the Main Window and the most recently opened item Activate the menu bar (Use the underlined letters in the menu names) Send item Display the properties of the selected item Where It Works In text In text Item List In an item In an item In an item In text In text Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Main Window, Calendar, item, dialog box Main Window, item Main Window, Calendar, item In a new item Item List Getting Started 35 Keystroke Shift+Left-arrow or Shift+Right-arrow Shift+End or ShifttHome Shift + [letter] Tab Shift+Tab Ctrl+Tab Learning More Action Select text one character at a time Select text to the end or beginning of a line In the Folder List, Shift + the first letter of a subfolder name goes to the subfolder. Cycle through fields, buttons, and areas Reverse the order of cycling through fields, buttons, and areas In text, indent the text. In a tabbed dialog box, open the next tab. Where It Works In text In text Folder list Main Window, Calendar, dialog box, item Main Window, Calendar, dialog box, item In text, dialog box You can learn more about GroupWise from the following resources: + “Online Help” on page 36 + “GroupWise 6.5 Documentation Web Page” on page 36 + “GroupWise Cool Solutions Web Community” on page 37 Online Help Complete user documentation is available in Help. In the Main Window, click Help, click Help Topics, then use the Contents tab, Index tab, or Search tab to locate the help topics you want. In order to use Help with the Group Wise client, you must have Internet Explorer 4.x or higher installed. GroupWise 6.5 Documentation Web Page For this user guide and extensive Group Wise administration documentation, go to the Group Wise 6.5 area on the Novell Documentation (http://www.novell.com/documentation/lg/gw65/docui/ index.html) Web site. This user guide is also available from the GroupWise client by clicking Help, then clicking User’s Guide. 36 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide GroupWise Cool Solutions Web Community At GroupWise Cool Solutions, you’Il find tips, tricks, feature articles, and answers to frequent questions. In the Main Window, click Help, then click Cool Solutions Web Community or go to http://www.novell.com/coolsolutions/gwmag (http://www.novell.com/coolsolutions/gwmag). Getting Started 37 38 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Logging In to GroupWise This section tells you about GroupWise® login options and GroupWise passwords. + + “Logging In to GroupWise” on page 39 “Assigning Passwords to Your Mailbox” on page 41 Logging In to GroupWise When you start GroupWise, you might be prompted to type information such as your password, TCP/IP address of your post office agent, and so forth. This Startup dialog box changes, depending on the information GroupWise needs to be able to open your Mailbox, and the GroupWise mode that you log in to. Your system administrator might restrict the GroupWise modes you can log in to. You can use a startup option to force the Startup dialog box to be displayed when you start GroupWise. + + + “Logging In to Your Mailbox” on page 39 “Logging In to Your Mailbox from Another User’s Workstation” on page 40 “Logging In to the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 41 Logging In to Your Mailbox 1 Start Group Wise. If you have not specified a password for your Mailbox and GroupWise needs no additional information, you will bypass the Startup dialog box and GroupWise will be displayed. To force the GroupWise Startup dialog box to be displayed, right-click the GroupWise icon on the desktop, click Properties, click the Shortcut tab, in the Target box, after the GroupWise executable, type a space, type /@u-?, then click OK. For information about other startup options, see “Using Startup Options” on page 347. If you are prompted for a password, type the password in the Password box. Click the mode of GroupWise you are logging in to and type additional information necessary, such as the path to the post office, the TCP/IP address and port of the post office agent, the path to your Caching or Remote mailbox. If you do not know the required information, contact your system administrator. 4 Click OK. Logging In to GroupWise 39 Logging In to Your Mailbox from Another User’s Workstation You must be on the same post office as the other user to log into your own Mailbox from his or her workstation. 1 Log in to the network with your own user ID. or To force the Group Wise Startup dialog box to be displayed, right-click the GroupWise icon on the desktop, click Properties, click the Shortcut tab, in the Target box, after the GroupWise executable, type a space, type /@u-?, then click OK. 2 Start GroupWise. £^ Novell GroupWise Startup HES UserID (Required): [wong Password: | @ Online Address: {100.101.105.9 Port: [1677 © Caching mailbox path: fc Snovell\groupwise\vemote 2 Remote mailbox path: c:\novellgroupwise\remote Cancel | 3 Type your user ID in the User ID box. 4 Click the Password box, type your password, then click OK. Logging in to Your Mailbox from a Shared Workstation Ifyou use the same workstation for multiple people, it is highly recommended that each user have a separate login for the workstation. When GroupWise saves the display settings for a user, the settings are saved to the current user’s registry. This allows GroupWise to display the settings for the user who is currently logged in to the workstation. This allows you to customize GroupWise the way you want it to look without changing the look for other users. When a user is finished using the workstation, that user should log out of the workstation completely. This allows the next user to log on to the system with his or her own GroupWise settings. However, there are special circumstances when having a different logon for each user on the workstation is not a viable option. In these cases there are some steps you should perform to log in and set up GroupWise properly. + “Using the Login Screen Startup Switch” on page 40 + “Using Notify On a Shared Workstation” on page 41 Using the Login Screen Startup Switch For the login screen startup switch to work properly, you must be on the same post office as the other user to log into your own Mailbox from his or her workstation. 1 Right-click the GroupWise icon on the desktop, click Properties, then click the Shortcut tab. 40 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 2 In the Target box, after the GroupWise executable, type a space, type /@u-?, then click OK. 3 Start GroupWise. £^ Novell GroupWise Startup HEI UserID (Required): [hwong Password: | @ Online Address: [100.101.105.9 Port: [1677 © Caching mailbox path: [c \novell\groupwise\vemote © Remote mailbox path: c:\novellgroupwise\remote Cancel | 4 Type your user ID in the User ID box. 5 Click the Password box, type your password, then click OK. Using Notify On a Shared Workstation To use Notify on a shared workstation, you need make sure Notify is configured to start and close when GroupWise is opened or closed. 1 2 3 In GroupWise, click Tools > Options, then double-click Environment. On the General page, select Start Notify at Startup. This starts Notify when GroupWise starts and closes Notify when GroupWise is closed. Click OK, then click Close. Logging In to the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (V6.5 for NNLS 1.0) For information, see “Using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 18. Assigning Passwords to Your Mailbox You can assign a password to your Mailbox. GroupWise passwords are case sensitive (for example, Wednesday is not the same as WEDNESDAY). If you forget your password, you will not have access to any of your items. + + + “LDAP Authentication” on page 42 “Adding, Changing, and Removing Your Password” on page 42 “Bypassing Your GroupWise or LDAP Password” on page 43 “Proxies and Mailbox Passwords” on page 43 “Mailbox Passwords and Remote Mode” on page 44 “Mailbox Passwords and Caching Mode” on page 44 Logging In to GroupWise 41 LDAP Authentication If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication, your LDAP password is used to access your Mailbox rather than a GroupWise password. With LDAP authentication, you are required to have a password and you cannot remove your password. If your system administrator has disabled changing your LDAP password in Group Wise, you may need to change your password using a different application. Contact your system administrator for more information. Adding, Changing, and Removing Your Password Adding a Password + “Adding a Password” on page 42 + “Changing Your Password” on page 42 + “Removing Your Password” on page 42 If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication, your LDAP password is used to access your Mailbox rather than a Group Wise password, and you cannot add a password using this method. 1 In the Main Window, click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Password tab. 3 In the New Password text box, type the password. 4 In the Confirm New Password text box, type the password, click OK, then click Close. Changing Your Password If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication and has disabled changing your LDAP password in GroupWise, you might need to change your password using a different application. Contact your system administrator for more information. 1 In the Main Window, click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Password tab. 3 In the Old Password text box, type the password you want to change, then press the Tab key. 4 In the New Password text box, type the new password. 5 In the Confirm New Password text box, type the new password again, click OK, then Close. Removing Your Password 42 If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication, you are required to have a password and you cannot remove it. 4 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Password tab. 3 Type your old password, then click OK. 4 Click Clear Password. 5 Click OK, then click Close. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Bypassing Your GroupWise or LDAP Password If you have a password but do not want to be prompted for it every time you start GroupWise, you have several options. The availability of these options depends on the platform on which you run GroupWise, the options your system administrator has set, and other products you have installed. Remember My Password When you run GroupWise on Windows* 95 or higher, are logged in to the network as yourself, and have selected this option in Security Options or during login, you will not be prompted for your password on the current workstation. Windows remembers the password. No Password Required With eDirectory When you are logged in to Novell® eDirectory™ or NDS® as yourself on any workstation and have selected this option in Security Options, you will not be prompted for your password. Because eDirectory has identified you, the password is not required. Use Single Sign-On When you are logged in to eDirectory as yourself on any workstation where Novell SecureLogin is installed and you have selected this option in Security Options or during login, you will not be prompted for your password. Single sign-on locates your stored password. If other users log in to Group Wise on your workstation, they should deselect this option during login. This will not turn the option off, but will make sure their password is not stored in place of yours. Bypassing Your GroupWise Password The availability of these options depends on the platform on which you run GroupWise, the options your system administrator has set, and other products you have installed. 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then make sure the Password tab is selected. 3 Select No Password Required With eDirectory. or Type your password, type a new password, type the new password again, then select Remember Password or Use Single Sign-On. 4 Click OK, then Close. You can also select Remember My Password or Use Single Sign-On in the Startup dialog box at login. Proxies and Mailbox Passwords Setting a password for your Mailbox does not affect a proxy's ability to access your Mailbox. A proxy's ability to access your Mailbox is determined by the rights you assign him or her in your Access List. Logging In to GroupWise 43 Mailbox Passwords and Remote Mode To use Remote mode, you must assign a password to your Online Mailbox. If you assign a password when you're running Remote, the password you create affects only your Remote Mailbox. For example, if you are running Remote mode at home and you create a password in Security Options, the password you create only affects your Remote Mailbox. The password does not affect your Online Mailbox at the office. Changing Your Online Mailbox Password from Remote Mode If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication and has disabled changing your LDAP password in GroupWise®, you might need to change your password using a different application. Contact your system administrator for more information. 1 Click Accounts, click Account Options, then select your GroupWise account. 2 Click Properties, then click Server. 3 Change the password in the Online Mailbox Password field. 4 Click OK. Mailbox Passwords and Caching Mode To use GroupWise in Caching mode, you must assign a password to your Online Mailbox. If you assign a password when you're in Caching mode, the password you create affects only your Caching Mailbox. For example, if you are running in Caching mode and you create a password in Security Options, the password you create only affects your Caching Mailbox. The password does not affect your Online Mailbox. Changing Your Online Mailbox Password from Caching Mode 44 If your system administrator has turned on LDAP authentication and has disabled changing your LDAP password in Group Wise, you might need to change your password using a different application. Contact your system administrator for more information. 1 Click Accounts, click Account Options, then select your GroupWise account. 2 Click Properties, then click Advanced. 3 Change the password in the Online Mailbox Password field. 4 Click OK. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 Working with Items in Your Mailbox GroupWise® provides many options for sending and receiving different kinds of e-mail. + “Understanding GroupWise Item Types” on page 45 + “Sending and Receiving Items” on page 46 + “Using Routing Slip” on page 55 + “Notifying Recipients About an Item You have Sent” on page 58 + “Downloading POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise” on page 58 + “Attaching Files” on page 67 + “Managing Sent Items” on page 72 + “Managing Received Items” on page 76 Understanding GroupWise Item Types Every day you communicate in a variety of ways. To accommodate these needs, GroupWise delivers your items using a variety of item types. Each item type is explained below. Mail A mail message is for basic correspondence, such as a memorandum or letter. Appointment An appointment lets you invite people to and schedule resources for meetings or events. You can schedule the date, time, and location for the meeting. You can use posted appointments to schedule personal events such as a doctor’s appointment, a reminder to make a phone call at a certain time, and so forth. Appointments display on the Calendar. See “Scheduling Appointments” on page 105. Task A task lets you place a to-do item on your own or on another person’s Calendar. You can schedule a due date for the task and include a priority (such as A1). Uncompleted tasks are carried forward to the next day. See “Sending Tasks” on page 112. TIP: You can also create a checklist that is not associated with your Calendar. In this type of checklist, any item type (mail, appointment, task, reminder note, phone message) can be used. For information, see “Creating a Checklist” on page 86. Reminder Note A reminder note is posted on a specific date on your own or another person’s Calendar. You can use reminder notes to remind yourself or others of deadlines, holidays, days off, and so forth. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 45 Posted reminder notes are useful as reminders for birthdays, vacations, pay days, and so forth. See “Sending Reminder Notes” on page 115. Phone Message A phone message helps you inform someone of a phone call or visitor. You can include such information as caller, phone number, company, urgency of the call, and so forth. You cannot answer your phone from a phone message. See “Sending Phone Messages” on page 48. Sending and Receiving Items This section contains the following topics: + “Sending Mail Messages” on page 46 + “Sending Phone Messages” on page 48 + “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49 + “Adding a Signature or vCard to Items You Send” on page 51 + “Spell-Checking Items You Send” on page 52 + “Undoing the Last Text Action” on page 54 Sending Mail Messages A mail message has a primary recipient, subject line, date, and can be carbon copied and blind copied to other users. You can also attach files, document references, sounds, movies, and OLE objects to your mail messages. CC (Carbon Copy) Carbon copy recipients (CC) receive a copy of an item. CC recipients are users who would benefit from the information in an item, but are not affected by or directly responsible for it. All recipients can see that a carbon copy was sent. They can also see the names of the CC recipients. BC (Blind Copy) Blind copy recipients (BC) receive a copy of an item. Other recipients receive no information about blind copies. Only the sender and the blind copy recipient know that a blind copy was sent. If a recipient replies and chooses Reply to All, the blind copy recipient will not receive the reply. ce TE 4 Click on the toolbar. E E You can select a different mail view by clicking the down arrow in anew mai |-| 46 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 2 Inthe To box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for additional users. If necessary, type usernames in the CC and BC boxes. or To select usernames from a list, click Address on the toolbar, double-click each user, then click OK. 3 To change the From name (to another account or proxy), click From: >| then click a name. 4 Type a subject. 5 Type a message. You can specify many options, such as making this message a high priority, requesting a reply from recipients, and more, by clicking the Send Options tab. i LA When convenient within: = 150 Default FE Working with Items in Your Mailbox 47 If you want, you can change the font of the message text. For information, see “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49. 6 Include any attachments by clicking Attach a File on the toolbar. 7 Click Send on the toolbar. Sending Phone Messages 48 A phone message is a note you can send to notify other GroupWise users of calls they received while they were out of the office or unavailable. Phone messages are stored in the recipient’s Mailbox. You cannot answer your phone from a phone message. You can change the phone messages you receive into tasks, reminder notes, or other posted item views. This way, you can leave a record of the conversation on the date it was held (reminder note) or create a to-do item to complete at a later date (task). See “Changing Item Types” on page 98. 1 Click File, click New, then click Phone Message. You can place a New Phone Message button on the toolbar. See “Customizing the Toolbar Display” on page 32. -inix File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Ji sena X Cancel address 2 | O s. | y [El || FFF b u ¡> Phone | Send Options | To: CO Caller: D O Company: eee Phone: DC [F Telephoned D Please call F Will call again M Returned your call [F Wants to see you [ Came to see you F Urgent — From: ~| [Heather Sarmiento 2 Inthe To box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for additional users. If necessary, type usernames in the CC and BC boxes. or To select usernames from a list, click Address on the toolbar, double-click each user, then click OK. 3 Type the name, company, and phone number of the caller. 4 Click the check boxes that apply to this phone message. 5 Type the message in the Message box. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide If you want, change the font of the message text. For information, see “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49. 6 To change the From name (to another account or proxy), click From: >| then click a name. 7 Click Send on the toolbar. Changing the Font of Items You Send The recipient of an item will see the changes you make in Plain Text view if he or she views the item in Plain Text view. The recipient of an item will see the changes you make in HTML view if he or she views the item in HTML view. You might want to let the recipient know which view you composed the item in. This section contains the following topics: + “Changing the Font in Plain Text View” on page 49 + “Changing the Font in the HTML View” on page 50 Changing the Font in Plain Text View 1 In an open item you are composing, click View, then click Plain Text. 2 Click the Message box. 3 Click Edit, click Font, then click Font again. Font: Font style: Size: ES 3 Terminal Italic Cancel | O Times New Roman Bold ‘Fp Times New Roman MT Bold Italic O Trebuchet MS Li O Verdana x Effects Sample I Strikeout | I Underline EE | Color: MN Black X Script: 4 Click a font and a font style. 5 Click a size. 6 Click any other options you want to change, then click OK. You can also bold, italicize, or underline portions of text using toolbar buttons. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 49 Changing the Font in the HTML View 1 In an open item you are composing, click View, then click HTML. LE — ES File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | fil Send Cancel address 2 | B s.. | [E] Spell Check | a y El Mail | Send Options | From: >| [Heather Sarmiento cc: | To: | BC: | Subject: 2 Use the HTML toolbar to change the font, add background colors, add images, and more. You might need to re-size the item view horizontally to see all the buttons on the HTML toolbar. You can set a default font for items you compose in HTML view. For information, see “Viewing and Composing Items in HTML” on page 100. Formatting Bulleted and Numbered Lists You can easily include bulleted and numbered lists in messages. + “Formatting Lists in Plain Text View” on page 50 + “Formatting Lists in HTML View” on page 50 Formatting Lists in Plain Text View In an open item you are composing in Plain Text view: 1 Press Ctrl+Shift+L to insert a bulleted list. 2 Press Ctrl+Shift+L again to change it to a numbered list. 3 Continue to press Ctrl+Shift+L to select from the six list formats available 4 Type the list item, then press Enter to create the next item in the list. 5 Press Enter twice after the last list item to turn off the list formatting. Formatting Lists in HTML View In an open item you are composing in HTML view: 4 Use the HTML toolbar to insert a bulleted or numbered list 50 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 2 Type the list item, then press Enter to create the next item in the list. 3 Press Enter, then press Backspace after the last item to turn off the list formatting. Adding a Signature or vCard to Items You Send Use Signatures to insert a signature or tag-line at the end of items you send. For example, you can have Group Wise automatically list your name, phone number, and e-mail address at the bottom of every item you send. If you have a number of different accounts, including POP3, IMAP4, and NNTP newsgroup accounts, you can create a different signature for each account. You can also have GroupWise automatically add a vCard*, or virtual business card, to the end of messages. GroupWise searches the Address Book for your user information and places it at the end of any messages you send. This section contains the following topics: + “Understanding .vCard Files” on page 51 + “Adding a Signature or vCard to Items” on page 51 Understanding .vCard Files vCards are electronic business cards formatted according to standards set by the Internet Mail Consortium. A vCard file has a .vcf extension, and you can add the file to your outgoing e-mail items. Third-party companies create software you can use to create vCards that include text, graphics, and sound. When you use GroupWise to generate your vCard, it uses the information from the fields in your Address Book listing. To view a vCard that has been attached to an item, right-click it, then click View Attachment. For information about importing vCard information into an address book, see “Importing Information from a vCard” on page 221. Adding a Signature or vCard to Items 1 To specify a general signature for all items, click Tools, click Options, then click double-click Environment. or To specify a different signature for an individual POP3, IMAP4, or newsgroup (NNTP) account, click Accounts, click Account Options, click the account on the Mail or News tab, then click Properties. 2 Click the Signature tab. 3 Click Electronic Business Card (vCard) or Signature. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 51 General | Views | File Location | Cleanup | Default Actions Signature | Add your signature and/or electronic business card (vCard) to outgoing messages. © Automatically add a @ Prompt before adding Ed M Electronic business card [vCard] [Leave empty to use Address Book generated vCard) OO A E 4 Ifyou selected Signature, type the text you want as a signature in the Signature box. or If you selected vCard, either specify a .vcf file or leave the field empty to have the vCard use information from your listing in the Address Book. 5 Click a signature option. 6 Click OK. You can have both a signature and a vCard at the same time. Spell-Checking Items You Send Use Spell Checker to check for misspelled words, duplicate words, and irregular capitalization in items you are creating. When Spell Checker finds a misspelled word, you can replace it with a word Spell Checker suggests, edit the word manually, or skip the word. You can also define an automatic replacement for the word, or add the word to a user word list. You can use Environment Options to set up Spell Checker to automatically spell check your messages before you send them. This section contains the following topics: + “Spell-Checking an Item” on page 52 + “Spell-Checking Items Automatically” on page 53 + “Editing Your User Word List” on page 53 Spell-Checking an Item 52 1 Click the Subject or Message box. or Select the text to spell-check. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 2 Click Tools, then click Spell Check. Writing Tools Spell Checker | Replace with: Po Skip Once Undo | Replacements: SKP A Add... | Customize + | Add to:fwTe1US.UwL y] Check: [Document 3 To specify a user word list to add words to, click the Add To drop-down list and select an option. 4 To specify a range of text to check, click the Check drop-down list and select an option. 5 When Spell Checker stops on a word, click any of the available options, or edit the word manually. You can choose from the following options: Replace: Replaces a misspelled word with a word Spell Checker suggests. To replace a misspelled word, double-click the word or click the word, then click Replace. To make your own corrections, edit the word in the Replace With box, then click Replace. Skip Once: Skips the word one time. Spell Checker will stop the next time it encounters the word. Skip Always: Skips every occurrence of the word throughout the document. Spell Checker ignores the word until the next time you spell-check. Add: Adds the word to the current user word list, which stores supplemental words so that Spell Checker can recognize the word in future spell-checks. QuickCorrect: Defines an automatic replacement for a word or phrase. When Spell Checker stops on a word, click QuickCorrect to replace the word with the text in the Replace With box and add the replacement to the user word list QuickCorrect* uses. Next time you type the word, QuickCorrect automatically replaces it. Suggest: Displays additional words or phrases in the Replacements list box. 6 Click Yes when spell-checking is complete. Spell-Checking Items Automatically You can spell-check items automatically every time you click Send. 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Environment. 2 Click Check Spelling Before Send, then click OK. Editing Your User Word List Changes you make in a user word list are effective only if you have QuickCorrect turned on. In the Message box of an item you are creating, click Tools, click QuickCorrect, then make sure the Replace Words As You Type check box has a check mark. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 53 For more information about user word lists, click Tools, click Spell Check in an item you have created. In the Writing Tools dialog box, click Customize, click User Word Lists, then click Help. To make changes in your user word list: 1 In the Spell Checker, click Customize, click User Word Lists, then click the list you want to modify. If you haven’t added lists of your own, the default word list will be the only list available. User Word Lists FX ee jose Language: [English-U.S. (US) y] Word lists: Help —— Add List... | Remove List | Word list contents Contents of: [CANWTBIUS. UWL Word/Phrase: Replace with: fe l © lr ® 1/2 pS acomodate accommodate hd Add entry | elete Enty | EE 2 To add a new entry, type it in the Word/Phrase text box, then click Add Entry. or To delete an entry, select it, then click Delete Entry. or To change an entry, select it, make the changes, then click Add Entry. 3 Click Close when you have finished making changes. Undoing the Last Text Action You can undo the last text action in the Subject or Message field of a message you are composing. 1 Click Edit, then click Undo. You can also undo an action by pressing Ctrl+Z. (For information about other shortcut keys, see “Using Shortcut Keys” on page 34.) 54 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Delaying Delivery of an Item Delay Delivery allows you to send an item at a different time than you composed the item. 1 From the new item window, click the Send Options tab. 2 Select Delay Delivery. 3 Specify the number of days to wait until delivery. or Specify the date and time to use for delivery. 4 Click Send. Using Routing Slip Use Routing Slip to send a mail message or task to several users consecutively. You determine the order of the route. When a user marks the routed item Completed, it is sent to the next user on the route. If there are attachments to the routed item, each user on the route can view and add comments to them. When comments are added to an attachment, all subsequent users on the route will see the comments. The final user on the route will see all the comments that were added. You can track the status of a routed item you have sent by checking the item's Properties. When you send a routed item to an external address, the item is automatically marked Completed (because the external recipient will not be able to mark it) and sent to the next user on the route. If you want to prevent a proxy from marking routed items Completed, you can require a password to complete a routed item. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a Routed Item” on page 55 + “Requiring a Password before Marking a Routed Item Completed” on page 56 + “Completing a Routed Item” on page 56 + “Addressing a Routed Item with an Address Book” on page 57 Creating a Routed Item 1 Open a mail message or task. 2 Click Actions, then click Routing Slip. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 55 -iix File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Gi sena X Cancel address 2 | A s. | yA EN | FE b U ¿ | espe * Mail | Send Options | From: >| [Sophie Jones Route: | Subject: GC 3 Inthe Route box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for each user included in the route. or Click Address on the toolbar to select usernames from the Address Selector dialog box. You can also specify personal groups as recipients of a routed item. When you use the Address Selector dialog box, the group is expanded into its members so that you can specify the order of the users in the route. 4 Type a subject and message. 5 Ifyou want to prevent a proxy from marking routed items Completed, you can require the recipient's GroupWise password to mark the item Completed. Click the Send Options tab, click Security, then select Require Password to Complete Routed Item. 6 Click Send on the toolbar. Requiring a Password before Marking a Routed Item Completed To require a password for all routed items you create, 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Send Options tab. 3 Select Require Password to Complete Routed Item. 4 Click OK. For information on Group Wise passwords, see “Assigning Passwords to Your Mailbox” on page 41. Completing a Routed Item 1 When you are finished with the assignment or instructions in the routed item, open the item. 2 Ifyou need to view and edit an attachment to the routed item, open the attachment in its associated application, make your changes, then save the file. The file is saved to your 56 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide computer's temporary files directory. Do not change the path, or your changes will not be included when the routed item is sent to the next recipient. Close the application. IMPORTANT: To be able to edit attachments in a routed item, you must have the GroupWise 5.5 Enhancement Pack or higher installed. 3 In the item, select Actions, click Mark Completed, then click OK. You can also select the Completed check box in the item header. 4 Ifthe sender has required a password to complete the item, type your Group Wise password, then click OK. The item is sent to the next user on the route. 5 Click Close. Addressing a Routed Item with an Address Book 1 Ina mail message or task, click Address on the toolbar. 2 Select the Routing Slip check box. sò Address Selector 21xj Look in: [a Novell GroupWise Address Book +] Route | Look for: | Match | Name v| Selected: Routing Slip M | [Names | E-MailAddress | a Heather Sarmien hsarmiento'WCorporate.corr a Jason Stevens jstevens@Corporate.com a Joe Pangilinan jpangilinan@Corporate,com a Kuo-Chang Huan khuang@Corporate.com a Lori Tanaka ltanaka@Corporate.com @ Lunchroom Lunchroom@Corporate. corr a Martha de la Tori a) a Matt Barnard mbarnard@Corporate.com a Mike Palu mpalu@Corporate.com A Project Future Project En oc oo a New Contact Details XK Remove Cancel | 4 3 Ctri+click names in the order you want to route the item, then click Route. or Double-click names in the order you want to route the item. Use drag and drop to change the order of names in the list of addresses. 4 Click OK. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 57 Notifying Recipients About an Item You have Sent 1 To notify the recipients of one item, open an item view > click the Send Options tab. or To notify the recipients of all items you send, click Tools > Options > double-click Send. 2 Click Notify Recipients. Users are automatically subscribed to Notify in Options. If they have deselected to receive alarms and notifications, they cannot be notified of messages you send. For more information, see To receive notification for another user or resource. 3 Click OK. Downloading POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise 58 If you have multiple e-mail accounts, you know that it's inconvenient to change locations to look at each account. You can add your POP3 and IMAP4 Internet mail accounts to Group Wise so that you can read and send messages for all your accounts from Group Wise. Adding POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise Before you add a POP3 or IMAP4 account to Group Wise, you need to know the type of mail server being used (POP3 or IMAP4), your account name and password, and the name of the incoming and outgoing mail servers. You can get this information from your Internet Service Provider or LAN administrator. Microsoft* Secure Password Authentication is supported for accessing Exchange servers and MSN accounts. Configuring POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts The Accounts menu in the GroupWise Main Window allows you to access account features, such as adding an account, setting account properties, and sending and retrieving items from Internet mail accounts. $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox E = oj xj File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | & Address Book Ba | É New Mail ~ Ef) New Appt ~ GeyNewTask + Ñ | g fal | fA- LP Mailbox Show: All Categories “> ($) Sophie Jones | From subject [Date ? [| 4 © 89 [Maibox][5] El Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM e Sent Items fs Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM EJ Calendar Els Mike Palu Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM Contact: = a fee 3) Sophie Jones Fi E Checkist T Ee’ [A Work In Progress Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM 8 Cabinet Samantha Murphy Afternoon doughnuts in the lunch re 1/3/2003 2:05:34 PM © Trash Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee oftl 1/7/2003 11:59:59 AM | GH Reply + [A Accepi ” | Last Connection: 1/7/2003 11:33:34 AM | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 Total: 10 Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Online Mode If the Accounts menu is not available in your Online Mailbox, your system administrator has specified that POP3 and IMAP4 accounts cannot be used in Online mode, or your post office is not using a GroupWise 5.5 Enhancement Pack or higher Post Office Agent. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts in Remote and Caching Modes While you are using Remote mode, you can check Internet mail accounts without connecting to Group Wise. The Accounts menu is always available in Remote mode. If you are using Group Wise in either Remote mode or Caching mode, you have the option of not uploading a POP3 or IMAP4 account to your Online Mailbox. To make sure you don't upload, click Accounts, click Account Options, select an account, click Properties, then uncheck Upload This Account to the GroupWise Online Mailbox. Storing Items on the IMAP4 or POP3 Server Your IMAP4 account items are always stored on the IMAP4 server. You can choose to have your POP3 account items stored on the POP3 server. If you store items on the server, you can read those items from more than one computer. Understanding IMAP4 Accounts When you add an IMAP4 account, the folder you see in Group Wise represents the folder on your IMAP4 server. Any actions in the GroupWise folder, such as creating, sharing (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0), renaming, or deleting, are performed on the IMAP4 server as well. 44 Novell GroupWise Caching - My IMAP4 Account Š = Dl xj File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | & Address Book Ba | É New Mail ~ Ef New Appt ~ GiyNewTask ~ Y | E E - | A - | Y- = My IMAP4 Account Show: All Categories 42 ($) Sophie Jones | [name Subject tte | Y FY Mailbox [5] Sa Sent Items E] Calendar D Contacts El Documents [%, Checklist [F] Work In Progress Cabinet | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 0 | Total: 0 À If you are sharing an IMAP4 folder (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0), the IMAP4 server must support sharing folders. You can only share IMAP4 folders with a user who is on the same IMAP4 server. When you delete an item, it is marked for deletion on the IMAP4 server. To remove the item, you need to purge it. You can download only the subject (header) of an item, or you can download the entire item. You can move items from another folder into an IMAP4 folder, and the items will be created on the IMAP4 server. If you use your IMAP4 account while you are in Remote mode, any changes you make will be synchronized with the GroupWise server the next time you connect to your Online Mailbox. Querying in IMAP4 folders is not supported. Proxy for IMAP4 folders is not supported. Using the GroupWise E-Mail Importer Utility The GroupWise E-Mail Importer Utility lets you import information from supported POP3 and IMAP4 clients into GroupWise. The Accounts > Account Options > Add option lets you create Working with Items in Your Mailbox 59 new accounts. For information about importing accounts from supported e-mail clients, see “Importing POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts” on page 64. This section contains the following topics: + + + + + “Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to GroupWise” on page 60 “Modifying Properties of a POP3 or IMAP4 Account” on page 61 “Downloading Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts” on page 61 “Downloading New Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts Automatically” on page 62 “Downloading Only the Header (Subject) for IMAP4 Accounts” on page 62 “Using GroupWise to Send POP3 and IMAP4 Mail” on page 63 “Deleting an Item from a POP3 or IMAP4 Account” on page 63 “Connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 Server Using SSL” on page 64 “Importing POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts” on page 64 “Storing Your POP3 Items on a Mail Server” on page 65 “Changing the Length of Time for POP3 and IMAP4 Server Timeouts” on page 66 “Subscribing and Unsubscribing to IMAP4 Folders” on page 66 “Alphabetizing the Folders in an IMAP4 Account” on page 66 “Downloading Voice Mail Attachments through an IMAP4 Account” on page 66 “Sharing an IMAP4 Folder (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 67 “Seeing IMAP4 Folders That Are Shared with You (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 67 Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to GroupWise Make sure you know the type of mail server being used (POP3 or IMAP4), your account login name and password, and the name of the incoming and outgoing mail servers. 60 Contact your NetMail™ system administrator (if it's a NetMail IMAP4 account (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)) or Internet Service Provider for this information. 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click Add. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Create Account 3 Follow the prompts. Modifying Properties of a POP3 or IMAP4 Account 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the Account you want to modify. Accounts OP3 IMAP4 MailandNews POP3 3 Click Properties. 4 Click the tabs to find the properties you want to modify. 5 Modify the properties, then click OK. For IMAP4 accounts, if you change the account name, the name of the IMAP4 folder is also changed. Downloading Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts 1 To download items from one account, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click the account name. or Working with Items in Your Mailbox 61 To download items from all accounts in which Include This Account When Doing Send/ Retrieve On All Marked Accounts is selected in the account properties, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click All Marked Accounts. In Remote mode, if Include This Account When Doing Send/Retrieve On All Marked Accounts is selected in Remote Properties, you can download items from your Online Mailbox at the same time as your Internet mail accounts. Downloading New Items from POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts Automatically 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click General Options. Internet Account General Settings q 2) x] General | Display name: [Hany Wong I” Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts every [15 2 minute(s] TF Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts at startup Hana up when Send/Retreve is done IV am of unsent messages at exit T Use ICAL when sending appointments via SMTP 3 To download items periodically, select Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts Every _ Minutes. Specify how often you want items to be sent and retrieved. 4 To download items every time you start GroupWise, select Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts at Startup. The settings will affect all accounts that have Include This Account When Doing Send/Retrieve On All Marked Accounts selected in the account’s properties. If you have created new items for these accounts and have not yet sent them, they are sent at the same time new items are downloaded. To quickly turn this option on and off, click Accounts, then click Auto Send/Retrieve. It is active when a check mark is displayed. Downloading Only the Header (Subject) for IMAP4 Accounts 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the IMAP4 account, then click Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 62 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide IMAP Account Properties axi General | Server | Connection Advanced | Signature | Root folder path: | V Only show subscribed folders N Download headers only I~ Download new items only IV Send/Retrieve when folder is selected T Remove items from trash as they are deleted Incoming mail server (IMAP4] [143 Temporary se: I Use SSL Certificate: Outgoing mail server (SMTP): [25 T Use SSL Certificate: Temporary session-only certificate: 1 a Minutes to wait for server to respond I Download extemal file bodies I” Detailed error messages 4 Select Download Headers Only. 5 Click OK, then click Close. After downloading the headers (subjects) of items, you can download the complete item by opening the item while you are connected to the Internet. Using GroupWise to Send POP3 and IMAP4 Mail 1 In an item you want to send, click Actions, click Send Using, then click the account from which you want to send. or Click F9 Y] then click the account. The From name associated with that account will be in the From box of this item. To set the default account from which items will be sent, click Accounts, click Account Options, click an account, then click Set Default. Deleting an Item from a POP3 or IMAP4 Account 1 To delete an item from an IMAP4 or POP3 account, click the item, then press Delete. or To delete an IMAP4 item from the IMAP4 server, drag the item from the IMAP4 folder and drop it in a regular Group Wise folder. or To delete POP3 items from the POP3 server as they are downloaded, click Accounts, click Account Options, double-click the POP3 account, click the Advanced tab, make sure Leave A Copy Of Messages On The Server is unchecked, then click OK. If you select both Leave A Copy Of Messages On The Server and Remove From Server After _ Days, the POP3 items will be deleted from the POP3 server the specified number of days after the item is downloaded. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 63 If you select both Leave A Copy Of Messages On The Server and Remove From Server After Deleting From Trash, the POP3 items will be deleted from the POP3 server when you manually empty them from the Trash. If GroupWise automatically empties your Trash, the items will not be deleted from the POP3 server. Connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 Server Using SSL You can connect to your POP3 or IMAP4 mail server using SSL, an Internet security protocol that helps maintain the confidentiality of your messages. In order for you to use this option, your mail server must support SSL. 1 2 3 4 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. Click the account, then click Properties. Click the Advanced tab. Select Use SSL, then specify the digital certificate you want to use. This certificate enables GroupWise to use SSL to authenticate to the mail server you have chosen. (If no certificates are listed in the drop-down list, you need to use your Web browser to obtain a certificate from an independent Certificate Authority. For more information, see “Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority” on page 270.) Click OK, then click Close. Importing POP3 and IMAP4 Accounts Use the GroupWise E-Mail Importer Utility to import existing POP3 and IMAP4 accounts into Group Wise. In addition to importing messages from your existing POP3 and IMAP4 accounts, you will save time by not having to retype address book entries into the Group Wise address book. 64 1 Click File, then click Import POP3/IMAP. $ Copy POP3/IMAP messages, addresses, and account settings into GroupWise = oj x| File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help New á | É New Mail ~ Ef New Appt ~ GyNewTask + Ty | fa E- | fA- | GB Reply + [accept ” Open Archive Open Backup LP Mailbox Show: All Categories “a ipl ee úl | [from [swbjee [Date | Dot re | Tabitha Hu What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM Import Documents... i , A Import POP3/IMAP Ea] Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM FT — le Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM Sharing Els Mike Palu Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM Properties Alt+Enter 3) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM a Project status report due Wednesd. 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM pus Ctrl+P El Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM Print Calendar... El Samantha Murphy Afternoon doughnuts in the lunch re 1/3/2003 2:05:34 PM Retrieve... Sol Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee oftl 1/7/2003 11:59:59 AM E z > Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM lode aa Aent | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Tota: 10 4 2 3 4 The Installed E-Mail Clients list box displays the e-mail accounts installed on your machine. Select the e-mail account you want to import into GroupWise, then click Next. Click the appropriate check boxes to import the account information into GroupWise. You can choose e-mail messages, address books, account settings, or any combination of the three. Click Next. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 5 Click the folders that you want to import from your existing e-mail account into Group Wise. When you import a folder, all messages and subdirectories in that folder will also be imported. 6 Click Next. 7 Type a name for the new GroupWise folder that will contain the imported messages and folders, use the Up, Down, Right, and Left buttons to position the folder in the GroupWise Cabinet, then click Next. 8 Type a name for the new GroupWise address book that will contain the imported addresses. The name you type will display on a new tab in the GroupWise Address Book. 9 Click Next. 10 Click the accounts that you want to import into Group Wise, then click Next. 11 Accept the default name for the new account, then click Next. or Select the account folder in the list box, click Change Folder, type a new name, click OK, then click Next. 12 Review the summary information to ensure that it is correct, then click Next. or Click Back to change your import options. 13 Ensure that the e-mail account was successfully imported, then click Done. Storing Your POP3 Items on a Mail Server 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the POP3 account name. 3 Click Properties. 4 Click the Advanced tab. MailandNews Properties aix General | Server | Connection | Folder Advanced | Signature | Incoming mail server (POP3) {110 I UseSSL Certificate: |<Temporary session-only ce Outgoing mail server (SMTP): [25 I Use SSL Certificate: Temporary session-only certificate: 1 a Minutes to wait for server to respond I” Detailed error messages Working with Items in Your Mailbox 65 5 Click Leave A Copy Of Messages On The Server. 6 Click OK, then click Close. Changing the Length of Time for POP3 and IMAP4 Server Timeouts 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the account name. 3 Click Properties. 4 Click the Advanced tab. 5 Type the number of minutes in the Minutes To Wait For Server To Respond box. 6 Click OK, then click Close. Subscribing and Unsubscribing to IMAP4 Folders This feature is available if your IMAP4 server supports subscribing and unsubscribing to folders. When you unsubscribe to a folder, it no longer displays in your list of folders under the IMAP4 server, even though it is still in your IMAP4 account. This is especially useful if you are accessing an NNTP account through an IMAP4 folder. 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the IMAP4 account, then click Folders. 3 Click the All tab to see all the folders in this account. or Click the Subscribed tab to see the folders you are currently subscribed to. 4 Ifyou want to list folders containing specific text in the folder name (instead of listing all of the folders), type the text in the Search for Folders Containing text box, then click Search. 5 Click the folder name, then click Subscribe. or To unsubscribe to a folder, click the folder name, then click Unsubscribe. 6 Click Close. Alphabetizing the Folders in an IMAP4 Account 1 In the Folder List, right-click the IMAP4 account folder, then click Sort Folders. This option is not available if the folders are already alphabetized. Downloading Voice Mail Attachments through an IMAP4 Account 66 If you are accessing a telephony server through this IMAP4 account, GroupWise can download the external file bodies for voice mail attachments. 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the IMAP4 account, then click Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 Select Download External File Bodies. 5 Click OK, then click Close. Sharing an IMAP4 Folder (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) For information, see “Sharing an Existing Folder with Other Users (v6.5 and v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 145. Seeing IMAP4 Folders That Are Shared with You (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) When an IMAP4 folder is shared with you, you do not receive a message in Group Wise notifying you of the shared folder. To see the IMAP4 folders that have been shared with you, as well as the public folders in an IMAP4 account, follow these steps: 1 In the Folder List, right-click an IMAP4 account folder, then click Subscribe to Folders. 2 Click the Shared Folders tab. The list shows all the folders that have been shared with you for this IMAP4 account. To see them in your Folder List, you need to subscribe to them. 3 Click the folder name, then click Subscribe. or To unsubscribe to a folder, click the folder name, then click Unsubscribe. To see and subscribe to the public folders that are in this IMAP4 account, click the Public Folders tab and follow the same steps. 4 Click Close. Attaching Files Use Attach File to send one or more files to other users. You can attach a file that exists on your hard disk, diskette, or network drive. The recipients can open the attached file, save it, view it, or print it. If you change the attached file after you have sent it, the recipients will not see the changes. If you attach a file that is password-protected, the recipient cannot open or view the attachment without entering the password. For information about attaching documents that are in a GroupWise Library, see “Attaching a Document Reference to an Item” on page 68. This section contains the following topics: + “Attaching a File to an Item” on page 68 + “Attaching a Document Reference to an Item” on page 68 + “Embedding an OLE Object in an Item” on page 70 + “Viewing Attached Files” on page 71 + “Opening Attached Files” on page 71 Working with Items in Your Mailbox 67 Attaching a File to an Item 1 Open a new item. 2 Fill in the To, Subject, and Message boxes. 3 Click Attach a File on the toolbar, then browse to and select the file or files you want to send. Attach File Fix] Look in: [E Al Users +] e E Er wl [sa] NTUSER, DAT Desktop Hf NTUSER.DAT.LOG J Documents Favorites Start Menu Files of type: [a Files (*.*] +] Cancel | Document Reference... | To remove an attached file, right-click the attachment, then click Delete. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Send on the toolbar. Moving or deleting a file on a disk or network drive does not affect a file you’ve attached to an item and sent. If you delete an attached file, it is not erased from disk or network drive; it is simply removed from the attachment list. In addition, you can right-click a file in Windows, then select Send To > GroupWise Recipient. A new item is created with the attachment in the attachment window. Attaching a Document Reference to an Item If the file you want to attach is a document stored in GroupWise Library, you can attach a document reference. When a recipient opens the attachment, the document in the library will open if the recipient has rights to open or view the document and if the library is available. If any recipients do not have sufficient document rights, or if they are not using an e-mail product that supports GroupWise Library, or if the library is unavailable, only a copy of the document will open. If the recipient edits the copy, the changes will not affect the actual document in the library. For more information about document rights, see “Sharing Documents” on page 289. Dragging and Dropping an Attachment from a Received Item When you receive an item, you can drag any of its attachments into a folder or onto your desktop. A document reference attachment that you drag and drop will become a shortcut to a document reference or to a copy of the document, depending on your rights to the document and the availability of the library. 68 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Document Reference Attachments and Remote Mode You might receive an item with a document reference attachment when you are running Remote mode. When you open the attachment, the document will open from your Remote Library, even if the document in your Remote Library is an older version than the attachment. If the document does not exist in your Remote Library, you will be prompted to connect now or later to your Online Mailbox to retrieve the document. You can also send items with document reference attachments from Remote mode. However, if the document does not exist in your Remote Library, any recipients who do not have sufficient rights to the document in the Master Library or who are not using an e-mail product that supports GroupWise Library will not receive a copy of the document. In addition, if the Master Library is unavailable, recipients will not receive a copy of the document. If any of these conditions exist, you will need to attach an actual copy of the document in addition to the document reference. To attach a document reference to an item, 1 Open a new item. 2 Fill in the To, Subject, and Message boxes. 3 Right-click in the Attachments box, then click Attach Document Reference. lolx File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | Gl send > X Cancel Addres 2 | W ue | * p E | FF b U z | Mail | Send Options | eC] c > y]. From: y | [Sophie Jones CC: | To: | BC: | Subject: | Attach File... Attach Object... Attach Document Reference... Account: Novell GroupWise 4 The Select Document dialog box displays. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 69 Folders: Available Documents: (® Sophie Jones From Subject PE fg] #) Final Test Plan Sa Sent Items El] Calendar 3) Contacts H-E] Documents [%, Checklist [A Work In Progress E Cabinet © Trash E] Library: Document #: Version: [Development Library (Default) +] fi [Current y] Cancel | Eind | 5 In the Library drop-down list, click the library that contains the document you want to attach. 6 In the Document # box, type the document number. If you don’t know the number of the document, click Find to locate the document in the library. To attach a document displayed in the Find Results dialog box, click the document, then click OK. 7 Inthe Version drop-down list, click which version you want to attach. If you select Specific Version, type the version number in the Version # box. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Send on the toolbar. Embedding an OLE Object in an Item In order for a recipient of an item to view or edit embedded OLE objects, the recipient must be using GroupWise for Windows. For example, a Group Wise for Macintosh* recipient cannot view embedded OLE objects. 1 Open and address an item. 2 Click File, click Attachments, then click Attach Object. Insert Object 27x! Objet pe Microsoft PowerPoint Slide Microsoft Word Document Microsoft Word Picture MIDI Sequence MS Organization Chart 2.0 Package @ Create New Create from File Result Inserts a new Paintbrush Picture object into your p À document. 3 To embed an existing object, click Create from File, type the path and filename, then click OK. Skip to Step 8. 70 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide or To create a new object and embed it, follow Steps 4-8 Click Create New, then select a type of object. Click OK to open the application. Create the object you want to embed. N © a A Click the application’s File menu, then click Exit. This step may differ depending on the application. 8 Complete the item if necessary, then click Send on the toolbar. If the recipients open the object and edit it, they must save it under a new filename. Otherwise, when they try to close the mail message, they’ Il receive an error. If you have copied an OLE object to the Clipboard, you can embed it in an open item by using Paste Special on the Edit menu. Viewing Attached Files When you click an attached file, the attachment is displayed in the message pane with a viewer. This is usually faster than opening the attachment; however, the attachment might not be formatted properly. If the attachment type is not supported, you will receive an error. 1 Open the item containing the attachment. 2 Click the attachment. or Right-click the attachment, then click View Attachment or View in New Window. or If you cannot see an icon representing the attachment in your view, click File, click Attachments, then click View. Opening Attached Files When you open an attached file by double-clicking it, GroupWise determines the correct application to open the file in. You can accept the suggested application, or you can type the path and filename to another application. 1 Open the item containing the attachment. 2 Double-click the attachment. or Right-click the attachment, then click Open or Open With. or If you cannot see an icon representing the attachment in your view, click File, click Attachments, then click Open. By default, GroupWise warns you if an attachment is larger than 1000 KB (1 MB). To eliminate the warning message, click Tools > Options > Environment > Default Actions, then deselect Warn If Larger Than. You can also adjust the attachment size at which the warning message is displayed. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 71 Managing Sent Items This section contains the following topics: + “Confirming Delivery of Items You’ve Sent” on page 72 + “Displaying Sent Items” on page 72 + “Resending Items” on page 73 + “Retracting Items You’ve Sent” on page 73 + “Checking the Status of an Item” on page 74 + “Receiving Notification About Items You Send” on page 74 + “Requesting a Reply for Items You Send” on page 75 + “Changing the Subject of a Sent Item” on page 75 Confirming Delivery of Items You’ve Sent GroupWise provides several ways for you to confirm that your item was delivered. Track an Item You Sent You can check the status in the Properties window of any item you’ve sent. For information, see “Checking the Status of Your Items” on page 73. Receive Notification When the Item is Opened or Deleted You can receive notification when the recipient opens or deletes a message, declines an appointment, or completes a task. For information, see “Receiving Notification About Items You Send” on page 74. Request a Reply You can inform the recipient of an item that you need a reply. GroupWise adds a sentence to the item stating that a reply is requested and changes the icon in the recipient’s Mailbox to a double arrow. For information, see “Requesting a Reply for Items You Send” on page 75. Displaying Sent Items 72 You may want to display items you previously sent. For example, you can read a sent item, resend it with or without corrections, and in some cases, retract it (if it has not already been opened by the recipient). 4 Click the Sent Items folder a in the Folder List. All sent items reside in this folder unless they are moved to a folder other than the Mailbox or Calendar. If a sent item is moved to another folder, it no longer displays in the Sent Items folder. To display sent items that have been moved to other folders, open those folders. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Resending Items Use Resend to send an item a second time, perhaps with corrections. 1 Click the Sent Items folder in the Folder List. Right-click the item you want to resend, then click Resend. If the item was an auto-date item, click This Instance or All Instances. Make any changes to the item, if necessary, then click Send on the toolbar. a A ON Click Yes to retract the original item. or Click No to leave the original item. You can check the Properties of the original item to see if GroupWise was able to retract it. Right- click the item in the Mailbox, then click Properties. Mail and phone messages cannot be retracted if they have already been opened. Retracting Items You’ve Sent Use Delete to retract a sent item from the recipient’s Mailbox. You can retract a mail or phone message from those recipients who haven't yet opened the item. You can retract an appointment, reminder note, or task at any time. 1 Click the Sent Items folder in the Folder List. 2 Right-click the item you want to retract, then click Delete. 3 Select the appropriate option. 4 Ifyou have selected to retract this item from other recipients’ mailboxes, you can type a comment to the recipients, explaining why the item was retracted. 5 Click OK. To see which recipients have opened your message, right-click the item, then click Properties. Checking the Status of Your Items Properties lets you check the status of any item you’ve sent. For example, you can see when an item was delivered and when the recipient opened or deleted the item. If a recipient accepted or declined an appointment and included a comment, you’Il see the comment in the Properties window. Yov’ll also see if a recipient marked a task Completed. Properties also shows information about items you receive. You can see who else received the item (except for blind copy recipients), the size and creation date of attached files, and more. You can save and print status information for an item. For information about a document, use the Activity Log in Properties. See “Viewing the History of a Document” on page 295. This section contains the following topics: + “Checking the Status of an Item” on page 74 + “Saving the Status Information of an Item” on page 74 + “Printing the Status Information of an Item” on page 74 Working with Items in Your Mailbox 73 Checking the Status of an Item 1 Right-click an item in your Mailbox or Calendar, then click Properties. The icons next to an item can give also you helpful status information. See “Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar” on page 28. Saving the Status Information of an Item 1 Right-click an item, then click Properties. 2 Click File, then click Save As. GroupWise gives the item a temporary filename. You can change the filename and default folder to save the file. 3 Click Save. Printing the Status Information of an Item 1 Right-click an item, then click Properties. 2 Right-click in the Properties window, then click Print. Receiving Notification About Items You Send 1 To receive notification for one item, open an item view, click the Send Options tab, then click Status Tracking. = Mail To: 101 x| File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | fil Send + XCancl Baddes 2 | Hs | 2 | Mail Send Options | E] = Sal y ic i») NY Greate a sent item to track information (A 3 Delivered @ Delivered and opened C All information TF Auto-delete sent item | Return notification Status a es General Tracking When opened Mail Receipt $ Ea, deleted Security ~ Internet mail I Enable delivery confirmation (if supported] J” | Send notifications to my mailbox | Account: Novell GroupWise or To always receive notification for items you send, click Tools, click Options, double-click Send, then click the tab for the item type. 2 In the Return Notification group box, specify the type of return receipt you want. 74 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You are automatically subscribed to Notify in Options. If you have deselected to receive alarms and notifications, you cannot receive notifications with Notify. For more information, see “Running Notify” on page 157. If you are sending an item to an Internet address, you can click Enable Delivery Confirmation. If the receiver's Internet e-mail system enables status tracking, you can receive status about the item you send. 3 Click OK. Requesting a Reply for Items You Send 1 To request a reply for one item, open an item view, click the Send Options tab, then click General. or To request a reply for all items you send, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Send. 2 Click Reply Requested, then specify when you want to receive the reply. The recipient sees & next to the message. If you select When Convenient, "Reply Requested: When convenient" appears at the top of the message. If you select Within x Days, "Reply Requested: By xx/xx/xx" appears at the top of the message. 3 Click OK. Changing the Subject of a Sent Item 1 Open an item from your Mailbox or Calendar. 2 Click the Personalize tab. 3 Type a new subject in the My Subject text box. = Mail From: Sophie Jones 101 x! File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | X Close reply + Gp Forward + SF - | SE E | Ed Le | EE? Mail | Properties Personalize | My Subject: |Follow-up to Tabitha Category: He | Edit Categories | Subject: Re: What's a good time... How about next Tuesday before lunch? >>> Tabitha Hu 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM >>> to get together about our new project? Tabitha Working with Items in Your Mailbox 75 This personalized subject will display in your Mailbox and/or Calendar and in the Mailbox and/or Calendar of anyone who proxies for you. If you change the subject of an item in a shared folder, other users of the shared folder will see the original subject. To see the original subject, open the item and look in the Subject field in the item header. When you create a basic filter or perform a Find with a specific word in the Subject field, the filter/ Find results will show items whose original subject or personalized subject contains this word. When you create an advanced filter or find, use the Subject field to search for the original subject, and use the My Subject field to search for the personalized subject. When you create a rule that looks for a specific word in the Subject field, the rule will only look at the original subject. Managing Received Items 76 GroupWise stores all the mail messages, appointments, and other items you receive in your Mailbox. $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox |) x) File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | & Address Book Ba | É New Mail ~ Ef) New Appt ~ GeyNewTask + Ñ | = Er | El LP Mailbox Show: All Categories ©» ($) Sophie Jones | From Subject i ate | Al EP [5] Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM Sent Items Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM il a Mike Palu Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM D Contacts Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM | Reply + [A Accepl bi E Documents 5 " E Checkist a CUINE. [4 Work In Progress Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 31 03: 8 Cabinet Samantha Murphy Afternoon doughnuts in the lunch re 1/3/2003 2:05:34 PM © Trash Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee oftl 1/7/2003 11:59:59 AM | Last Connection: 1/7/2003 11:33:34 AM | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected:1 | Total: 10 From your Mailbox, you can read items, reply to items, and forward items you’ve received. You can organize items by assigning them with categories or by creating a checklist. You can delegate tasks and appointments to other users. You can handle unwanted Internet e-mail with Junk Mail Handling. You can even change an item, such as a mail message, to another type of item, such as an appointment. This section contains the following topics: + “Reading Items You Receive” on page 77 + “Changing the Font of Items You Receive” on page 79 + “Replying to Items You Receive” on page 79 + “Forwarding Items to Other Users” on page 81 + “Using Categories to Organize Items” on page 81 + “Changing the Subject of an Item You’ve Received” on page 85 + “Creating a Checklist” on page 86 + “Delegating Items” on page 91 ¢ “Handling Unwanted Mail” on page 92 + “Changing Item Types” on page 98 + “Viewing and Composing Items in HTML” on page 100 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Reading Items You Receive You can read items you receive in your Mailbox or Calendar. Your Mailbox displays a list of all of the items you have received from other users. Posted appointments, tasks, and reminder notes appear in your Calendar, not in your Mailbox. You can open and read all types of new items in your Mailbox. However, you might want to read, tasks, and reminder notes in your Calendar so you can view new messages while looking at your schedule. Phone and mail messages stay in your Mailbox until you delete them. Appointments, reminder notes, and tasks stay in your Mailbox until you accept, decline, or delete them. When you accept an appointment, reminder note, or task, it is moved to your Calendar. All Mailbox items are marked with an icon.The icons change depending on whether or not the item has been opened. See “Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar” on page 28 for more information. In addition, all unopened items in your Mailbox are bolded to help you easily identify which items and documents you have not yet read. This is especially useful for collapsed discussion threads because it saves you the time of expanding each thread to check if there are newly posted items. This section contains the following topics: + “Reading Items in Your Mailbox” on page 77 + “Reading HTML Items” on page 77 + “Reading Items in the Quick Viewer” on page 77 + “Marking an Item Unread” on page 78 Reading Items in Your Mailbox 1 Double-click the item you want to read. Reading HTML Items For information about reading items that were composed in HTML, see “Viewing and Composing Items in HTML” on page 100. Reading Items in the QuickViewer Use Quick Viewer to scan the contents of your items. QuickViewer saves time because you don’t need to open each item; you simply click an item or press the Down-arrow to read your items. If you click a document reference, the document will display in the Quick Viewer. You can display an item’s attachment by clicking the attachment in the drop-down list on the Quick Viewer toolbar. OLE attachments, however, do not display in the Quick Viewer. When you read an item in the Quick Viewer, the icon changes to the opened status. For example, the closed envelope representing a mail message changes to an opened envelope. You can specify that some folders show Quick Viewer every time you open them, while others never show Quick Viewer. 4 Click D| on the toolbar. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 77 File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | address Book fe) Eb Q | New Mail + New Appt + GeyNewTask + Ty Ta E| E - «I Mailbox Show: All Categories €» (9) Sophie Jones J From Subject aA 49 [Raibox](5) Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM dp Sent Items Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM [E] Calendar Mike Palu Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM a cage Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2008 8:28:44 PM & Checklist Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesd. 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM E Work In Progress Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM EJ Cabinet Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee oftl 1/3/2003 2:04:17 PM © Trash Samantha Murphy Afternoon doughnuts in the lunch rc 1/3/2003 2:05:34 PM Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM PAR a | aa Y + Pyreply + Gl Forward + From: Tabitha Hu 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM To: Sophie Jones Subject: Re: What's a good time... Okay, let's make it 10:30.| >>> Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:52:01 PM >>> How about next Tuesday before lunch? nes Tahithe Les IIS TEIA A nn | Selected: 1 | Total: 10 2 Select to turn the QuickViewer on in all folders or just the selected folder, then click OK. (You can also set this option by clicking Tools, clicking Options, double-clicking Environment, clicking Default Actions, then clicking an option under Show Or Hide QuickViewer On.) 3 Size the QuickViewer by dragging a corner of the window or by dragging the horizontal dividing line up or down. If you size and close the QuickViewer, it will be the same size when you open it again. Size it by dragging a corner of the window, not by clicking the maximize button. 4 In the Mailbox, click each item that you want to read. To view an attachment, click the drop-down list on the Quick Viewer header, then click the attachment. You cannot open OLE attachments in the Quick Viewer. Right-click the Quick Viewer window to choose other options. 5 To change how information displays in the header, right-click the header and choose options. For more information, see “Customizing Headers” on page 342. 6 To close the Quick Viewer, click D| on the toolbar. Marking an Item Unread 78 If you open an item to read it, and then decide you want to read the item later, you can mark the item unread. Marking the item unread changes the item to bold and changes the item’s icon to unopened so you will know you still need to read the item. 41 In the Main Window, click the item in the Item List. 2 Click Actions, then click Read Later. Marking an item you have opened unread does not change the status of the item in Properties. For example, if you have opened an item, then marked the item unread, the sender of the item still sees the item status as Opened in the Properties window. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Changing the Font of Items You Receive This information applies to reading an item in an item view or in the Quick Viewer. This font change is only in effect while you read the item. If you close the item and re-open it, the font returns to the Windows system default font or the font that the sender composed the item in. The Windows system default font affects every program on your desktop. To change the Windows system default font, open the Control Panel and change Display Properties. You cannot change the font in the QuickViewer if the item was composed in HTML view. 1 Select the text you want to change. 2 Click Edit, then click Font. or Right-click the window, click Font, then click Font. A la Font: Font style: Size: A ~ Terminal Italic Cancel | Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman MT Bold Italic O Trebuchet MS | Tunga O Verdana x| Effects m Sample I Strikeout ; AaBbYyZ. I Underline Se ros Color: HB Black + Script: [Westem = | 3 Click a font and a font style. 4 Click a size. 5 Click any other options you want to change, then click OK. Replying to Items You Receive Use Reply to respond to an item. You can reply to everyone who received the original item or to the sender only, without needing to create and address a new message. You can also include a copy of the original message in your reply. Your reply will include Re: preceding the original subject text. You can modify the subject text if you want. This section contains the following topics: + “Replying to an Item” on page 80 + “Replying to an Item in a Shared Folder” on page 80 Working with Items in Your Mailbox 79 Replying to an Item 1 Open the item you want to reply to. 2 Click Reply on the toolbar. Reply REI Options © Reply to all [sender and recipients] Cancel | IV Include message received from sender 3 Click Reply to Sender. or Click Reply to All. To include the message text in your reply, make sure Include Message Received From Sender is selected. 4 Click OK. 5 Type your message, then click Send on the toolbar. If the original item included BC or CC recipients and you selected to reply to all, your reply will be sent to the CC recipients but not to the BC recipients. Replying to an Item in a Shared Folder 1 Open or select an item in the shared folder. 2 Click Reply on the toolbar. Reply EI Opti a C Benito onainel discussion topie Reply privately (outside discussion) (2 To sender only ©) Tip alll(sender and recipients) T Include message received from sender 3 Click a reply option. You can reply to the original discussion topic, rather than to the item you are reading. Or, you can reply to any item you are reading, whether it's an original discussion topic or someone else's reply. In both cases, these replies are posted in the shared folder and not sent to individuals. If you reply privately to the individual who wrote the item, your reply is not posted to the shared folder. 4 Click OK. 5 Type your reply, then click Post on the toolbar. 80 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Forwarding Items to Other Users Use Forward to send items you receive and document references to other users. When you forward an item, it is sent as an attachment to a mail message. The mail message includes your name and any additional comments you have made. This section contains the following topics: + “Forwarding an Item” on page 81 + “Forwarding Multiple Items” on page 81 Forwarding an Item 1 Open the item you want to forward. 2 Click Actions, then click Forward. or Click Actions, then click Forward as Attachment. 3 Add the names of the users to whom you want to forward the item. 4 Type a message (optional). 5 Click Send on the toolbar. If you can’t accept an appointment, task, or reminder note, you can delegate the item instead of forwarding it. Delegating places a Delegated status in the item’s Properties window, letting the sender know you have transferred responsibility for the item to another person. Forwarding Multiple Items 1 Ctrl+click the items you want to forward in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Forward as Attachment. 3 Add the names of the users to whom you want to forward the item. 4 Type a message (optional). 5 Click Send on the toolbar. If you can’t accept an appointment, task, or reminder note, you can delegate the item instead of forwarding it. Delegating places a delegated status in the item’s Properties window, letting the sender know you have transferred responsibility for the item to another person. Using Categories to Organize Items Categories provide you with a way to organize your items. You can assign a category to any item, including contacts. You create and add categories and can give each category an identifying color. The colors display in the Item List and in the Calendar. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 81 82 4% Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | E Address Book B Q | EH New Mail ~ ÉNewappt ~ ÉNewTask ~ Ü | E E| HES | Y + ren ~ 5” 2 Mailbox Show: All Categories «2 ($) Sophie Jones of [8] (1 Tabitha Hu What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM Sent Items E Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM E Calendar Els Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Report :15 PM D Contacts . E Es DZ [El Documents = .. Y Checklist Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM [4 Work In Progress a Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesd. 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM 6 Cabinet El Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM © Trash El El Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee oftl 1/7/2003 11:59:59 AM ea] Alfons Skoczylas Alfons' question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM El Alfons Skoczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM El Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM A Matt Barnard Notes from last project meeting 1/7/2003 5:49:35 PM pe Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM | Last Connection: 1/7/2003 5:00:38 PM | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected:1 | Total 14g $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Calendar mio x File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | @ address Book B Q | Bnewmal + DNewappt + GyNewtak + À | © E- 0 - | reply + Fac”? Ea Calendar Show: All Categories <2 Sophie Jones PTE [572008 m| 419 47» 431» «365» OD En Be) al lolalo | + = Sent It oa Mon Jan 6, 2003] Tue Jan 7, 2003| wed 18003 IEEE Fri Jan 10, 2003 3) Contacts El Documents [% Checklist [A Work In Progress E Cabinet Y Trash Tn i H 1200 fs] unc! Meeting = e | Beth's Birthday d+ Submit your vote for Employee | Last Connection: 1/7/2003 4:55:25 PM You can assign more than one category to an item, and specify which category is the primary one. The color of the primary category will be used to identify the item. When you reply to an item that has been assigned a category, the same category (or categories) is assigned to the reply message. Four default categories (Follow-Up, Low Priority, Personal, and Urgent) are available for you to immediately assign to items. You can modify and delete them if you choose, as well as continue to create new categories. You can filter on categories by using the Show menu next to the Filter icon. You can add a Category column heading and sort your Item List by category. This section contains the following topics: ¢ “Assigning a Category to an Item” on page 83 + “Adding a Category” on page 84 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide + + + “Deleting a Category” on page 84 “Renaming a Category” on page 84 “Seeing All Items in a Certain Category” on page 84 Assigning a Category to an Item To quickly assign a category to an item, 1 Right-click an item in your Mailbox or Calendar, then click the category. The 10 most recently used categories are available from this right-click menu. (If you have not yet used categories, they are displayed alphabetically.) Open View Save As... Print... Filter... Junk Mail > Dial Sender Reply Forward Forward as Attachment Delete Delete and Empty Change to... Move to Checklist Folder Move to Archive Categories Follow-up Mark Read Requires discussion v Personal Urgent Navigate » Low priority Check In... Properties More... To assign multiple categories to an item, assign a category to a new item you are composing, or assign a category that does not display on the right-click menu, 1 3 4 Right-click an item in your Mailbox or Calendar, click Categories, then click More. or Open an item in your Mailbox or Calendar, click the Personalize tab, then click Edit Categories. or Open a new item to compose, click the Send Options tab, then click Edit Categories. Select the check box of the category you want to assign. or Type a new category name in the text box next to Add, then click Add. If you assign one of the default categories (Follow-Up, Low Priority, Personal, and Urgent) to an item you are sending, the item arrives in the recipient’s Mailbox with that category assigned. If you assign a category that you created to an item you are sending, the item arrives in the recipient’s Mailbox with no category assigned. To change the color of an existing category or assign a color to a new category, select the category name, click Edit Color, click a color, then click OK. To assign additional categories to this item, select the check boxes of those categories. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 83 Adding a Category Deleting a Category Renaming a Category When you assign multiple categories to an item, the color of the primary category is the color that will show in the Item List. When you sort the Item List by category, items are sorted by their primary category. By default, the first category you assign is the primary category. Or, to set the primary category for this item, select a category, then click Primary. Click OK. Right-click an item, click Categories, then click More. Personal Cancel | Requires discussion Urgent Primary | Edit Color | Remove Calo Delete | <Type here to add a new category> Add Type the category name in the field at the bottom of the Categories dialog box. Click Add. The Add button becomes active when you begin typing a category name. To assign a color to a category, select the category name in the list, click Edit Color, click a color, then click OK. To assign this category to the selected item, select the check box to the left of the category name, then click OK. Right-click an item in your Mailbox or Calendar, click Categories, then click More. Select the category name, then click Delete. Click Yes, then click OK. The category is removed from the list, and from all the items to which it was assigned. 1 Select the category name, then click Rename. 2 Type the new name, then click OK. The category is renamed in the list, and for all the items to which it was assigned. Seeing All Items in a Certain Category 1 In the upper-right corner of your Mailbox or Calendar view, click the Show menu, then click the category name. 84 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide The 10 most recently used categories are available from the Show menu. (If you have not yet used categories, they are displayed alphabetically.) All items that have been assigned this category will display. To clear this selection, click Show, then click All Categories. 44 Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | E Address Book Ba | Ef New Mail + ÉNewappt ~ rNewTask + A | ita A| a - | o + Brenly + E?” IT Mailbox Show: All Categories Q Sophie ones a ps v All Categories of [8] Tabitha Hu What's a good time... Sent Items E Calendar 3) Contacts [El Documents [% Checklist [ Work In Progress E Cabinet F Trash Requires discussion Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... Personal Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports Urgent Mike Palu Final Test Plan Sophie Jones Final Test Plan Follow-up Low priority Claudia Wong Project status report due Wedne Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... More... Grace Smith Submit your vote for Employee of tl 1/7/2003 11:59:59 AM Alfons’ question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM Alfons Skoczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM Matt Barnard Notes From last project meeting 1/7/2003 5:49:35 PM Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM VORB DOE EREE DDD | Last Connection: 1/7/2003 5:00:38 PM | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected:1 © | Total: 14g Changing the Subject of an Item You’ve Received 1 Open an item from your Mailbox or Calendar. 2 Click the Personalize tab. 3 Type a new subject in the My Subject text box. 5 Mail From: Mike Palu lolx] File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | X close Erepy + Edroward + Y >| => a & a | bd LL alala Mail | Properties Personalize | My Subject: [Mike's question about HHY Technology Category: | i= Edit Categories | Subject: Hello! Working with Items in Your Mailbox 85 This personalized subject will display in your Mailbox and/or Calendar and in the Mailbox and/or Calendar of anyone who proxies for you. If you change the subject of an item in a shared folder, other users of the shared folder will see the original subject. To see the original subject, open the item and look in the Subject field in the item header. When you create a basic filter or perform a Find with a specific word in the Subject field, the filter/ Find results will show items whose original subject or personalized subject contains this word. When you create an advanced filter or find, use the Subject field to search for the original subject, and use the My Subject field to search for the personalized subject. When you create a rule that looks for a specific word in the Subject field, the rule will only look at the original subject. Creating a Checklist Use the Checklist folder to create a task list. You can move any items (mail messages, phone messages, reminder notes, tasks, or appointments) to this folder and arrange them in the order you want. Each item is marked with a check box so that you can check off items as you complete them. After you have moved an item to the Checklist folder, you can open it, click the Checklist tab, and assign it a due date. You can also mark it Completed and set its position in the list from the Checklist tab. You can also make other folders work the way the Checklist folder does. The Checklist folder is a system folder. It replaces the Task List folder. For a comparison of the Checklist folder and the Task List folder, see Checklist Folder under “Folder List” on page 22. IMPORTANT: If you or your system administrator has set up auto-archiving of items in your Mailbox, checklist items will also be archived based on the original date you received the item, not based on the due date you assign it. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a Master Checklist in the Checklist Folder” on page 86 + “Creating a New Item in the Checklist Folder” on page 87 + “Moving an Item to the Checklist Folder” on page 88 + “Marking an Item to Display in the Checklist Folder” on page 88 + “Creating a Checklist in a Folder Other Than the Checklist Folder” on page 89 + “Assigning a Due Date to an Item in the Checklist Folder” on page 90 + “Marking or Unmarking a Checklist Item Completed” on page 91 Creating a Master Checklist in the Checklist Folder &6 1 Drag items to the Checklist folder H. In the Checklist folder, the items display with a check box to the left of them. When you complete an item in the checklist, you can mark it complete by selecting the check box. You can move items to the Checklist folder from a shared folder only if you are the owner of the shared folder. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 44 Novell GroupWise - Checklist File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | E address Book E E Y | Bnewmal + new appt + GynewTask + À | E EE G Checklist Biren - ac | À OL à Show: All Categories @ Sophie Jones J Subject Joue [rom to | O 6) mailbox [8] ole Matt Barnard Matt Barnard; S: 1/9/2003 10:0 ^ Sent Items El» Final Test Plan Mike Palu Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:55 M El calendar ga Project status report due Claudia Wong Sophie Jones 1/3/2003 10:0 ^ $ a sas Submit your vote for Emp 1/31/2 Grace Smith Sophie Jones 1/13/2003 11: À Checklist [F Work In Progress H-E) Cabinet © Trash | | Selected: 1 | Total: 4 2 To arrange the items in the order ropa nt drag them to the position you want, or click them, then click the toolbar buttons - and Y. a, Le >= If these buttons do not display on the toolbar, right-click the toolbar, then click Folder Context. 3 To assign a due date and a numerical position (order) in the Checklist to an item, open the item and add this information on the Checklist tab. 3 Reminder Note From: Mike Palu File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | E Accept ~ [Dedine + X Close reply + road - | => e Ey a | 5d Le | Reminder Note | Properties | Personalize Checklist | Order: F 4 Move to Top. | Move to Bottom an I~ Completed Due on: [ (No Due Date) Subject: Project status report due Wednesday by noon You can also create a checklist area in another folder and drag items to the area. After items are in a checklist area of any folder, they will also display in the master Checklist folder, even though they are still located in the original folder. Creating a New Item in the Checklist Folder 1 Click the Checklist folder. GÈ) New Mail 2 Ifno items exist in the Checklist folder, click the down-arrow on the new mai |-| icon, then click Posted Message. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 87 Type a subject and message, then click Post on the toolbar. Skip to Step 6. or If items already exist in the Checklist folder, follow Steps 3-5 below. 3 Click the position in the checklist where you want to add a new item. For example, if you want the item to be first in the checklist, click the first item. 4 Begin typing the subject text. $ô Novell GroupWise - Checklist - E El File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | & Address Book Ba | É New Mail ~ Ef) New Appt ~ GeyNewTask + Ñ | E ”|| ren + Fac || FT tb À © Checklist Show: All Categories |_| Subject Joue. [From [To [ae Sy Project Meeting Matt Barnard Matt Barnard; S 1/9/2003 10:0 ^ je Final Test Plan Mike Palu Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:55:4 M ( Sophie Jones $ & Mailbox [6] Sa Sent Items E Calendar Contact | Finish Administration outline a ns je”! Project status report due We Claudia Wong Sophie Jones 1/3/2003 10:03: M Y [Checklist B Submit your vote for Emp 1/31/2 Grace Smith Sophie Jones 1/13/2003 11: » [F Work In Progress E Cabinet © Trash | | Selected: 1 | Total: 5 5 When you are finished typing the subject text, press Enter. The item you have created displays as a posted mail item in the position you selected, and the item that was originally in that position is moved down one position in the checklist. 6 To add additional information to this item, open it and type additional text on the Mail tab. 7 To assign a due date to the item, open it, click the Checklist tab, click Due On, then click a date. Moving an Item to the Checklist Folder 1 Right-click a selected item or items, then click Move to Checklist Folder. You can also open an item, click Actions, then click Move to Checklist Folder. The item or items are moved from this folder to the Checklist folder, where you can arrange them in the order you want, assign due dates, mark them Completed, and so forth. You can only move items to the Checklist folder from a shared folder if you are the owner of the shared folder. To return an item to its original folder, drag the item from the Checklist folder to the original folder. Marking an Item to Display in the Checklist Folder Use this action to display an item in the Checklist folder without moving the item to the Checklist folder. 1 Click an item or select multiple items. 2 Click Actions, then click Show in Checklist. 88 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You can also open an item, click Actions, then click Show in Checklist. The item or items will stay in the original folder, but will also display in the Checklist folder, where you can arrange them in the order you want, assign due dates, mark them Completed, and so forth. You can also open these items in their original folder to mark them Completed. You can only mark items to display in the Checklist folder from a shared folder if you are the owner of the shared folder. Creating a Checklist in a Folder Other Than the Checklist Folder 1 Click a folder. 2 Click the Display drop-down list on the toolbar, then click Checklist. If the Display drop-down list does not display on your toolbar, right-click the toolbar, then click Display Settings. $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | @& Address Book a | Ef New Mail + ÉNewappt ~ GiyNewTask + Y | A 2|| 7 + Fyre > [pipi [<maibox Cust 3 nee <Mailbox Custor M All Items JP Mailbox ($) Sophie Jones & 49 Maibox](6) Tabitha Hu What's a good time... 1/2}2003 7:51:12 PM ¿lp Sent Items {© TabithaHu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM ente E Calendar Els Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM Received Items i a a Els Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM Sent Items Y Checklist w) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM A Work In Progress e5] Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesday by 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM E 8 Cabinet E Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM F Trash q [ical Alfons Skoczylas Alfons' question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM El Alfons Skoczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM El Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM j | Last Connection: 1/13/2003 2:55:28 PM | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected:1 | Total: 14 You can also click =| then click As Checklist. The top of the item list for this folder now displays "Drag items here to add them to the checklist." $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox TEM File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | @ address Book D Q | Brewmal + GBNew Appt + GNewTask + À | D || Reply ~ E” play [ceci ($ Sophie Jones i? Mailbox [Due ... [From To (foaes | Drag items here to add them to the checklist. Show: All Categories Folder ¿lp Sent Items 6 What's a good time... Tabitha Hu Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:51:1 Mailbo E Calendar 3e Follow-up to Tabitha Sophie Jones Tabitha Hu 1/2/2003 7:52:0 Mailbe a eus 2 Re: What's a good time... Tabitha Hu Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:53:0 Mailbo MH Checklist Els Customer Satisfaction Report Xander Dominguez Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:54:1 Mailbo H Work In Progress le Final Test Plan Mike Palu Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:55:4 Mailbc 8 Cabinet Final Test Plan Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 8:28:4 Mailbo © Trash a j | | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Total: 15 3 Select one or more items and drag them to this area of the item list for this folder. The items now display with a check box to the left of them. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 89 4% Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox Mol File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | & Address Book Ba | É New Mail ~ Ef New Appt ~ GeyNewTask + Ñ | |) >| a + Repl ” | Display Checklist T Mailbox Show: All Categories ($ Sophie Jones 9 12 [Mailbox] [6] Alfons' question about HHY Ti Alfons Skoczylas Sophie Jones 1/7/2003 5:47:4 Mailbo ¿lp Sent Items & Submit your vote for Emp 1/31/2 Grace Smith Sophie Jones 1/13/2003 11: M E Calendar Ms Final Test Plan j A a oe a What's a good time... Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:51:1 Y Checklist EJ? Follow-up to Tabitha Sophie Jones Tabitha Hu 1/2/2003 7:52:0 Mailbo A Work In Progress [ia] Re: What's a good time... Tabitha Hu Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:53:0 Mailbo o 8 Cabinet (le Customer Satisfaction Report Xander Dominguez Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 7:54:1 Mailbo Y Trash Lu) LAS A Lanon nana naib | | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Total: 15 4 To arrange the items the order you want, drag them to the place you want, or click them, then click the toolbar buttons Y , T “| > , and tt f If these arrow buttons are not on your toolbar, you can add them. Right-click the toolbar, click Customize Toolbar, click Customize, then click Actions. Click each button, then click Add Button. 5 To show only the items that are part of the checklist in this folder, click an item in the folder, click Actions, click Checklist Actions, then click Hide Non-Checklist Items. Perform this step again to show all items in the folder. Any items you add to the checklist area of a folder will also display as part of the master checklist in the Checklist folder. If you click another folder and then click this folder again, the default Display setting shows in the Display drop-down list, which is not Checklist unless you have changed it. You can select it again from the Display drop-down list, or you can change the default Display setting by right-clicking the folder, clicking Properties, clicking the Display tab, clicking Checklist on the Setting Name drop-down list, then clicking OK. If you perform a sort on this folder, only the non-checklist items are sorted. Assigning a Due Date to an Item in the Checklist Folder 90 1 Open an item in the Checklist folder. 2 Click the Checklist tab. 3 Select Due On, then click a date. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide =ioxi File Edit View Actions Tools dow Help | Gros @ RRE M E || FF b u a EA Mail | Options Checklist | Order: E = Move to Top | Move to Bottom = J” Completed Due on: |[¥ 1/15/2003 EToday: 1/13/2003 Marking or Unmarking a Checklist Item Completed 4 Click the box next to the checklist item. Delegating Items Use Delegate to reassign a scheduled item to someone else. The sender can determine who you delegated the item to by looking at the item’s Properties. This section contains the following topics: + “Delegating an Appointment, Task, or Reminder Note from the Main Window” on page 91 + “Delegating an Appointment, Task, or Reminder Note from the Calendar View” on page 92 Delegating an Appointment, Task, or Reminder Note from the Main Window 1 In the Main Window, click a task, reminder note, or appointment. 2 Click Actions, then click Delegate. 3 In the To box, type a username, then press Enter. or To select a username from a list, click Address on the toolbar, double-click the user, then click OK. 4 Type any additional comments to the recipient. 5 Click Send on the toolbar. 6 Click Yes if you want this item to remain in your Calendar. or Click No if you want this item deleted from your Calendar. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 91 Delegating an Appointment, Task, or Reminder Note from the Calendar View 1 In a Calendar view, right-click a task, reminder note, or appointment, then click Delegate. 2 In the To box, type a username, then press Enter. or To select a username from a list, click Address on the toolbar, double-click the user, then click OK. 3 Type any additional comments to the recipient. 4 Click Send on the toolbar. 5 Click Yes if you want the item to remain in your Calendar. or Click No if you want the item deleted from your Calendar. Handling Unwanted Mail 92 Use Junk Mail Handling to decide what to do with unwanted Internet e-mail that is sent to your Group Wise e-mail address. Internet e-mail includes all e-mail where the sender’s address is in the form of name@domain.com, name@domain.org, and so forth. This is an example of an e-mail message from the Internet: Mail From: John Thomas <jthomas@theofficeasusual.every1.net> File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | X Close E Reply z E Forward - 3 -| 5 E E | bd Se | ae” Mail | Properties | Personalize | From: John Thomas <jthomas@theofficeasusual.every1.net> 1/13/03 4:39:53 PM To: <a © qu. UE Subject: You can't miss this offer! Junk Mail Handling does not apply to internal e-mail. Internal e-mail is e-mail where the sender is part of your GroupWise system and the From field shows only the name of the sender, not an Internet address as explained above. If you want to block or junk internal e-mail, you can use Rules. (For more information, see “Creating Rules” on page 165.) This is an example of an internal e-mail message: GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 5 Mail To: Alfons Skoczylas p File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help - (5) x| | Gil sena X Cancel address 2 | a | ~ If E | FF b u z | FE] spell check” Mail | Send options | From: > | [Mike Palu cc | | To: [Alfons Skoczylas BC: | Subject: fe: What's a good time... Okay, let's make it 10:30. >>> Alfons Skoczylas 5/14/2003 4:47:04 PM >>> How about next Tuesday before lunch? >>> Mike Palu 5/14/2003 4:45:44 PM >>> to get together about our new project? Mike You have three options for blocking or junking Internet e-mail: + You can add individual e-mail addresses or entire Internet domains to a Block List. Items from these addresses or Internet domains are blocked and never arrive in your Mailbox. An Internet domain is the part of the e-mail address that comes after the @. For example, in the address Henry@mymail.com, the Internet domain is mymail.com. + You can add individual e-mail addresses or entire Internet domains to a Junk List. Items from these addresses or Internet domains are delivered to the Junk Mail folder in your Mailbox. You can specify that the items in this folder be automatically deleted after <n> days. Pb] a Sent Items [E] Calendar H-Q ©] Cabinet El [El Documents 3) Contacts [4 Checklist $ C3 Junk Mail [111] [4 Work In Progress € Trash [11] ep My news Ey IMAP Account + You can specify that any e-mail items from users whose addresses are not in your personal address books (including your Frequent Contacts address book and any personal address books you have created) are sent to the Junk Mail folder. This is sometimes called "white listing." +) [+] For information about the Junk Mail folder, see Junk Mail Folder under “Folder List” on page 22 In addition to the Block List and Junk List, there is a Trust List. Use this list to add e-mail addresses or Internet domains that you do not want blocked or junked, no matter what is specified in the other Working with Items in Your Mailbox 93 two lists. For example, you may have zcompany.com in your Block List, but you have one friend whose address is myfriend@zcompany.com. Add this friend's e-mail address to the Trust List. If you specify Junk Mail Handling options in Caching or Remote mode, make sure to synchronize with your Online Mailbox in order to see the same options when you log in to GroupWise on another computer. However, e-mail from contacts in your Frequent Contact address book and your corporate address book will not be blocked. Your system administrator can turn off Junk Mail Handling so that it is not available. This section contains the following topics: ¢ “Blocking or Junking E-Mail From a User” on page 94 ¢ “Blocking or Junking E-Mail From an Internet Domain” on page 95 + “Junking E-Mail From Users Not In a Personal Address Book” on page 96 + “Deleting Items From the Junk Mail Handling Folder” on page 97 + “Preventing E-Mail From a User or Internet Domain From Being Junked or Blocked” on page 97 + “Modifying Junk Mail Handling Lists and Settings” on page 98 Blocking or Junking E-Mail From a User 1 Right-click an item with an Internet address, then click Junk Mail. 2 Click Junk Sender. or Click Block Sender. Open View Save As... Print... Filter... Junk Mail Trust sender... Junk sender... Block sender... Dial Sender Reply Forward Junk Mail Handling... Forward as Attachment Delete Delete and Empty Change to... Move to Checklist Folder Move to Archive Categories b Read Later Retrieve Selected Item(s}... Check In... Navigate b Properties 94 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 Select Junk E-Mail From This Address or Block E-Mail From This Address. If you select Junk, the address is added to the Junk List. All future e-mail items from this e- mail address will be delivered to the Junk Mail folder Ga. You can specify that the items in this folder be automatically deleted after <n> days. This folder is not created in the folder list unless a Junk Mail option is enabled or an address or Internet domain is added to the Junk List (which enables the Junk List option). If you select Block, the address is added to the Block List. All future e-mail items from this e-mail address will not be delivered to your Mailbox. Your Junk List and Block List can each include up to 1000 entries. If more than 1000 entries are added, the least-used entries are discarded. 4 Ifthe Junk List or Block List is not enabled, select Enable Junk List or Enable Block List. At any time, you can click Tools, click Junk Mail Handling, click Junk List or Block List, then click New to add an e-mail address to the Junk List or Block List. Junk Mail Handling = 2) xi Settings Junk List | Block List | Trust List] Show: |W Addresses New... | IV Domains |__| Address/Domain GS heny@mybestbuddy.com 11/20/02 3:58:01 PM 0 & joey@spike1 0000.com & razorback.org 11/20/02 3:58:01 PM 0 Total E-mail from addresses in your Junk List will be placed in the Junk Mail folder. 5 OK | Cancel | Apply | Blocking or Junking E-Mail From an Internet Domain An Internet domain is the part of the e-mail address that comes after the @. For example, in the address Henry@mymail.com, the Internet domain is mymail.com. 4 Right-click an item, then click Junk Mail. 2 Click Junk Sender. or Click Block Sender. 3 Select Junk Any E-Mail From This Internet Domain or Block Any E-Mail From This Internet Domain. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 95 If you select Junk, the Internet domain is added to the Junk List. All future e-mail items from this Internet domain will be delivered to the Junk Mail folder Gi. You can specify that the items in this folder be automatically deleted after <n> days. This folder is not created in the folder list unless a Junk Mail option is enabled or an address or Internet domain is added to the Junk List (which enables the Junk List option). If you select Block, the Internet domain is added to the Block List. All future e-mail items from this Internet domain will not be delivered to your Mailbox. Your Junk List and Block List can each include up to 1000 entries. If more than 1000 entries are added, the least-used entries are discarded. 4 Ifthe Junk List or Block List is not enabled, select Enable Junk List or Enable Block List. At any time, you can click Tools, click Junk Mail Handling, click Junk List or Block List, then click New to add an Internet domain to the Junk List or Block List. Junking E-Mail From Users Not In a Personal Address Book 1 Click Tools, then click Junk Mail Handling. 2 Select Enable Junk Mail Using Personal Address Books. Settings | Junk List | Block List | Trust List| Junk Mail Handling provides the ability to deal with unwanted e-mail based on the address of the sender. There are several options available: Junk Mail ‘You can specify that e-mail be placed in the Junk Mail folder. [If the Junk Mail folder does not exist it will be created when either of these options are enabled.) IV Enable Junk List. Mail from addresses in the Junk List will be placed in the Junk Mail folder. IV Enable Junk Mail using personal address books. Mail from addresses not in a personal address book (including Frequent Contacts] will be paced ithe Junk Mail folder, ea Jurk Mail Folder: M Automatically delete items [14 = days after delivery (move to Trash]. ~ Blocked Mail- IV Enable Block List. Mail from addresses in the Block List will not be delivered. Retrieve | 3 Click OK. All future items from e-mail addresses not in your Frequent Contacts address book and other personal address books will be delivered to the Junk Mail folder. You can specify that the items in this folder be deleted after <n> days. 96 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Deleting Items From the Junk Mail Handling Folder 1 Click Tools, then click Junk Mail Handling. 2 Click Automatically Delete Items __ Days After Delivery (Move to Trash). Specify how long you want items retained in the Junk Mail folder. 3 Click OK. To manually delete items from the Junk Mail folder, right-click the Junk Mail folder, click Empty Junk Mail Folder, then click Yes. Preventing E-Mail From a User or Internet Domain From Being Junked or Blocked 1 Click Tools, then click Junk Mail Handling. 2 Click the Trust List tab. Junk Mail Handling | aixi Settings | Junk List | Block List Show: |W Addresses New... Edit... Delete Move to Junk [Y Domains Move to Block |__| Address/D omain A amy@idomain.com Total E-mail from addresses in your Trust List will always be delivered to your inbox. 1 Cancel | Apply | 3 Click New, type an e-mail address or Internet domain, then click OK. An address or Internet domain can be in upper, lower, or mixed case. For example, amy@idomain.com and AMY@IDOMAIN.COM are both the same. You cannot use wildcard characters such as * or ? in an Internet domain name. However, an Internet domain, for example idomain.com, will affect all e-mail from idomain.com and any subdomains which prefix this Internet domain, for example, offers.idomain.com or members.idomain.com. A domain of abcidomain.com would not be affected. 4 Click OK. All future items from this e-mail address or Internet domain will not be blocked or delivered to the Junk Mail folder, no matter what is specified in the Block List and Junk List. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 97 Modifying Junk Mail Handling Lists and Settings 1 Click Tools, then click Junk Mail Handling. 2 On the Settings tab, modify any settings. Click 21 then click an option for information about each option. 3 Click the tab of the list you want to modify. 4 To add an e-mail address or Internet domain to a list, click New, type the e-mail address or Internet domain, then click OK. An address or Internet domain can be in upper, lower, or mixed case. For example, amy@idomain.com and AMY@IDOMAIN.COM are both the same. You cannot use wildcard characters such as * or ? in an Internet domain name. However, an Internet domain, for example idomain.com, will affect all e-mail from idomain.com and any subdomains which prefix this Internet domain, for example, offers.idomain.com or members.idomain.com. A domain of abcidomain.com would not be affected. 5 To change an e-mail address or Internet domain, click the address or Internet domain, click Edit, make changes, then click OK. 6 To remove an e-mail address or Internet domain from a list, click the address or Internet domain, then click Remove. 7 Click OK. Changing Item Types You can use Change To to convert an item in your Mailbox to another type of item. For example, you can change a mail message in your Mailbox to an appointment in your Calendar. The new appointment contains all the information from the mail message (such as To, CC, and BC lists, subject, and message text) that is applicable in the appointment. When you change a mail or phone message to another type of item (such as an appointment or task), the original item is removed from your Mailbox and the new item is added in the appropriate location, such as the Calendar. When you change an item, GroupWise displays the default item view selected in Environment Options. This section contains the following topics: + “Changing an Item in Your Mailbox to Another Type of Item” on page 98 + “Changing an Item in Your Calendar to Another Type of Item” on page 99 + “Changing a Posted Item to a Group Item” on page 99 Changing an Item in Your Mailbox to Another Type of Item 98 1 In your Mailbox, click the item you want to change. 2 Click Edit, click Change To, then click an item type. or Click Edit, click Change To, click More, then click an item type. You can choose posted or group items. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 45 Switch the contents of this item to a reminder note | 4 = iol. File | Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | a Sue A New Mail + E@New Appt ~ GiyNewTask + Ay | E A- Reply + E Forw Copy Ctrl+C a Ctrl ey. ‘f Mailbox Show: All Categories 4 Ske Al tae ee Add Calendar Tab... Tabitha Hu what's a good time.. 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM Delete Del = Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good time... 1/2/2003 7:53:08 PM Delete and Empty Shift+Del (le Xander Dominguez Customer Satisfaction Reports 1/2/2003 7:54:15 PM Retract Els Mike Palu Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 7:55:41 PM Retract and Delete Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM Delete Sent Item E Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesday by 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM Undelete El Jason Stevens I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM Empty Trash = Change to Ma change to a raters czylas Alfons' question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM Folders... Ese past oczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM Move/Link to Folders... Reminder Note Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM eminder Note a Find Text... F2 Phone Message 11042002 4040000 A MA Find We: | Selected: 1 Find Previous F3 More... | Total: 14 Posted items are sent directly to your Calendar. Group items are sent to the Mailboxes of individuals and groups the message is sent to. 3 Type any necessary information. 4 Click Send or Post on the toolbar. When you change a mail or phone message to another type of item (such as an appointment or task), the original item is removed from your Mailbox and the new item is added in the appropriate location, such as the Calendar. Changing an Item in Your Calendar to Another Type of Item 1 Click Calendar in the Folder List. 2 Click the item you want to change in the Appointments, Tasks, or Reminder Notes List. 3 Drag the item to the list that corresponds to the type of item you want to change it to. For example, drag a task to the Appointments List to change it to an appointment. To copy an appointment, task, or reminder note, press Ctrl while you drag the item. 4 Type any necessary information. 5 Click Send or Post on the toolbar. Changing a Posted Item to a Group Item 1 In your Calendar, click a posted item. 2 Click Edit, click Change To, then click More. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 99 Change To RAEI Item type Views: Mail [CN EN Posted Appointment * © Phone Ò Reminder note Task C Group © Posted Cancel | 3 Click Group, then click OK. 4 Type any necessary information. 5 Click Send on the toolbar. Viewing and Composing Items in HTML You can view items in GroupWise that have been composed in HTML from other users or from Web-based information services. You can click any links that are included in the item and jump to the linked Web sites. Ifyou have Internet Explorer 4.x or higher installed on the same computer as GroupWise, you can compose messages in HTML. An HTML toolbar above the Message box gives you HTML options such as text formatting, text color, lists, inserting lines and pictures, inserting a background image, and inserting links. For information about changing the font of items you send and receive, see “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49 and “Changing the Font of Items You Receive” on page 79. This section contains the following topics: ¢ “Setting the Default View” on page 100 + “Changing the Default Font in the HTML View” on page 101 Setting the Default View If you do not like your default read or compose view (whether it is HTML or Plain Text), you can change it. open an item, click View, then click Plain Text or HTML. To change the view in one item, 1 Open an item. 2 Click View, then click Plain Text or HTML. To set the default view, 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment. 3 Click the Views tab. 4 Make selections in the Default Compose View and Default Read View group boxes. 100 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 5 In the Default Read View group box, select Force next to Plain Text if you want to prevent HTML-only messages from being displayed automatically when no plain text version is available. If you select Force, a message will inform you whenever an HTML-only message cannot be displayed; however, you can still click View > HTML to view it. If you do not select Force, HTML-only messages are displayed in HTML, even though you have selected Plain Text for the default read view. 6 Click OK. Changing the Default Font in the HTML View If you set the default view as Plain Text, the Windows system default font is used for your message text. However, if you choose HTML as your default view, HTML tools become available in your outgoing and incoming messages. You can also choose a different default font for your outgoing messages. 1 From an HTML view, select the font style and size you want to use as the default for your messages. -iol xi File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | fil Send Cancel address 2 | O «.. | [E] spell Check | a E 151 Mail | Send Options | From: y | [Heather Sarmiento cc: | To: | BC; | Subject: [Tahoma >| fio y] B 7 U | à | FE = ¿E i= 2 Right-click any of the tools on the HTML toolbar, then click Set Current Font as Default. Working with Items in Your Mailbox 101 102 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise Novell® GroupWise® Messenger is a corporate instant messaging product that is based on the directory. You can create a Contact List, send instant messages, create an archive of messages, allow and block others from seeing your availability, and more. =inix File View Actions Tools Help A, Tonya Wu: Online + Contact List Ta Q Amanda Adams a Lori aka 3 Mike Palu & Answer Team (1/2) à Ae A ©. z Q Sophie Jones © Project Z (1/3) & Henry Ramstetter A Joe 2 Pangilinan Actions © Send a message [E] Send E-mail & Add a contact (3 Add a folder Group Wise Messenger options are available only if GroupWise Messenger is installed and running. Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise The following GroupWise Messenger options are available within GroupWise: + “Sending an Instant Message” on page 104 + “Displaying the GroupWise Messenger Contact List” on page 104 + page 104 + “Displaying GroupWise Messenger Options” on page 104 Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise “Specifying Whether or Not to Start GroupWise Messenger When Group Wise Starts” o n 103 Sending an Instant Message 1 In GroupWise, click File, click New, then click Instant Message. 2 Click the person you want to send a message to. or Click the Find User button to search for a person who is not in your Contact List. 3 Click OK. 4 Type the message. 5 Press Enter, or press Alt+Enter. Displaying the GroupWise Messenger Contact List 4 In GroupWise, click Tools, click Messenger, then click Contact List. Specifying Whether or Not to Start GroupWise Messenger When GroupWise Starts 1 In GroupWise, click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment. 3 On the General tab, select or deselect Launch Messenger At Startup. If you are running both GroupWise and GroupWise Messenger and you exit GroupWise, GroupWise Messenger continues to run until you exit it also. Displaying GroupWise Messenger Options 4 In GroupWise, click Tools, click Messenger, then click Preferences. 104 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Scheduling Group and Posted Items You can schedule appointments, tasks, and reminder notes for yourself and other users, whether the event happens once or on a recurring basis. You can also reserve a block of time with a posted appointment. For information about how appointments, tasks, and reminder notes differ from other item types, see “Understanding GroupWise Item Types” on page 45. Using Auto-Date, you can schedule recurring appointments, tasks, or reminder notes. For more information, see “Scheduling Recurring Items” on page 119. If you want to find out whether someone accepted a task or is coming to your meeting, you can check for an accepted or declined status in the item’s Properties. For more information, see “Checking the Status of Your Items” on page 73. Notify can send you a notification when recipients have accepted, declined, or completed items. For more information, see “Receiving Notification About Items You Send” on page 74. All scheduled items can be retracted or rescheduled, even if the recipients have already opened and accepted them. For more information, see “Retracting Items You’ve Sent” on page 73 and “Rescheduling an Appointment” on page 107. For more information about managing items after they have been sent or received, see “Managing Sent Items” on page 72 and “Managing Received Items” on page 76. This section contains the following topics: + “Scheduling Appointments” on page 105 + “Sending Tasks” on page 112 + “Sending Reminder Notes” on page 115 + “Accepting or Declining Scheduled Items” on page 117 + “Specifying a Time Zone for an Appointment” on page 118 + “Scheduling Recurring Items” on page 119 Scheduling Appointments Use appointments to schedule blocks of time on a specific date or range of dates. You can use Busy Search to check for a time when all the users and resources you want for an appointment are available. This section contains the following topics: + “Scheduling an Appointment for Other Users” on page 106 + “Rescheduling an Appointment” on page 107 Scheduling Group and Posted Items 105 + “Rescheduling Recurring Appointments” on page 107 + “Canceling an Appointment” on page 108 + “Scheduling an Appointment for Yourself” on page 108 + “Checking When Everyone Is Available” on page 109 + “Formatting Your Appointments in ICAL” on page 111 Scheduling an Appointment for Other Users 1 Click SONew APE ||, the toolbar. 2 In the To box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for additional users. In addition, include any resource IDs (such as conference rooms) in the To box. If necessary, type usernames in the CC and BC boxes. or To select usernames or resources from a list, click Address on the toolbar, double-click each user, then click OK. 3 To change the From name (to another account or proxy), click From: r) then click a name. 4 Type the place description in the Place box. 5 Specify the start date. or Click to specify a date or auto-date for your appointment. 6 Specify a start time and duration. Duration can be in minutes, hours, or days. 7 Type a subject and message. If you want, change the font of the message text. For information, see “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49. €, Appointment To: Alfons Skoczylas; Grace Smith; Heather Sarmiento; Mike Palu, S File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | fil Send X Cancel address 4 [2 Busy Search | G | 2 p B | HE b”? Appointment | Send Options | From: >| [Sophie Jones cc: | To: [Alfons Skoczylas; Grace Smith; Heather(...) BC: | Place: [uy office | 1) x! Start date: [2112/2003 El | 3:00:00 PM o Duration: fi Hour o Subject: Project Status Meeting Please bring your updated status for this month. | Folder: Calendar 7 106 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide If you want to make sure the people and resources for the appointment are available, you can do a busy search by clicking Busy Search on the toolbar. See “Checking When Everyone Is Available” on page 109. If you want to perform a busy search on users in a POP3 or IMAP4 account that supports the CAP protocol, you must first add a CAP account on the CAP tab in the Accounts dialog box. For information, see “Adding a CAP Account to GroupWise (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111. You do not need to add a CAP account if you are searching on users in a Group Wise system. You can specify many options, such as making this appointment a high priority, requesting a reply from recipients, and more, by clicking the Send Options tab. Click Send on the toolbar. Rescheduling an Appointment If you want to make sure the people and resources for the appointment are available, you can do a busy search by clicking Busy Search on the toolbar. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click the Sent Items folder in the Folder List. Click the appointment to reschedule. Click Actions, then click Resend. If the original appointment was an auto-date appointment, click This Instance or All Instances. Make your changes, then click Send on the toolbar. Click Yes to retract the original item. To reschedule an appointment for a new time on the same day, open your Calendar and drag the appointment to the new time. Rescheduling Recurring Appointments 1 2 Click the Sent Items folder in the Folder List. Click the appointment you want to select. If you are rescheduling just one appointment in a series of recurring appointments, select the appointment on the day you want to reschedule. Click Actions, then click Resend. Click All Instances for all appointments in the recurring appointment. or Click This Instance for only one appointment in the series of recurring appointments. Make your changes, then click Send on the toolbar. Click Yes to retract the original item. To reschedule an appointment for a new time on the same day, open your Calendar and drag the appointment to the new time. Scheduling Group and Posted Items 107 Canceling an Appointment You can cancel an appointment if you scheduled it or if you have the necessary Proxy rights to the scheduler’s Mailbox. 1 Click the Sent Items folder in the Folder List. 2 Click the appointment you want to cancel. 3 Click Edit, then click Delete. 4 Ifthe original appointment was an auto-date appointment, click This Instance or All Instances. 5 Click All Mailboxes, then click OK. Scheduling an Appointment for Yourself If you are not available for meetings, schedule a posted appointment for those times. When another user includes you in an appointment and does a busy search, the user can see you are not available at those times, but can still schedule over your appointment. Posted appointments are placed in your Calendar on the date you specify. They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user’s Mailbox. 1 On the toolbar, click the arrow on the Bnew appt +] button, then click Posted Appointment. -lalx File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Post X Cancel 2 | Le | 2 p E | FFF bo Ue | a Appointment | Options | Subject: Dentist appointment Place: FO Start date: [3715/2003 El 9:00:00 AM o Duration: fi Hour 30 Minutes ty | Folder: Calendar or In your Calendar, open a view with an Appointments List, click a date, then double-click a time in the Appointments List. 2 Type a subject and a place (optional). 3 Specify the start date and start time if you haven’t already done so. 4 If necessary, click to specify a date or auto-date for your appointment. 5 Specify a duration. Duration can be in minutes, hours, or days. 6 Type a message (optional). 108 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You can specify many options, such as making this appointment a high priority and more, by clicking the Options tab. 7 Specify a Show Appointment As type by clicking Actions, clicking Show Appointment As, then clicking a type (optional). 8 Click Post on the toolbar. Posted appointments are placed in your Calendar on the date you specified. They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user’s Mailbox. Checking When Everyone Is Available Use Busy Search to find a time when all the people and resources you want to schedule for a meeting are available. This section contains the following topics: + “Performing a Busy Search” on page 109 + “Changing Busy Search Options” on page 111 + “Adding a CAP Account to GroupWise (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111 + “Modifying Properties of a CAP Account (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111 Performing a Busy Search If you want to perform a busy search on users in a POP3 or IMAP4 account that supports the CAP protocol, you must first add a CAP account on the CAP tab in the Accounts dialog box. For information, see “Adding a CAP Account to GroupWise (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111. You do not need to add a CAP account if you are searching on users in a Group Wise system. 1 In an appointment you are creating, specify usernames and resource IDs in the To box. 2 Specify the first possible day for the meeting in the Start Date box. 3 Specify the meeting’s duration. 4 Click Busy Search on the toolbar. Scheduling Group and Posted Items 109 (6) Choose Appointment Time 1 -lol x| Available Times Individual Schedules | Invite To Meeting... | 8, 2003 Thursday January 9, 2003 213141819l10111121112131418 = @ Sophie Jones Er a] Fa To view information, move the time cursor, or click the mouse on a shaded rectangle above. Desired Time Start Date: 1/7/2003 Start Time: 9:00:00 AM Duration: 1 Hour Available DM Out Of Office Cl Busy CI Tentative Cancel | Auto-Select | La The legend at the bottom of the Busy Search dialog box shows the meaning of the various Show Appointment As patterns on the grid. If D appears to the left of the username or resource, you can click a scheduled time across from the username or resource on the Individual Schedules tab to display more information about the appointment in the box below. However, the user or resource owner must give you appointment Read rights in their Access List before the D icon appears. See “Adding and Removing Proxy Names and Rights in Your Access List” on page 172. To exclude a username or resource from the search without deleting it, click the Available Times tab, then click the check box next to the user or resource to deselect it. Excluding a person or resource from the search is useful if a user (like a CC recipient) should be invited to a meeting but does not necessarily need to attend. To include a user or resource name that has been excluded, click the check box next to the user or resource to select it. 5 Click Auto-Select to select the first available meeting time, then click OK to transfer the users, resources, and selected time and duration back to the appointment you were scheduling. or Click Auto-Select until the time you want is displayed, then click OK to transfer the users, resources, and selected time and duration back to the appointment you were scheduling. or Click the Available Times tab to see possible meeting times, click a time to select it, then click OK to transfer the users, resources, and selected time and duration back to the appointment you were scheduling. 6 To remove a user or resource from the Invite to Meeting list after the search, click the Available Times tab, click the username or resource to remove, press Delete, then click Yes. This is useful if you want to include several conference rooms in the search to find one that is available, then eliminate those you do not want. 110 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 7 Complete and send the appointment. If you want to do a busy search before creating an appointment, click Tools, then click Busy Search. Specify information in the Busy Search dialog box, then click OK to perform a busy search. When you find a time you want for a meeting, click Request Meeting to transfer the information to a new appointment view, then complete the appointment. You can change the search range for one appointment by scheduling the appointment with Tools > Busy Search and changing the number in the Number of Days to Search box. Changing Busy Search Options You can change the search range, time, and days default for all appointments on the Busy Search tab in Date Time Options. 4 Click Tools, click Options, double-click Date & Time, then click the Busy Search tab. 2 Change the options you want. 3 Click OK. Adding a CAP Account to GroupWise (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) If your IMAP4 account, such as NetMail, supports CAP (Calendar Access Protocol), you can perform a busy search on the users in that account domain. First, you must add a CAP account to GroupWise for the server where GroupWise will perform the search. Make sure you know the CAP server IP address (generally the IP address of the IMAP4 account server), login name and password if authentication is required, Internet domain, and whether or not you will connect through a LAN or a modem. Contact your NetMail system administrator or Internet Service Provider for this information. 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the CAP tab. 3 Click Add. 4 Follow the prompts. Modifying Properties of a CAP Account (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the CAP tab. 3 Click the account you want to modify. 4 Click Properties. 5 Click the tabs to find the properties you want to modify. Click 24, then click an option to find out more information about each option. 6 Modify the properties, then click OK. Formatting Your Appointments in ICAL 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click General Options. 3 Select Use ICAL When Sending Appointments Via SMTP. Scheduling Group and Posted Items 111 4 Click OK. If the recipients of your appointment use messaging and calendaring software that supports ICAL, they will receive an appointment item. If their messaging and calendaring software does not support ICAL, they will receive a mail item with the appointment information added to the message text. Sending Tasks A task is an item to be completed by a specified date and time that displays on the Calendar. When you assign a task to a user, the user can accept or decline the task, but until it is declined or completed, the task appears on the user's Tasks List and on the user’s Calendar each day. After it is accepted, a task appears on the Calendar on its start date. When the due date is past, the task displays in red on the Calendar. When you mark a task Completed, it no longer carries over to the next day on your Calendar. After you finish a task, you can mark it Completed. As the originator of an assigned task, you can have GroupWise send you notification when the task is marked Completed. (You must have Notify running to receive notification). A Completed status, including the date and time the task was marked Completed, is placed in the Properties window. TIP: You can also create a checklist that is not associated with your Calendar. In this type of checklist, any item type (mail, appointment, task, reminder note, phone message) can be used. For information, see “Creating a Checklist” on page 86. This section contains the following topics: + “Assigning a Task to Other Users” on page 112 + “Assigning a Task to Yourself” on page 114 + “Marking Tasks Completed” on page 115 Assigning a Task to Other Users 4 Click GÈ New Task >] on the toolbar. 112 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide (a be @ Task To: Joe Pangilinan; Kuo-Chang Huang; Tabitha Hu File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Gil sena X Cancel > address O | Lee | * p E | FF b u z Wi Task | Send Options | From: >| [Sophie Jones CC: Start date: Due on: 2/21/2003 E] Subject: | Priority: | Folder: Calendar 2 Inthe To box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for additional users. If necessary, type usernames in the CC and BC boxes. or To select usernames from a list, click Address, double-click each user, then click OK. 3 To change the From name (to another account or proxy), click From: >| then click a name. 4 Type the date you want the task to begin and the date you want the task to be completed. You can type the same date in both boxes. or Click 1 to specify dates or auto-dates for your task. 5 Type the subject. 6 Type a priority for the task. The task priority can consist of a character followed by a number. The following are acceptable formats: Al, C2, B, 3, and so forth. Task priorities are optional. 7 Type a description of the task. You can specify many options, such as making this task a high priority, requesting a reply from recipients, and more, by clicking the Send Options tab. If you want, change the font of the message text. For information, see “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49. 8 Click Send on the toolbar. Scheduling Group and Posted Items 113 Assigning a Task to Yourself 1 Click the arrow on the Bnew Task || icon, then click Posted Task. la File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Gepost XX Cancel ola tse | 22 EG] BR| FF b u é [5 Task | Options | Subject: | Priority: Start date: | 1/7/2003 El ] Due on: 1/7/2003 E] | Folder: Calendar or In your Calendar, open a view with a Tasks List (for example, the Day view), click a date, then double-click an empty space in the Tasks List. 2 Type a subject. 3 Type a priority for the task. The task priority can consist of a character followed by a number. The following are acceptable formats: Al, C1, B, 3, and so forth. Task priorities are optional. 4 Type the date you want the task to begin and the date you want the task to be completed. You can type the same date in both boxes. or If necessary, click =I to specify dates or auto-dates for your task. 5 Type a message. You can specify many options, such as making this task a high priority and more, by clicking the Options tab. 6 Click Post on the toolbar. Posted tasks are placed in your Calendar. They are not placed in your Mailbox, or in any other user’s Mailbox. TIP: You can also create a checklist that is not associated with your Calendar. In this type of checklist, any item type (mail, appointment, task, reminder note, phone message) can be used. For information, see “Creating a Checklist” on page 86. 114 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Marking Tasks Completed When you finish a task, you can mark it Completed. Tasks you mark Completed are not carried over to the next day on your Calendar. Completed tasks are distinguished by a check mark in your Calendar. Overdue tasks display in red. If you mark a task Completed, then realize you left some part of it incomplete, you can unmark it. Unmarked tasks display on the current day in your Calendar. When you mark a task Completed, GroupWise sends notification to the originator of the task if he or she selected return notification in Send Options. A Completed status, including the date and time the task was marked Completed, is placed in the originator’s Properties window. This section contains the following topics: + “Marking a Task Completed” on page 115 + “Checking the Completion Status of a Task” on page 115 Marking a Task Completed 4 Click Window, then click Calendar. 2 Select the check box next to the task. To unmark a task that has been marked Completed, deselect the marked check box next to the task. Checking the Completion Status of a Task 4 Click the Sent Items folder in the Folder List. 2 Open the task you want to check. 3 Click the Properties tab. Sending Reminder Notes Reminder notes are like mail messages except they are scheduled for a particular day and appear on the Calendar for that date. You can use reminder notes to show vacations, holidays, pay days, birthdays, and so forth. This section contains the following topics: + “Scheduling a Reminder Note for Yourself” on page 115 + “Scheduling a Reminder Note for Other Users” on page 116 Scheduling a Reminder Note for Yourself Posted reminder notes are placed in your Calendar on the date you specify. They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user’s Mailbox. 1 From your Calendar, open a view with a Reminder Notes List (for example, the Week view). Scheduling Group and Posted Items 115 $ô Novell GroupWise - Calendar File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | E Address Book E E Y | BnenMal + Grew Appt + Gynewtask + À | © -|o | ren > EZ Accept ana i Calendar Show: All Categories <2» ($ Sophie Jones $ P Mailbox [5] [720 Ene b 47> 431)» 4365» oM 67 bss) E lola le + - Sa Sent Items B 3) Contacts El Documents |_| Mon Jan 6, 2003 ANNE Wed Jan 8, 2003 Thu Jan 9, 2003 | Fri Jan 10, 2003 it Project Meeting [% Checklist [4 Work In Progress iat EJ Cabinet © Trash f Lunch it Submit your vote for tha Yaar Employee of 2 Click a date, then double-click an empty space in the Reminder Notes List. Meeting zl 3 If necessary, click Ż to specify a start date or auto-date for your reminder note. 4 Type a subject and the reminder note. You can specify many options, such as making this reminder note a high priority and more, by clicking the Options tab. 5 Click Post on the toolbar. To access the information later, open your Calendar and select the date the information appears on. Double-click the reminder note in the Reminder Notes List. Scheduling a Reminder Note for Other Users 1 Click File, click New, then click Reminder Note. 3 Reminder Note To: Joe Pangilinan 3 -loj x} File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | El send >< cancel Baddress 7 | D S | 2 A | FF b u Zz |E” Reminder Note | Send Options | From: y] fate Barmard cc: D To: [oe Panginan BC: ee Start date: 4/15/2003 E Subject: Y | Folder: Calendar 116 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 2 Inthe To box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for additional users. If necessary, type usernames in the CC and BC boxes. or To select usernames from a list, click Address on the toolbar, double-click each user, then click OK. 3 To change the From name (to another account or proxy), click From: >| then click a name. 4 Type a subject (optional) and the reminder note message. If you want, change the font of the message text. For information, see “Changing the Font of Items You Send” on page 49. 5 In the Start Date box, type the date this reminder note should appear in the recipients’ Calendars. or Click ==! to specify a start date or auto-date for your reminder note. You can specify many options, such as making this reminder note a high priority, requesting a reply from recipients, and more, by clicking the Send Options tab. 6 Click Send on the toolbar. Accepting or Declining Scheduled Items When you receive an appointment, task, or reminder note, you might not be able to accept. In Group Wise, you can let the sender know if you accept or decline, specify a level of acceptance or availability, and add additional comments. You can also delegate the item to another user. The sender can find your response by checking the item’s Properties. 1 Open the appointment, task, or reminder note. 2 Click Accept or Decline on the toolbar. or Click the down-arrow to the right of the button to select an Accept level of availability, or to select Decline with Options. 3 Ifyou selected Decline with Options, you can type a comment (optional), then click OK. By default, the sender can view your comment by viewing the item properties in the Sent Items folder. However, for more noticeable notification when someone declines an item, the sender has the option under Tools > Options > Send > Appointment/Task/Reminder Note to set Return Notification When Declined to Mail Receipt, Notify, or both. 4 Ifthe item is an Auto-Date item, click This Instance to accept or decline this one Auto-Date item, or click All Instances to accept or decline all instances of the Auto-Date item. Accepting and Declining Resource Requests You can accept or decline resource requests only if you are the resource owner and have been granted Read and Write rights. 1 In the Main Window or Calendar, click File, then click Proxy. or Scheduling Group and Posted Items 117 Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of Group Wise you are running in). 2 Click the resource you own. If the resource you own isn't listed, click Proxy, type the name of the resource you own in the Name box, then click OK. 3 Double-click the item you need to accept or decline. 4 Click Accept or Decline on the toolbar. Specifying a Time Zone for an Appointment The Time Zone feature lets you schedule a meeting for recipients in different time zones who will be meeting in a single location. Normally, GroupWise automatically adjusts meeting times based on the recipients’ time zones. For example, a meeting scheduled by a user in Utah for 10:00 would be displayed as 9:00 for a recipient in California and as 12:00 for a user in New York because these users are in different time zones. Because GroupWise adjusts the time, all the users scheduled for a conference call would call in at the same moment, even though their local time may differ. Use the Time Zone feature if you don’t want GroupWise to adjust to the recipients’ local time zone. For example, if you are in the Saskatchewan time zone and include users from the Mountain Time (US & Canada) time zone in your appointment, you would use the Time Zone feature if these users are flying to Saskatchewan for the appointment. Time Zone ensures that the appointment in their Calendars and Mailboxes shows the correct Saskatchewan time. 1 Open and create a new appointment. 2 Click Actions, click Select Time Zone, click the Time Zone drop-down list and select the time zone for the appointment location, then click OK. Select Time Zone 12 1x] Time Zone: [GMT -07:00] Mountain Time (US & Canada] dountain Time (US & C (GMT-06:00) Central Time (US & Canada) (GMT-06:00) Mexico City, Tegucigalpa (GMT-06:00) Saskatchewan JI (GMT-05:00) Bogota, Lima (GMT -05:00] Eastern Time (US & Canada] (GMT -05:00) Indiana (East) (GMT -04:00] Atlantic Time (Canada) (GMT -04:00)] Caracas, La Paz GMT -03:30] Newfoundland 3 Click Send on the toolbar. When the users you have scheduled with the Time Zone feature receive the appointment, they will see a time annotation after the subject when they see the appointment in their Mailboxes. For example, if the subject of the meeting is “Marketing Conference” and the time zone is Saskatchewan, users would see a subject and time annotation similar to the following: Marketing Conference (Saskatchewan). In the users” Calendars, the place is annotated with the time zone, rather than the subject. 118 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Scheduling Recurring Items Use Auto-Date to schedule recurring appointments, tasks, and reminder notes. Auto-Dates can occur on the same day every week (for example, every Monday), the same days of the month (for example, the 15th and last day), or any other defined series of dates. You can also use Auto-Date to schedule irregular or infrequent events, such as holidays. When you send an auto-date item, Group Wise copies the item and places one of the defined dates in each copy of the item. For example, if you define five dates for the event, GroupWise makes five copies of the item and schedules one copy for each date. If you send the item to other users, you will have five outgoing items with a five-occurrence auto-date. If you receive the event, you will find five copies of the incoming item in your Mailbox, each scheduled for a different date. You can create an auto-date three ways. + Dates lets you select specific days from a year calendar. + Example lets you schedule events on the same day every week, the same day each month, or periodically. + Formula lets you enter the scheduling information in text format. This section contains the following topics: + “Scheduling a Recurring Item by Dates” on page 119 + “Scheduling a Recurring Item by Example” on page 119 + “Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on Another Day of the Week” on page 120 + “Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on the Last Day of the Month” on page 120 + “Scheduling Auto-Dates by Formula” on page 121 + “Using Auto-Date Formula Functions and Operators” on page 121 Scheduling a Recurring Item by Dates 1 In an appointment, task, or reminder note you are scheduling, click Actions, then click Auto- Date. 2 Click the days you want to schedule. 3 To move to a different year, click the year button, type the new year, then click OK. 4 If you want to clear all the dates you have selected, click Reset. 5 Click OK. Scheduling a Recurring Item by Example 1 In an appointment, task, or reminder note you are scheduling, click Actions, then click Auto- Date. 2 Click the Example tab. 3 In the Range group box, specify the starting date and ending date. or To specify a certain number of occurrences rather than a range, specify the starting date, click the End drop-down list, click Occurrences, then specify the number of occurrences. Scheduling Group and Posted Items 119 4 Click the Days of the Week drop-down list, then click an option. 5 Click the months to schedule. To schedule all of the months, double-click any month. 6 Ifyou clicked Days of the Month, click an option from the On drop-down list, then click the numbered days you want to schedule (for example, | and 15). or If you clicked Days of the Week, click the ordinal number across from the day of the week to schedule (for example, 2nd Tue). or If you clicked Periodic, specify a period length (for example, Recur Every 15 Days). 7 Ifyou want to clear the dates you have selected, click Reset. 8 To verify that you scheduled the correct dates, click the Dates tab. The dates you scheduled in the Example tab are selected in the calendars. If you want to deselect any occurrence, click the days you want to deselect on the Dates tab. 9 Click OK. Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on Another Day of the Week You can schedule recurring items for events that occur a specified number of days prior to or after a specified day of the week. For example, you could schedule a meeting on the Monday following the first Sunday of each month (which may or may not be the first Monday of the month). 1 In an appointment, task, or reminder note you are scheduling, click Actions, then click Auto- Date. 2 Click the Example tab. 3 In the Range group box, specify the starting date and ending date. 4 Click the months you want to include. To include all months, double-click any month in the Months group box. 5 Click one or more ordinal numbers in the row across from the day of the week you want to base your scheduling on (for example, Ist in the Sun row). 6 Click a day of the week (for example, Sun). 7 Specify the number of days to offset (for example, 1), then click OK. 8 To verify the dates you have scheduled, click the Dates tab and check the dates selected in the calendar. 9 Click OK. Scheduling a Recurring Item Based on the Last Day of the Month You can schedule recurring items for events that occur a specified number of days before or after the last day of the month. For example, if you want a reminder note to appear in your Reminder Notes List on the second-to-last day of each month, type -1 in Step 8 below. 1 In an appointment, task, or reminder note you are scheduling, click Actions, then click Auto- Date. 2 Click the Example tab. 120 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 Inthe Range group box, specify the starting date and ending date. 4 Click the months you want to include. To include all months, double-click any month in the Months group box. 5 Click the Days of the Week pop-up list, then click Days of the Month. 6 Click one or more days of the week (for example, Mon, Wed, and Fri). To include all days, double-click any day in the group box. 7 Click Last, then click the Last button. 8 Specify the number of days to offset, then click OK twice. 9 To verify the dates you have scheduled, click the Dates tab and check the dates selected in the calendar. 10 Click OK. Scheduling Auto-Dates by Formula Schedule items this way for events that occur on the same day each week (for example, every Monday), the same day each month (for example, the 15th and last day), or in a defined period of time (for example, every 14 days). You can accomplish the same type of scheduling more easily using the Example and Dates tabs. Formulas should only be used if you are comfortable working with them. 1 In an appointment, task, or reminder note you are scheduling, click Actions, then click Auto- Date. 2 Click the Formula tab. 3 In the Range group box, specify the starting date and ending date. or To specify a certain number of occurrences rather than a range, specify the starting date, click Occurrences in the End drop-down list, then specify the number of occurrences. 4 Type the formula text. 5 If you want to clear the Auto-Date dialog box, click Reset. 6 To verify that you have scheduled the correct days, click the Dates tab. The days you scheduled are selected in the calendar. If you want to deselect any occurrence, click the day you want to deselect on the Dates tab. 7 Click OK. For information on how to enter formula text, see “Using Auto-Date Formula Functions and Operators” on page 121. Using Auto-Date Formula Functions and Operators You can schedule auto-dated items by formula, dates, or example. Formulas should only be used if you prefer them; scheduling is much easier by dates or example. This section contains the following topics: + “Auto-Date Formula Functions” on page 122 + “Auto-Date Formula Operators” on page 122 Scheduling Group and Posted Items 121 Auto-Date Formula Functions Use the auto-date functions listed below to schedule specific days of a week, month, or year. You must use the exact spelling of the functions. For example, GroupWise reads “tue”, but not “tues”. Group Wise formula functions are not case-sensitive. This section contains the following topics: + “Day of the Week” on page 122 + “Day of the Month” on page 122 + “Day of the Year” on page 122 + “Month of the Year” on page 122 + “Year” on page 122 + “Weekday of the Month” on page 122 Day of the Week For example, TUE would schedule all Tuesdays. Day of the Month For example, the number 3 would schedule the 3rd day of the month. Also, the word LAST would schedule the last day of the month. Day of the Year For example, 35 would schedule the thirty-fifth day of the year. Month of the Year For example, JAN would schedule all days in January. Year For example, 2003 would schedule all days in 2003. Weekday of the Month For example, TUE(1). This would schedule the first Tuesday of the month. Also, SUN(LAST) would schedule the last Sunday of the month, and FRI(LAST-1) would schedule the second to last Friday of the month. Auto-Date Formula Operators An operator is a character or word you insert in an auto-date formula to perform a specific operation. Each operator is assigned a priority, meaning that when a formula is evaluated, some operations are performed before others. You can use grouping operators to group operators according to their priorities. The table below lists operators and their priorities. Additional details about the operators are provided following the table. Function Priority A blank space (high-priority And) 1 122 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Function Priority Plus or + 2 Minus or - 2 To or: 3 Every. . Starting 4 Every. . .Ending 4 Before 5 On/Before 5 After 5 On/After 5 Near 5 Near/After 5 Or or, 6 Not or ! 6 And or & (low-priority And) 7 This section contains the following topics: + “Grouping Operators” on page 123 + “High-Priority And” on page 124 + “Offset Operators” on page 124 + “Range” on page 124 + “Periodic Operators” on page 124 + “Relative Operators” on page 125 + “Or” on page 125 + “Not” on page 125 + “Low-Priority And” on page 125 Grouping Operators Use parentheses as grouping operators to change the priority of operators or to group functions together for clarification. For example, because the high-priority And operator (a space) has a higher priority than the Or operator (a comma), the formula below means that all scheduled days must fall on a Tuesday or must fall on a Thursday and be in the month of July or must be in the month of August. tue,thu jul,aug In other words, the formula is performed as if parentheses were inserted as follows: (tue,thu) Gul,aug) Scheduling Group and Posted Items 123 Now examine the following formula: (tue), (thu jul),(aug) This formula would schedule all Tuesdays, all Thursdays in the month of July, and all days in the months of August. Notice how the meaning changes when parentheses are included as in the formula below. (tue,thu) Gul,aug) With the above formula, all scheduled days must fall on a Tuesday or Thursday and must be in the month of July or August. The end result is that only Tuesdays and Thursdays in July and August are scheduled. High-Priority And A space between two functions acts as an And operator, meaning that both functions must hold true. For example, 25 means the 25th day of all months in all years. But 25 oct means that all scheduled days must fall on the 25th day of the month and must be in October. And 25 oct 2003 means that all scheduled days must fall on the 25th day of the month and must be in October and must be in the year 2003. Offset Operators You can use a positive offset operator (+ or the word PLUS) or a negative offset operator (- or the word MINUS) to add a relative offset to a function or statement. For example, to schedule an event three days before the first Thursday in February for all years, you could enter the following formula: thu(1) feb-3 Range The range operator (: or the word To) functions like a series of Or operators (see “Or” on page 125) between each item (day, month, etc.) in the range. For example, if you want to schedule the 15th of every month, but only if the 15th is a weekday, you could enter either of the following formulas: 15&mon:fri 15(mon:fri) This formula means that all scheduled days must fall on the 15th of the month and must be a day from Monday to Friday. Another way of describing the formula is that all scheduled days must fall on the 15th of the month and must be a Monday or Tuesday or Wednesday or Thursday or Friday. Periodic Operators The three periodic operators are Every, Starting, and Ending. Use Every in combination with Starting and/or Ending to schedule days at regular intervals, beginning on a specific date and/or ending on a specific date. For example, suppose you want to schedule a meeting for once a week starting on March 3, 2003 and continuing through June 11, 2003. You could use the following formula: every 7 starting mar 3 2003 ending jun 11 2003 The formula will schedule every seventh day starting with March 3, 2003 and ending with June 11, 2003. The starting date is always scheduled as the first day and the ending date is scheduled only if it naturally falls at the Every interval. If you do not use both the Starting and Ending operators, the starting or ending date is the first or last date in the Calendar file. 124 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide For example, examine the following formula: every 7 starting mar 3 2003 The above formula schedules every seventh day starting on March 3, 2003 and continuing to the last date in the Calendar file. The Every command will work with numbers up to 30. For example, “every 45 starting mar 3 2003” is not a valid formula. Relative Operators The six relative operators are Before, On/Before, After, On/After, Near, and On/Near. Use these operators to schedule days relative to a specific date. For example, to schedule the Monday closest to November 6 in all years, you could enter the following formula: mon on/near nov 6 If you need to schedule the first Tuesday after November 6, 2003, you could enter the following formula: tue after nov 6 2003 Or You can use the Or operator (a comma or the word Or) to indicate that one or the other function or statement must hold true in order to schedule days. For example, to schedule an appointment on the 15th day of each month in the year 2003, but only if the 15th falls on a Tuesday or Thursday, enter the following formula: 15 2003 (tue,thu) Not When placed before a function, the Not operator (! or the word Not) negates that function. For example, if you want to schedule all days in January 2003 except for Tuesdays and Thursdays, you could use the following formula: jan 2003 !tue !thu Low-Priority And Like a space, the low-priority And operator (& or the word And) between two functions indicates that both functions must hold true. However, the low-priority And has the lowest priority of all operators. For example, examine the following formula: tue,thu jul,aug This means that scheduled days must be a Tuesday or must be a Thursday and must be in July or must be in August. However, suppose you were to substitute the high-priority And (a space) with a low-priority And, as in the following formula: tue,thu and jul,aug The above formula indicates that scheduled days must be a Tuesday or must be a Thursday and must be in July or must be in August. In the first formula, the And operator is evaluated before the Or operators. In the second formula, the And operator is evaluated after the Or operators. Scheduling Group and Posted Items 125 126 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using Your Calendar You can view your schedule in a variety of views or formats, including day, week, month, year, task list, project planner, and multi-user. For example, the month view lets you view a month schedule, while the Multi-User view lets you view, compare, and manage the schedules of multiple users or resources to whose Calendars you have proxy rights. You can use Graphic Display to show appointment duration in blocks to visualize time use in your schedule or you can use Text Display to better comprehend the sequence of your appointments. Time intervals in the Appointments List can be adjusted from ten minutes to two hours, depending on how detailed a list you want to see. You can also define your work schedule to display only your office hours on your Calendar. And by using Show Appointment As, you can display levels of availability for appointments in Busy Search and in your Calendar. If you have automatic archiving set, items that have been archived are no longer displayed on your calendar. To make them appear on your calendar, unarchive the item from your archive calendar. For more information on how to unarchive an item, see “Unarchiving Items” on page 162. Use the Show and Filter (Dd, drop-down lists in the Calendar header to filter for scheduled items according to category or other filter criteria. This is the Calendar header: à Calendar Show: All Categories 42 Many types of calendar views and printouts are available to let you choose the one that displays the information you need. This section contains the following topics: + “Viewing Your Calendar” on page 128 + “Reading an Item in Your Calendar” on page 130 + “Saving an Item in Your Calendar” on page 130 + “Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources” on page 131 + “Printing Calendar Items” on page 133 + “Changing the First Day of the Week in Your Calendar” on page 135 + “Viewing a Different Date in the Calendar” on page 135 ¢ “Setting Alarms for Calendar Items” on page 135 For additional calendaring and scheduling information, see Chapter 5, “Scheduling Group and Posted Items,” on page 105. Using Your Calendar 127 Viewing Your Calendar This section contains the following topics: + “Opening the Calendar Folder or a Calendar View” on page 128 + “Navigating in the Calendar” on page 129 + “Viewing As Calendar” on page 130 + “Understanding the Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Calendar” on page 130 Opening the Calendar Folder or a Calendar View The calendar view in the folder list has a toolbar that provides access to several Calendar view options. You can add more buttons to the Calendar toolbar and configure them however you want. The view that is displayed when you exit your Calendar will be displayed when you open the Calendar folder again. 1 Click Calendar in the Folder List, then click the buttons on the Calendar toolbar to choose different views. 44 Novell GroupWise - Calendar File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | @ address Book D Q | Egnewmal + Gynew Appt ~ Gynewtak - Ñ | © El- E - | Rens + [Accept + [Decine ~ e i Calendar Show: All Categories <p Sophie Jones = paren [1/16/2003 E] [E] <1 47> asie «365» (0 1] EJ Es elele] + - aa Sent Items E 3) Contacts El Documents [%, Checklist [4 Work In Progress E Cabinet € Trash [1] Mon Jan 13,2003 TueJan14,2003 | Wed Jan 15, 2003 (BRIBED Friday Jan 17, 2003 DO = E | | fi Project 2003 | T Se PEER a Kick-Off | © |Wil's birthday i Submit your vote for Employee of the Year O | Buy a gift for aliant or Click Window, click Calendar, then click a calendar view. 128 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide fenar a File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Ex] B QOR Ely New Appt ~ GeyNew Task ~ | I Delegate ic E] Busy Search | =% Online Show: All Categories <2 1 6 Reminder notes: 3:26 PM Thursday © Monday is a holiday January 16, 2003 9 Care Team Meeting | Appointments: O | Submit your vote for Employee of the Year O... Buy a gift for client You can view the Calendar in various formats, including aj ena and year. Click a different button on the Calendar toolbar or click the arrow on the 7) button, then click a view. You can right-click any day in the Calendar to get more options. For example, you can see any day in an expanded view that displays in a separate window. You can also switch between Graphic Display and Text Display. If you want, you can close your folder list to leave more room for other views in the Main Window. Click View, then click Folders List to open or close the Folder List display. Navigating in the Calendar Use the Calendar toolbar to see what you want in the Calendar. This is the Calendar toolbar: [1/17/2003 alo 41) 47> 431» 4365» O ©] EN Es Es [olule | + - 4 To select a date to view, click El then click a date. 2 To return to today's date, click Es]. 3 To move forward or back one day, click the arrow buttons on 4] 4 To move forward or back one week, click the arrow buttons on wj 5 To move forward or back one month, click the arrow buttons on <S A 6 To move forward or back one year, click the arrow buttons on 4365 »| 7 To see a day view, click al 8 To see a week view, click k 9 To see a month view, click E . Using Your Calendar 129 10 To see a year view, click ==). 11 To see a Multi-User view, click El 12 To see a non-default view that you have created, click El 13 To show or hide appointments (on views where this applies), click 9] 14 To show or hide tasks (on views where this applies), click 5] 15 To show or hide reminder notes (on views where this applies), click Bl 16 To show another day in the week view, click =], 17 To remove a day from the week view, click -i Viewing As Calendar This method of viewing your Calendar is useful if you store all your appointments or other items for a specific project or client in one folder and want to see your schedule for that project only. 1 Click a project folder in the Folder List. 2 Click aj then click As Calendar. or Click al All scheduled, accepted items that are saved in that folder display. Understanding the Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Calendar The icons that appear in your calendar give you additional information about items. See “Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar” on page 28 for more information. Reading an Item in Your Calendar 4 Click Calendar in the Folder List. 2 Double-click the item you want to read. In all views except the Year view, you can rest your mouse pointer on most items and see information such as Subject, Time, Place, and To. Saving an Item in Your Calendar In your Mailbox or Calendar, click the item you want to save, click File, then click Save As. Ctrl+click the item and attachments you want to save. Select to save the item to disk or to a GroupWise® Library. BR © Na Type a filename for the item in the Save File As box. or Type a subject name in the Subject box. 5 To save the item in a different directory than is shown in the Current Directory text box, click Browse, then select the new directory. 130 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide or To save the item in a different GroupWise Library, click the drop-down list, then select a library name. 6 If you are saving to disk, select Report Filename Conflicts to be prompted before replacing a file with the same name. 7 Ifyou are saving to a GroupWise Library, make sure Set Properties Using Default Values is selected unless you want to specify document properties at this time. 8 Click Save, then click Close. Saved items remain in your Calendar as well as being copied to the location you specify. Items are saved in WordPerfect* format with a .doc extension so that they can also be opened in Word. Attachments are saved in their original format. Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources The Multi-User Calendar view lets you see the schedules of several users or resources side-by- side. Use this view to find out what everyone’s schedule is for the day, or find out which of your company’s conference rooms is free at a specific time. IMPORTANT: You must have the appropriate Proxy rights for each user or resource in order to include them in a Multi-User view. (See “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171.) For example, if you do not have Read rights for appointments, you will not be able to see another person's schedule in the Multi-User view. For each Multi-User view, you need to create a list of the users or resources whose calendars you want to display. The order of names in the list, called a Multi-User List, determines the order in which the calendars display in the Multi-User view. This section contains the following topics: + “Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources” on page 131 + “Modifying a Multi-User List” on page 132 + “Creating a Multi-User Calendar View” on page 132 Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources You must have the appropriate Proxy rights to add users to a Multi-User List and view their schedules in a Multi-User view. See “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171. 4 Click Calendar in the Folder List, then click the Multi-User view button on the Calendar toolbar. 2 If this is the first time you have used the Multi-User view, right-click in the Multi-User view, click Multi-User List, click the check boxes by the names of the users whose calendars you want to view, then click OK. 3 View the users' schedules. 4 Ifyou have appropriate Proxy rights and want to schedule an appointment, you can click and drag from the time you want the appointment to be, across the users you want to include in the appointment. You can modify the Multi-User List associated with this Multi-User view. You can also create additional Multi-User views. Using Your Calendar 131 Modifying a Multi-User List You must have the appropriate Proxy rights to add users and resources to a Multi-User List and to view their calendars in a Multi-User view. See “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171. 1 Click Calendar in the Folder List, then click (SI on the Calendar toolbar. (If you have created additional Multi-User views, the button may look like =] .) 2 Right-click in the Multi-User view, then click Multi-User List. or Click the arrow to the right of El then click Add or Remove Users. 3 To add a user or resource, click By double-click a name, then click OK. 4 To delete a user or resource, click the name, then click Remove User. or To delete all the names in the list, click Edit, then click Remove All. 5 To change the order of the names in the list, click a name, then click the up-arrow or down- arrow button. The order of names determines the order in which the calendars display in the Multi-User view. 6 To remove a user or resource calendar from the Multi-User view without deleting the name from the list, deselect the check box by the name. 7 To insert all the names in your Proxy List, click Edit, then click Insert Proxy List. 8 To reset the list, click Edit, click Remove All, click Edit, then click Insert Last List. 9 Click OK to save and exit the dialog box. or Click Apply to save without exiting. Creating a Multi-User Calendar View You must have the appropriate Proxy rights to add users to a Multi-User List and view their schedules in a Multi-User view. See “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171. 1 Click Calendar in the Folder List. 2 Right-click the Calendar toolbar, then click Properties. 3 Click New, then specify a new Name so you can distinguish Multi-User views from one another. 4 Click Multi-User in the View Name drop-down list, then click OK twice. The Multi-User List dialog box displays. 5 Ifauser or resource you want in the Multi-User view is not listed, click El 6 Double-click a user or resource, click OK, then repeat for each user you want to add. 7 Select the check boxes of the users whose calendars you want to display, then click OK. You can create additional Multi-User views for other groups of users or resources. 132 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Printing Calendar Items Use Print Calendar to print appointments, tasks, and reminder notes in different formats and on various page sizes. This section contains the following topics: + “Printing Your Calendar, Task List, or Reminder Note List” on page 133 + “Printing the Calendars of Multiple Users” on page 134 Printing Your Calendar, Task List, or Reminder Note List 1 Chick 2 on the toolbar. Print Calendar 24x! r Form size @ Letter Cas Ww C 55x85in C A5 € Month C Custom O List Width: Height: o Multi-User [8.50 in. fi 1.00 in. Saip. Franklin sizes Available forms: [Monarch (8.5% 11 in.) +] Ex ande able h do nth C Calend: ar Franklin Month Calendar Rolling Month — Form orientation ( Portrait Landscape Preview... | Printer Setup... | Close | Click a calendar format in the Format group box. Click a paper size in the Form Size group box. Click a calendar view under Available Forms. Click Portrait or Landscape. Click the Content tab, type a starting date, then read and select other options. Click Font, make selections, then click OK. onodg A OY N Click the Options tab, then read and select other options. For help on any option, click Æ then click the option. Using Your Calendar 133 Print Calendar 121 x] Form | Content A Header: | Footer Options F Name T Overflow extra text to following pages Phare F Print on both sides of page (duplex) di. FT Print to a text file FT Print to an HTML file Print items — | |” Use shading C All F Print separator lines between items IV Center form on page (horizontally) T Insert blank page at beginning of print job @ Selected folder Preview... | Printer Setup... | Close | 9 Click the Preview button to see how the page layout looks with the selected options. If necessary, change the options. 10 Click Print. Printing the Calendars of Multiple Users 1 Make sure you have Proxy Read rights to the Mailboxes of all the users whose schedules you want to print. 2 Click File, then click Proxy to make sure that all of the users whose schedules you want to print appear in your Proxy List. If they do not appear on the list, add them. 3 Click on the toolbar. 4 Click Multi-User in the Format group box, click Setup, then select the users whose schedules you want to print. Multi-User Setup E Proxy list: Proxies per page: ary Wong 5 Specify the maximum number of proxy schedules to print per page in Proxies Per Page. For example, if you are going to print the schedules of nine users, but only want three schedules per page, you would specify 3. 6 Click OK. 7 Click a calendar view under Available Forms. 8 Click a paper size in the Form Size group box. 134 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 9 Click Portrait or Landscape. 10 Click the Content tab, then read and select other options. 11 Click the Options tab, then read and select other options. For help on a dialog box option, click 21] then click the option. 12 Click the Preview button to see how the multi-user page layout looks with the selected options. 13 Click Print. Changing the First Day of the Week in Your Calendar 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Date & Time, then click the Calendar tab. 3 Select a day in the Month Display Options group box, then click OK. Viewing a Different Date in the Calendar 1 If the view displayed has a Calendar toolbar, click Bl then click a date. or If the view displayed has no toolbar, click View, click Go to Date, specify a date, then click OK. 2 If the view displayed has a Calendar toolbar, click CSI. or If the view displayed has no Calendar toolbar, click View, then click Go to Today. Going to a different date is not applicable to some views. Setting Alarms for Calendar Items Group Wise can sound an alarm to remind you of an upcoming appointment. It can also send an alarm to an electronic pager. In addition, you can choose to open a file or to run a program when the alarm goes off. For example, you can set an appointment to back up your files when you aren't at work and your computer is on. In Date Time Options, you can specify a default that automatically sets an alarm each time you accept an appointment. Click Tools, click Options, double-click Date & Time, then select Set Alarm When Accepted. This section contains the following topics: + “Setting an Alarm” on page 136 + “Specifying How Long Before an Event the Alarm Sounds” on page 136 + “Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager” on page 137 Using Your Calendar 135 Setting an Alarm Notify must be running for an alarm to sound. 1 In your Mailbox or Calendar, click an appointment. 2 Click Actions, then click Alarm. Hours before: | | Minutes before: E =) (Hear Program to launch when alarm goes off: CT LE Cancel | 3 Specify the number of hours or minutes before the appointment that you want the alarm to sound. 4 Click Set. If Alarm is dimmed, make sure that the appointment time hasn't already passed. To remove an alarm that has been set for appointment, click the appointment, click Actions, click Alarm, then click Clear. Specifying How Long Before an Event the Alarm Sounds 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Date & Time, then click the Calendar tab. 3 Make sure Set Alarm When Accepted is selected. 4 Specify the number of minutes before an event that you want an alarm to sound. Calendar | Busy Search | Format | m Month Display Option m Line, Color Options Re dul i i a Te S Color Lines Fistofweek: © COC OC CT fC Appointments [Y Highlight ds [Y TP TP fF fF fF fv Reminder notes [Y [Y I Show week number Tasks M M m Appointment Options m Alarm Options IV Include myself on new appointments IV Set alarm when accepted Display appointment length 5 © Duration Default alarm time: C End date and time hours: minutes: E = minutes Default appointment length: fi a jo a Work Schedule (Mountain Standard Time) Start time: [8:00:00 à O s End time: [:00:00P rm Work days: T = Xl a xls la < Tu Cancel | 5 Click OK. 136 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager You can set an alarm in your mailbox or calendar to notify you about the status of a message through an electronic paging device. Notify must be running for you to receive notification of alarms, incoming items, or a change in status of outgoing items. To set up alarms to be diverted to a pager, 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click @ on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Alarms tab. GroupWise Notify Options |= | AAN 1144 4 Click Send to Pager. 5 Enter the SMTP address to your electronic pager. For example, 8001234567@skytel.com. You can also enter the GroupWise Pager Gateway addressing syntax. Notify will send the subject of the appointment to your pager at the set alarm time. Using Your Calendar 137 138 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Managing Your Mailbox GroupWise® provides many features to help you manage your Mailbox. This section contains the following topics: + + + “Using the Folder List” on page 140 “Using Shared Folders” on page 144 “Managing Contacts Through Your Mailbox” on page 146 “Using Mailbox Storage Size Information” on page 155 “Running Notify” on page 157 “Archiving the Items in Your Mailbox” on page 162 “Printing Items in Your Mailbox” on page 163 “Creating Rules” on page 165 “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171 “Saving Items in Your Mailbox” on page 174 “Owning Resources” on page 176 “Opening and Emptying the Trash” on page 178 “Deleting Items from Your Mailbox” on page 179 “Backing Up Your Mailbox” on page 180 “Finding Items” on page 181 “Finding Text in Items” on page 186 “Filtering Items” on page 187 “Using the Columns in Your Mailbox” on page 197 “Repairing Your Mailbox” on page 198 Managing Your Mailbox 139 Using the Folder List Use folders to store and organize your items. For example, you can group all items related to a particular task or subject together. A typical user’s Folder List might look like this: ($) Sophie Jones € Pto La Sent Items E Calendar 8) Contacts E [El Documents [4 Checklist [F Work In Progress EE] Cabinet 82 Technology Ideas C3 Feedback from Training Meetit (3 Messages from Director E Status Reports POP3 Account $ Trash [1] sn ni All folders in your Main Window are subfolders of your user folder. The user folder represents your user database, and contains all of your GroupWise information. For information about the individual folders you might have in your Folder List, see the following: + “User Folder” on page 22 + “Mailbox Folder” on page 22 + “Sent Items Folder” on page 23 + “Calendar Folder” on page 23 + “Contacts Folder” on page 23 + “Checklist Folder” on page 23 + “Cabinet” on page 24 + “Documents Folder” on page 24 + “Work in Progress Folder” on page 25 + “Junk Mail Folder” on page 25 + “Trash Folder” on page 25 + “Shared Folders” on page 25 + “IMAP4 Account Folder” on page 26 + “NNTP Newsgroup Account Folder” on page 26 Click + and - to expand and collapse folders. Next to any folder (except for shared folders), the number of unread items is shown in square brackets. Next to the Sent Items folder, the number in square brackets shows how many items are pending to be sent from Caching or Remote mode. You can organize items in your folders by moving or linking them. When you move an item into a folder, it is taken from one location and placed in another. When you link an item to a folder, the item still exists in its original folder and it also appears in the new folder. When you change a linked item, it is also changed in the other folders. If an item is linked to multiple folders and you delete the original item, the copies in your other folders remain. 140 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You can define a different set of properties for each folder in your Mailbox. For example, you can sort the items in one folder by date, and sort the items in another folder by company. You can store unfinished items in a predefined folder called Work In Progress. (See “Saving an Unfinished Item” on page 176.) You can store all of your documents in the Documents folder. (See “Organizing Your Documents” on page 282.) You can also make folders public by sharing them. (See “Using Shared Folders” on page 144.) You can create rules to automatically sort items to different folders. (See “Creating Rules” on page 165.) This section contains the following topics: “Renaming Folders” on page 141 + “Deleting Folders” on page 141 + “Creating a Personal Folder” on page 141 + “Creating a Shared Folder” on page 142 + “Moving or Linking an Item to Another Folder” on page 142 + “Understanding Find Results Folders” on page 142 + “Changing or Deleting Folder Display Settings” on page 144 Renaming Folders 1 In the Main Window, right-click the folder, then click Rename. 2 Type a new name for the folder. You cannot rename the Calendar, Documents, Mailbox, Sent Items, Checklist, Contacts, Cabinet, Work In Progress, or Trash folders. Deleting Folders 1 Right-click the folder you want to delete, then click Delete. 2 Click Items Only or Folder(s) and Items, then click OK. You cannot delete the Calendar, Documents, Mailbox, Sent Items, Checklist, Contacts, Cabinet, Work In Progress, or Trash folders. You can delete the Junk Mail folder only if Junk Mail Handling has been disabled. To delete a folder that is shared with you, right-click the folder, click Delete, then click Yes. Creating a Personal Folder 1 In the Folder List, click File, click New, then click Folder. 2 Make sure Personal Folder is selected, then click Next. 3 Type the name and description for the new folder. 4 Click Up, Down, Right, or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List, then click Next. 5 Specify the display settings for the folder, then click Finish. If you create a folder, then decide you want it in a different position, drag the folder to a new position in the Folder List. Managing Your Mailbox 141 Creating a Shared Folder 1 In the Folder List, click File, click New, then click Folder. 2 Click Shared Folder, then click Next. 3 Type a name and description for the new folder. 4 Click Up, Down, Right, or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List, then click Next. 5 Specify the display settings for the folder, then click Next. 6 In the Name box, start typing the name of the user. 7 When the user's name appears in the box, click Add User to move the user into the Share List. 8 Click the user's name in the Share List. 9 Select the access options you want for the user. 10 Repeat Steps 6-9 for each user you want to share the folder with. 11 Click Next. 12 Specify the display settings you want for the folder. 13 When you're done, click Finish. For more information about shared folders, see “Using Shared Folders” on page 144. Moving or Linking an Item to Another Folder 1 Drag an item from the Item List to the folder you want. Press Alt while you drag the item to remove it from all folders it was previously linked to and place it in only that folder. Press Ctrl while you drag the item to link it to that folder. You can also click an item, click Edit, click Move/Link to Folders, select the folders you want to move or link the item to, then click Move or Link. Select Delete Old Links to remove the item from all folders it was previously linked to and place it in the selected folder. If you delete the original item, the copies in your other folders remain. Understanding Find Results Folders A Find Results folder is a folder that displays the results of a query. When the folder is opened, GroupWise examines the search criteria defined for the folder, searches for everything specified, then displays everything it finds in the Item List. You can act on items in a Find Results folder the same way you act on items in any folder, such as opening, forwarding, printing, copying, moving, or deleting them, but the original item remains stored in the folder where the search found it. This means that if you move or delete an item from a Find Results folder, the item is deleted from the Item List, but not from the original location. The next time you open the Find Results folder, the search is performed again and the item is once again displayed. You can see the folder where each item originated if you open a Find Results folder and look at the columns of information displayed in the Item List. The Folder column lists where each item is actually stored. 142 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You can create your own Find Results folders and define the search criteria you want, such as all items from a particular address or all items with a certain word in the Subject line. The Sent Items Folder and the Task List Folder (if you have them) are both Find Results folders. Sent Items searches for every item you have sent, no matter which folder or subfolder it’s now stored in, and displays the results. The Task List searches the Calendar and displays all of your completed and uncompleted tasks. If you accidentally delete your Sent Items folder or Task List Folder, you can restore it. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a Find Results Folder” on page 143 + “Restoring Your Sent Items or Task List Folder” on page 143 Creating a Find Results Folder 4 Click the Folder List, click File, click New, then click Folder. 2 Click Find Results Folder. 3 To create a Find Results folder with your own search criteria, click Custom Find Results Folder, then click Next. or To create a Find Results folder based on Find By Example, click Custom Find By Example Folder, then click Next. or If you want to use a predefined Find Results folder as a template for creating a custom folder, click Predefined Find Results Folder, select the predefined folder you want to base your folder on (for example, Sent Items), select Modify Predefined Find Results Folder, then click Next. 4 Type the name and the description for your folder. 5 Click Up, Down, Right, or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List, then click Next. 6 Specify the search criteria, find by example criteria, or information for items you want to find. 7 Ifyou don’t want the folder to update results each time you open it, deselect Find New Matching Items Each Time the Folder Is Opened. 8 Click Next. 9 Specify any display settings you want for this folder, then click Finish. Restoring Your Sent Items or Task List Folder The Sent Items folder and Task List folder in versions prior to Group Wise 6.5 were Find Results (query) folders, which had some differences from the current Sent Items folder and Checklist folder. This procedure restores the previous Sent Items folder or Task List folder. For a comparison between the current Sent Items folder and previous Sent Items folder, see “Sent Items Folder” on page 23. For a comparison between the current Checklist folder and the previous Task List folder, see “Checklist Folder” on page 23. 1 In the Folder List, click File, click New, then click Folder. 2 Click Find Results Folder, then click Predefined Find Results Folder. Managing Your Mailbox 143 3 Click Task List or All Sent Items. 4 Click Next. 5 Click Up, Down, Right, or Left to position the folder where you want it in the Folder List. 6 Click Finish. Changing or Deleting Folder Display Settings You can control the name that will appear in the Display drop-down list, the source of the items in the folder, the column display, and the order in which items will sort in the folder. 1 Right-click any folder in the Folder List, then click Properties. 2 Click the Display tab. 3 Click the display setting you want to modify in the Setting Name drop-down list. 4 Make any changes to the display settings in the dialog box. 5 Click Save As, change the display settings name as required, then click OK. 6 To delete a folder display setting, click the display setting, then click Delete. 7 Click OK. Using Shared Folders A shared folder is like any other folder in your Cabinet, except other people have access to it and it appears in their Cabinets. You can create shared folders or share existing personal folders in your Cabinet. You choose whom to share the folder with, and what rights to grant each user. Then, users can post messages to the shared folder, drag existing items into the folder, and create discussion threads. You can't share system folders, which include the Calendar, Documents, Mailbox, Sent Items, Checklist, Contacts, Cabinet, Work In Progress, Junk Mail Handling and Trash folders. This is what the contents of a typical shared folder might look like: $ô Novell GroupWise - Technology Ideas E File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | E address Book Ba | Ef New Mail ~ Ef New Appt ~ GeyNewTask + Ty | E Ed - | ES == Technology Ideas E Eje Grace Smith Increase performance without limiting sco 1/7/2003 8:34:1 | 9 ” Reply Y ME Forwar Show: All Categorie ($) Sophie Jones $ & Mailbox [7] & Sent Items @e Sophie Jones But what if your setup is different? 1/17/2003 7:11: EJ Calendar Ele Alfons Skoczylas Re: But what if your setup is differer 1/17/2003 7:1 a SA E Eje Alfons Skoczylas Here's another idea 1/17/2003 7:15: Y Checklist Ele Mike Palu Re: Here's another idea 1/17/2003 7:1 [A Work In Progress Els Grace Smith I came across this information yest 1/17/2003 7:1 = Cabinet 3 (9 Martha de la Torre Web link to some exciting discoveries 1/17/2003 7:19: Technology Ideas [6] Ele Mike Palu This is brilliant! 1/17/2003 7:2 & C3 Feedback from Training Me, ii ipa aie Mi | | Selected: 0 Tota If you place a document in a shared folder, people with rights to the shared folder don't automatically have rights to edit the document. Before they can edit the document, you must give them Edit rights on the Document Sharing tab. In Remote and Caching modes, changes in shared folders are updated whenever you connect to the master GroupWise system. 144 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide This section contains the following topics: ¢ “Sharing an Existing Folder with Other Users (v6.5 and v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 145 + “Posting a Message to a Shared Folder” on page 145 + “Viewing Discussion Threads in a Shared Folder” on page 146 Sharing an Existing Folder with Other Users (v6.5 and v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) 1 In the Main Window, right-click the folder you want to share, then click Sharing. Project 2003 Properties El [x | General | Display Sharing | © Not shared -@ Shared with Name: Add User | [EJ Remove User | Share list: | Access Alecia Mendenh... Accepted Read, Add Ana Dharmapalan Accepted Read, Add Harry Wong Accepted Read, Add Additional access for Alecia Mendental | M Add Ent [Delete Cancel | 2 Click Shared With. 3 In the Name box, start typing the name of a user, or click the Address Book button to select the user from the Address Selector dialog box. 4 When the user's name appears in the box, click Add User to move the user into the Share List. 5 Click the user's name in the Share List. 6 Select the access options you want for the user. 7 Repeat Steps 3-6 for each user you want to share the folder with. 8 Click OK. If you are sharing an IMAP4 folder, the IMAP4 server must support sharing folders. You can only share IMAP4 folders with a user who is in the same IMAP4 server. If you want the folder to have a specific function, you can create a new display setting. For example, if the folder is for shared discussions, you should create a setting that views items by reply thread and contains both sent and received items. Right-click the folder, click Properties, then click Display. Posting a Message to a Shared Folder 4 Click the shared folder in your Folder List to open it. 2 Click File, click New, then click Discussion/Note. Managing Your Mailbox 145 If you want to post a different type of item, such as a task, click Edit, click Change To, then click an item type. 3 Type a subject. 4 Type your message. 5 Click Attach to attach files. 6 Click Post on the toolbar. To reply to an existing item in a shared folder, open the item, click Reply, select a reply option, then click OK. See “Replying to an Item in a Shared Folder” on page 80 for more information. Viewing Discussion Threads in a Shared Folder 1 In a shared folder, click View, click Display Settings, then click Discussion Threads. or Click a] on the toolbar. 2 To expand or collapse a discussion thread, click the - and + next to the original discussion item. 3 To scroll through different discussions, press Ctrl+Left-arrow or Ctrl+Right-arrow. Managing Contacts Through Your Mailbox GroupWise Contact Management gives you access to your contacts, groups, resources, and organizations from the E Contacts folder in the Folder List. $ô Novell GroupWise - Contacts B i File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | B address Book fa) Ey Q | NewMail ~ G Nev || 39-E | @ New Contact GB Mew Resource 2, New Organization &3 New Æ Contacts Show: All Categorid |__| CE ET CES ETS Fax Number ere com ( Sophie Jones $ & Mailbox [7] Sent Items E] Calendar East es Room pea = gsmith@Corporate.com x11012 E Documents P - A Checklist Heather Sarmiento hsarmiento@Corporate.com x11005 H Work In Progress Henry Yacoub henryy@jerryinc.com E Cabinet Jerry Inc. 95 Technology Ideas [6] Joe Pangilinan jpangilinan@Corporate.com x11000 (24 Feedback from Training Me Martha de la Torre mdelatorre@Corporate.com x11019 RE Pak ee Moon rrer nonn fA Messanes From Dir, «10 El > | | Selected: 1 | Tote The Contacts folder shows, by default, all the entries in your Frequent Contacts address book. Any modification you make in the Contacts folder will also be made in the corresponding address book (Frequent Contacts or other address book). Any modification you make in the address book will be reflected in the Contacts folder. For more information about address books, see Chapter 8, “Using the Address Book,” on page 203. Your proxies will never see your Contacts folder. Use the Contacts folder to view, update, delete, and add information for contacts, groups, resources, and organizations in the selected address book. 146 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide To see contacts, groups, resources, and organizations from another address book, change the address book that the Contacts folder displays. This section contains the following topics: + “Managing Contacts” on page 147 + “Managing Groups” on page 149 + “Managing Resources” on page 150 + “Managing Organizations” on page 151 + “Changing the Address Book the Contacts Folder Displays” on page 151 + “Sending a Mail Message from a Contact” on page 152 + “Changing the Display Name of a Contact” on page 153 + “Viewing All Correspondence You Have Had with a Contact” on page 155 Managing Contacts Each contact in the Contacts folder is marked with the & Contact icon. When you double-click a contact, the contact item view displays. Š% Tabitha Hu (Frequent Contacts) a -loj x| Summary Contact | Office | Personal | Comments | Advanced | Certificate | History | > Name Ext ran Bi [yi Middle [sun | lst [Hu Display (EST ëO > Email Address pen | Offi 11013 [ üO Add Office |x Pascoe C Home thu@Corporate.com Remove Edit | C Mobile [321000 °° Fax F = ||. Pager ~ Instant Messaging- z] | Add ihu Categories: Cancel | The following table explains the purpose of each tab on the contact item view. For specific help about each field on a tab, click a field in the contact item view, then press Shift+F1. Tab Purpose Summary This tab displays a summary of the information contained in the other tabs. Click the drop-down list to display the summary information in two different formats. If your system administrator has customized this tab, you might have additional formats to choose from. Managing Your Mailbox 147 Tab Contact Office Personal Comments Advanced Certificate History Purpose Use this tab to enter the contact's name, multiple e-mail addresses, multiple phone numbers, and multiple instant messaging IDs. Click the Display drop-down list to select how you want the name to display in Name Completion. You can select Last, First, First Last, or you can enter any display name you choose. When you want to address an item to this contact, type the display name in an address field (To, CC, BC) of the item. If you double-click an e-mail address on the Contact tab, a new mail view is opened, addressed to this contact. If you double-click an instant messaging ID from a supported product, the instant messaging product is opened (if installed) and a conversation is initiated with this contact. You can specify multiple phone numbers. Select the radio button of the default phone number. Use this tab to enter the contact's title, department, organization, company address, mail stop, and company Web site. Type an organization name. If it is already in your address book, Name Completion will fill in the name. If the organization name is not already in your address book, the name you enter will be added to your address book. Use the arrow button to add more information to the organization. Click the Web site button to launch a browser and go to the Web site. Use this tab to enter the contact's home address, personal Web site, and birthday. Click the Web site button to launch a browser and go to the Web site. Click the calendar button to select the birthday of this contact. When the check box next to the date is selected, the birthday information is displayed on the Summary tab and in the Birthday column if you have added one to an address book. Selecting the check box does not add the birthday to your Calendar. If you deselect the check box, the birthday information is available only on the Personal tab. Use this tab to type information about your interaction with this contact. You can insert a time stamp for each entry. Use this tab to view, add, and edit user-defined fields. All system and user-defined fields display. For more information, see “Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book” on page 232. Use this tab to view or remove security certificates you have received from this contact, change the trust of the certificates, edit certificate properties, and import and export certificates. For more information, see “Viewing Security Certificates You Have Received and Changing the Trust” on page 273. This tab displays all the items you have sent to or received from this contact. You can specify the types of items you want to see. You can also specify the date range of items you want to see. This tab includes a QuickViewer pane so you can quickly scan messages. However, archived items are no longer displayed in the history. 148 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Managing Groups Each group in the Contacts folder is marked with the & Group icon. When you double-click a group, the group item view displays. ¿> Project Future (Frequent Contacts) E = oj xj Summary | Details | Default y] Print | Members To: Alfons Skoczylas To: Jason Stevens To: Martha de la Torre To: Mike Palu To: Samantha Murphy The following table explains the purpose of each tab on the group item view. For specific help about each field on a tab, click a field in the group item view, then press Shift+F 1. Tab Purpose Summary This tab displays a summary of the information contained in the other tabs. Click the drop-down list to display the summary information in two different formats. If your system administrator has customized this tab, you might have additional formats to choose from. Details Use this tab to enter a name for the group, a description of the group, and see who is included in the group. You can also select a member of the group and press Delete to remove the name. If you right-click a name, you can see details, remove the name, or change the designation of To, CC and BC. Use the Members button to add entries to the group. For more information, see “Adding and Removing Contacts from a Personal Group” on page 217. Managing Your Mailbox 149 Managing Resources Each resource in the Contacts folder is marked with the @ Resource icon. When you double-click a resource, the resource item view displays. ® East Conference Room (Frequent Contacts} = oj xj Summary Details | Advanced | Name [East Conference Room Phone Bon Type E EmilAdtess [ Owner [Samantha Murphy el Comments Large enough for 8 people. Categories: = Gk | Cancel | The following table explains the purpose of each tab on the resource item view. For specific help about each field on a tab, click a field in the resource item view, then press Shift+F1. Tab Purpose Summary This tab displays a summary of the information contained in the other tabs. Click the drop-down list to display the summary information in two different formats. If your system administrator has customized this tab, you might have additional formats to choose from. Details Use this tab to enter a name for the resource, a phone number, resource type, e- mail address, owner, and comments about this resource. In the Owner field, you can enter a contact that is already in your address book, or you can use the arrow button to create a new contact entry. Advanced Use this tab to view, add, and edit user-defined fields. All system and user-defined fields display. For more information, see “Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book” on page 232. 150 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Managing Organizations Each organization in the Contacts folder is marked with the ae Organization icon. When you double-click an organization, the organization item view displays. =. Jerry Inc. (Frequent Contacts) 1 = oj xj Summary Details | People | Advanced | Organization p erry Inc. Phone Primary Contact [Henny Yacoub Ol Fax Address Jerry Blvd. Civ flewston State/Province > Zip/Postal Code D O Country OoOo i O website [Oo ë l Comments Categories: | = Cancel | The following table explains the purpose of each tab on the organization item view. For specific help about each field on a tab, click a field in the organization item view, then press Shift+F1. Tab Purpose Summary This tab displays a summary of the information contained in the other tabs. Click the drop-down list to display the summary information in two different formats. If your system administrator has customized this tab, you might have additional formats to choose from. Details Use this tab to enter a name for the organization, a phone and fax number, the primary contact in this organization, the address, Web site, and comments about this organization. In the Primary Contact field, you can enter a contact that is already in your address book, or you can use the arrow button to create a new contact entry. People This shows the members of this organization. These are the contacts who have this organization specified on their Office tab. Advanced Use this tab to view, add, and edit user-defined fields. All system and user-defined fields display. For more information, see “Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book” on page 232. Changing the Address Book the Contacts Folder Displays 1 Right-click the Contacts folder. 2 Click Properties. Managing Your Mailbox 151 Contacts Properties 4 21xl General | Display | a [Contacts Type: Contacts Owner: Sophie Jones Contains: 10 Contacts, 2 Groups, 4 Resources, O Organizations Address Book: [Frequent Contacts pe ] Frequent Contacts Sophie Jones Description: 3 Click the address book name from the Address Book drop-down list. 4 Click OK. Sending a Mail Message from a Contact 1 Click the Contacts folder. 2 Double-click a contact. 3 On the Summary tab, click the e-mail address you want to send a message to. Š Tabitha Hu (Frequent Contacts) F -(0/ xj Summary | Contact] Office | Personal | Comments | Advanced | Certificate | History | en | e. | Tabitha Hu Office Information Email Addresses Engineer Group B thu@Corporate.com Development Instant Messaging Office Address nov-thu 1000 Engineering Blvd. DETTE UT Office: x11013 an Mobile: 321-0000 Home Address a Categories: E OK | Cancel | You can also double-click an e-mail address on the Contact tab. 4 Type a subject and message in the mail message that opens. 5 Click Send on the toolbar. 152 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Changing the Display Name of a Contact The display name is the name that displays when you begin typing in the To (or BC or CC) field of a message. When you begin typing a name, for example, "Ta," Name Completion fills in the rest of the name with a name from the address book, for example "Tabitha Hu." However, if there are two Tabitha Hus in the address book, one in Accounting and one in Facilities, it might be difficult for you to know which name Name Completion has filled in, unless you take the time to look at more properties. You can change the display name so that it’s easy to know which name Name Completion has filled in. For example, if you only correspond with Tabitha Hu in Accounting, you could change the display name to Tabitha--Accounting. 1 Click the Contacts folder. 2 Double-click a contact. 3 Click the Contact tab. 4 Click the Display field. Š Tabitha Hu (Frequent Contacts) o =o xi Summary Contact | Office | Personal | Comments | Advanced | Certificate | History | > Name First ran Prefix PF | Middle Sue | Last [Hu Display > Email Address m Phone a |? M thu@Corporate.com Remove Home > Edt | C Mobile [321-0000 C Fax IN C Pager i> 4 r Instant Messaging El En) e thu Remove Categories: Cancel | 5 Type a new display name. Managing Your Mailbox 153 > Tabitha Hu (Frequent Contacts) 0) xi Summary Contact | Office | Personal | Comments | Advanced | Certificate | History | > Name fie [fae |: Middle | Suffix | y] Pr TO. coco r Email Address m Phone PA CUS M thu@Corporate.com Remove | Come | Edt | C Mobile [3210000 -= HN C Pager | Instant Messaging | H | ihu Remove | Edit | Categories: Cancel | You can also click the Display drop-down list to select Last, First or First Last (for example: Hu, Tabitha or Tabitha Hu). 6 Click OK. The next time you address a message, Name Completion will fill in this Display Name. FS Mail To: Tabitha--Accounting File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | Gl sena X Cancel 3) Address ólOQs ILE Ey | HE bu z Mail | Send Options | From: -| [Sophie Jones EE | To: [Tabitha--Accounting BC: | Subject: | Spell ct” 154 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Viewing All Correspondence You Have Had with a Contact Use the History tab to view all correspondence you have had with a contact. 1 Click the Contacts folder. 2 Double-click a contact. 3 Click the History tab. All items you have received from or sent to this contact display. Š Tabitha Hu (Frequent Contacts) E -(0/ xj Summary | Contact | Office | Personal | Comments | Advanced | Certificate History | Item Type: [ail Items +] D From: [1/18/2003 Item Source: [all tems y] To: PT: Tabitha Hu What's a goodtime 1/2/2003 7:51:1 Mailbox Tabitha Hu Re: What's a good 1/2/2003 7:53:0 Mailbox Sophie Jones Lunch Meeting 1/17/2003 12:30 Mailbox E De Alfons Skoczylas Lunch Meeting 1/17/2003 12:3C Calendar De Alfons Skoczyle Lunch Meeting 1/17/2003 12:30 Calendar Subject: Re: What's a good time... How about next Tuesday before lunch? >>> Tabitha Hu 1/2/2003 7:51:12 PM >>> to get together about our new project? it El pu] J o & Categories: The Folder column shows which folder each item is located in. To add or remove columns, right-click the column heading, then click an option. To sort by the information of a column (for example, by date or subject), click the column heading. The message text of the selected item displays below the item list. You can resize the window to see more or less text. You can act on an item (for example, reply, forward, or delete) by clicking buttons on the toolbar above the message text. 4 To show items received and sent between specific dates, specify start and end dates in the From and To fields. 5 To show only a specific item type (for example, mail or appointment), click an item type from the Item Type drop-down list. 6 To show only received items or sent items, click Received Items or Sent Items from the Item Source drop-down list. Using Mailbox Storage Size Information Use Mailbox Storage Size Information to view your mailbox size and to manage items to regain space. Your GroupWise administrator might set a size limit on your mailbox. If your mailbox size exceeds the limit, you cannot send new items until you archive or delete some of your existing items. This section contains the following topics: Managing Your Mailbox 155 + “Viewing Your Mailbox Size Information” on page 156 + “Deleting Items from Your Mailbox Using Mailbox Storage Size Information” on page 156 + “Archiving Items from Your Mailbox Using Mailbox Storage Size Information” on page 157 Viewing Your Mailbox Size Information 4 Click Tools, then click Check Mailbox Size. Mailbox Storage Size Information x You have used 54% of your mailbox storage limit. Once you have exceeded the storage limit, you will not be able to send new items until you either archive or delete some of your existing items. View Mailbox information = | Close | ae . I Curent mailbox size: 556 KB pesa O E e ne FE Maximum storage limit; 1.00 MB C Received Items 9 © Posted/Draît items _Size Date Subject To e Els 05/01/01 03:17P test sound Harry Wong Archive | ¿E 1161 04/24/01 05:34P Re: How's the work on Proj. £ Walter Sanchez č Es 109 04/25/01 09:394 Re: Final Test Plan Colleen Bolton Delete | c 3 1070 04/25/01 09:354 Re: What's a good time... Fatima Haughey e ©» 399 04/30/01 10:004 Production Meeting Jeanie Yacoub Stop Winery | P 2) 504 04/27/01 03:00P Marketing Presentation Harry Wong 2 Inthe View group box, click Trash, Sent Items, Received Items, or Posted/Draft Items. When you select a view, GroupWise searches for items in the selected folder and displays the items in descending order, from the largest file size to the smallest. You can click Stop Query at any time to stop the query. Deleting Items from Your Mailbox Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 1 Click Tools, then click Check Mailbox Size. 2 In the View group box, click Trash, Sent Items, Received Items, or Posted/Draft Items. When you select a view, GroupWise searches for items in the selected folder and displays the items in descending order, from the largest file size to the smallest. You can click Stop Query at any time to stop the query. 3 Select an item or multiple items, then click Delete. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the storage size is below the limit set by your GroupWise administrator. 156 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Archiving Items from Your Mailbox Using Mailbox Storage Size Information 1 Click Tools, then click Check Mailbox Size. 2 In the View group box, click Trash, Sent Items, Received Items, or Posted/Draft Items. When you select a view, Group Wise searches for items in the selected folder and displays the items in descending order, from the largest file size to the smallest. You can click Stop Query at any time to stop the query. 3 Select an item or multiple items, then click Archive. 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until the storage size is below the limit set by your GroupWise administrator. Running Notify Notify is a program that works with GroupWise to alert you when you have new items placed in your mailbox, when your outgoing items are opened, or when you have an upcoming appointment. When Notify is running, © appears on your Windows taskbar. Notify can alert you in four ways: a sound, a dialog box, a small icon, or by launching an application. Each method is described in the following table: Notification Method What Happens Notify Icon on the An envelope appears over the Notify icon in the taskbar when you receive Windows Taskbar a new item or alarm. If the Notify icon doesn’t appear on the taskbar, Notify is not running. Notify Sound Notify plays a system beep or sound file when you receive an item. When you receive an alarm, the sound plays once every five minutes until you clear the alarm from the Notification List. Notification List The Notification List is a dialog box that lists all of the new, unopened items and alarms you have received. You can leave it open on your desktop, or open it from the Notify icon when you want to see it. Notify Dialog Box The Notify dialog box opens on top of whatever application you are using when you receive a new item or alarm. You can receive alarms and notifications for another user if that user gives you those rights in the Access List and if you are on the same post office as that user. See “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171. Ifyou are sending messages to non-GroupWise systems, remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing message to your GroupWise system. Notify is installed in the same folder as GroupWise when you run GroupWise Setup. Notify runs minimized in the background while you run other programs. This section contains the following topics: + “Starting Notify” on page 158 + “Reading an Item from Notify” on page 158 + “Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager” on page 158 + “Displaying the Notify Dialog Box When You Receive Notification” on page 158 + “Turning Off Notification” on page 159 Managing Your Mailbox 157 + “Setting How Often Notify Checks for New Items” on page 159 + “Setting How to Be Notified” on page 159 + “Setting the Alarm Options” on page 159 + “Setting Notify Options for Return Status Messages” on page 160 + “Setting How to Be Notified When Outgoing Messages Change Status” on page 160 + “Setting How to Be Notified of Items in Your Mailbox” on page 160 + “Being Notified of Someone Else's Messages” on page 161 Starting Notify 4 Click Start on the Windows taskbar, click Programs, click GroupWise, then click GroupWise Notify. To make access easier, you can create a shortcut to Notify on your Windows desktop. You can also place a Notify shortcut in your startup folder to start it whenever you log in. Reading an Item from Notify 1 When the Notify dialog box appears, click Read. If a Notify dialog box does not appear when you receive notification, right-click S on the Windows taskbar, then click Read Mail. Sending an Alarm to an Electronic Pager You can set an alarm in your mailbox or calendar to notify you about the status of a message through an electronic paging device. Notify must be running for you to receive notification of alarms, incoming items, or a change in status of outgoing items. 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Alarms tab. 4 Click Send to Pager. 5 Specify the gateway, service with options, and the pin for the pager. For example, skytel/b4.12345. 6 Click OK. Notify sends the subject of the appointment to your pager at the set alarm time. Displaying the Notify Dialog Box When You Receive Notification 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Notify tab. 4 Make sure Show Dialog is selected for the item types and priorities you want. 5 Click the General tab. 158 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 6 Type the number of seconds you want the dialog box to display under Show Notify Dialog For. You can specify up to 32,767 seconds, which is just over nine hours. 7 Click OK. Turning Off Notification 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Exit. Setting How Often Notify Checks for New Items 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Type the number of minutes under Check for Mail Every. 4 Click OK. Setting How to Be Notified 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Notify tab. 4 Select the type of item that you want to set notification for. or Select Use Same Setting for All Types to use the same settings for all types of items. 5 Select the following options for high priority, standard priority, and low priority items: 5a Select if you want the pop-up dialog box to display. 5b Select if you want to play a sound. If you select to play a sound, click the folder to browse to the sound you want Notify to play. 5c Select if you want Notify to launch a program when notifying you. 6 Click OK. Setting the Alarm Options Make sure Notify is running. Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. Click the Alarm tab. Select if you want the pop-up dialog box to display. ah WOW N = Select if you want to play a sound. If you select to play a sound, click the folder to browse to the sound you want the alarm to play. 6 Select if you want Notify to launch a program when notifying you. 7 Select if you want Notify to send the alarm to your pager. Managing Your Mailbox 159 If you select to send the alarm to a pager, you must specify the gateway, service with options, and the pin. For example, skytel/b4.12345. 8 Click OK. Setting Notify Options for Return Status Messages 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Return Status tab. 4 Select the type of item that you want to set notification for. or Select Use Same Setting for All Types to use the same settings for all types of items. 5 Select the following options for items when opened, when accepted, when completed, and when deleted: 5a Select if you want the pop-up dialog box to display. 5b Select if you want to play a sound. If you select to play a sound, click the folder to browse to the sound you want Notify to play. 5c Select if you want Notify to launch a program when notifying you. 6 Click OK. Setting How to Be Notified When Outgoing Messages Change Status 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Return Status tab. 4 Deselect Use Same Settings for All Types. 5 Click the Settings For drop-down list, then click the item type you want to make selections for. 6 Select how you want to be notified for different status changes of that item type. 7 Click OK. If you are sending messages to non-Group Wise systems, remember that those systems must have status tracking capability in order to return the status of your outgoing message to your Group Wise system. Setting How to Be Notified of Items in Your Mailbox 1 Make sure Notify is running. 2 Right-click ® on the Windows taskbar, then click Options. 3 Click the Notify tab. 4 Deselect Use Same Settings for All Types. 5 Click the Settings For drop-down list, then click the item type you want to make selections for. 160 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 6 Select how you want to be notified for different priority levels of that item type. 7 Click OK. Being Notified of Someone Else's Messages Notify must be running for you to receive notification of alarms, incoming items, or a change in status of outgoing items. You can receive notification for another GroupWise user only if he or she has given you appropriate Proxy rights in his or her Access List, and if you have added that user’s name to your Proxy List in GroupWise. See “Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox” on page 171 for more information. You cannot receive notification for someone who is in a different domain than you. 1 In the Main Window, click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Notify tab. 3 Type the name of a user for whom you proxy. 4 Click Add User. 5 Click the user’s name in the Notification List. Security Options 12] xi] Password Notify | Proxy Access | Send Options | Name: Fag ls | ul] Remove User | Notification list: Alecia Mendenh... AMendenhall Devel Harry Wong Hwong.Developme... Jeanie Yacoub JYacoub.Developm... Notify options for Alecia Mendenhall IV Subscribe to alarms IV Subscribe to notification 6 Make sure Subscribe to Notification and Subscribe to Alarms are selected. You are automatically subscribed to alarms and notification for yourself. If you deselect Subscribe to Alarms and Subscribe to Notification for yourself, you no longer receive alarms and notifications. You need to repeat the steps in this topic for your username. 7 Click OK. Managing Your Mailbox 161 Archiving the Items in Your Mailbox Use Archive to save mail or phone messages, appointments, reminder notes, or tasks to a designated database on a local drive. Archiving items saves network space and keeps your Mailbox uncluttered. It also protects items from being automatically deleted. You can view archived items whenever you need to. You can also unarchive any archived item. When you archive an item you have sent, you will not be able to track the status of that item. The system administrator may specify that your items will be archived automatically on a regular basis. When you move an item to a folder, it is not archived. Items in all folders are affected by the Clean Up options you specify in Environment Options, and by any archiving or cleanup options your administrator specifies. This section contains the following topics: + “Archiving an Item in Your Mailbox” on page 162 + “Viewing Archived Items” on page 162 + “Unarchiving Items” on page 162 + “Archiving Items Automatically” on page 163 Archiving an Item in Your Mailbox 1 If you have not previously done so, specify the archive path in File Location in the Environment dialog box. See “Specifying Where Archived Items Are Stored” on page 341. 2 Select the items in your Mailbox you want to archive. 3 Click Actions, then click Move to Archive. When you archive an item you have sent, you cannot track the status of that item. Viewing Archived Items 41 In the Main Window, click File, then click Open Archive. or Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of Group Wise you are running in), then click Archive. Unarchiving Items 1 Click File, then click Open Archive. or Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in), then click Archive. 2 Click the item you want to unarchive, click Actions, then click Move to Archive. 3 Click File, then click Open Archive to close the archive and return to the Main Window. or Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it displays Archive), then click your user folder (your name) to return to the mode of GroupWise you were running previously. 162 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Unarchived messages are returned to the folder from which they were archived. If the folder has been deleted, GroupWise creates a new folder. Archiving Items Automatically 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment, then click the Cleanup tab. General | Views | File Location Cleanup | Default Actions | Signature | Backup Options | m Mail and phone C Auto-delete after: Auto-archive after: | 30 4 days — Appointment, task, and reminder note (* Manual delete and archive C Auto-delete after: C Auto-archive after: 14 = days m Empty trash C Manual (* Automatic after: [7 = days 3 Select Auto-Archive After for the item type you want. 4 Specify the number of days after the item is delivered or completed that you want it to be archived. 5 Click OK. If your system administrator has specified that items are automatically archived on a regular basis, you may not be able to change this option. If you or your system administrator has set up auto-archiving of items in your Mailbox, items in the Checklist folder will also be archived based on the original date you received the item, not based on the due date you assign it. If you have automatic archiving setup, it only archives items to one computer. If you are working on a computer where the automatic archive is not available, the items are not archived to the computer where the archive is not available. Printing Items in Your Mailbox This section contains the following topics: + “Printing GroupWise Items” on page 164 + “Printing Status Information about an Item” on page 164 + “Printing Calendars” on page 164 Managing Your Mailbox 163 Printing GroupWise Items 1 In the Item List in your Mailbox, click or open the item you want to print. 2 Click File, then click Print. 3 Select the items and attachments you want to print. Select Print Attachment with Associated Application to launch the application in which an attached file was created (if that application is available). This may increase printing time but will ensure correct formatting of the file. Printing from GroupWise may save time, but the formatting of the attached file may change. 4 Click Print. If you launch an associated application, you will need to select to print the file once the application is open. When printing is complete, close the application. Printing Status Information about an Item 1 Right-click an item, then click Properties. 5 Mail From: Sophie Jones fe E File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | X close reply + E Forward + 3 -| Ss 4 & | bJ Lee | Mail Properties | Personalize | Mail Envelope Properties (3E29E591.791 : 1: 1600) Subject: News from Payroll Creation Date 1118/2003 4:38:57 PM From: Sophie Jones Created By: siones@Corporate.com Recipients Action Corporate.com Development Provot Delivered askoczylas (Alfons Skoczylas) Opened gsmith (Grace Smith) khuang (Kuo-Chang Huang) mpalu (Mike Palu) smurphy (Samantha Murphy) Opened thu (Tabitha Hu) xdominguez (Xander Dominguez) Opened Post Office Delivered Development Provot 16/2003 4:38:57 PM Options Auto Delete: No Expiration Date: None Notify Recipients: Yes Priority: Standard ReplyRequested: turn Notification: 2 Right-click in the Properties window, then click Print. Printing Calendars Date & Time 118/2003 4:38:57 118/2003 7:52:01 118/2003 5:47:44 118/2003 4:38:57 Route Corporate.com Use Print Calendar to print your schedule including appointments, tasks, and reminder notes in different formats and on various page sizes. For example, you could print a day calendar with all your appointments or a week calendar with all your appointments and tasks. For information about printing your Group Wise calendar, see “Printing Calendar Items” on page 133. 164 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Creating Rules You can automate many GroupWise actions, such as replying when you’re out of the office, deleting items, or sorting items into folders, by using Rules to define a set of conditions and actions to be performed when an item meets those conditions. When you create a rule, you must do the following: + Name the rule. + Select an event. The event is the trigger that starts the rule. + Select the types of items that will be affected by the rule. + Add an action. The action is what you want the rule to do when it is triggered. + Save the rule. + Make sure the rule is enabled. You can specify many more options to limit which items a rule affects. For example, you can apply a rule to only accepted appointments, to items with a certain word in the Subject box, or to items with a high priority. Use Define Conditions to limit your rules further. See “Limiting Items Affected by a Rule” on page 170. This section contains the following topics: + “Actions a Rule Can Perform” on page 165 + “Events That Trigger a Rule” on page 167 + “Creating a Rule” on page 167 + “Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply” on page 168 + “Copying a Rule to Make a New Rule” on page 169 + “Editing a Rule” on page 170 + “Deleting a Rule” on page 170 + “Limiting Items Affected by a Rule” on page 170 + “Running a Rule Manually” on page 170 ¢ “Enabling or Disabling a Rule” on page 171 Actions a Rule Can Perform Action Result Send Mail Sends a prepared mail message to the recipients you specify when the rule conditions are met. For example, if you need to inform your boss each time you receive a monthly report from another group of people, you can have a rule send a message as soon as you receive the report. Forward Forwards items to one or more users when the rule conditions are met. For example, if you are on a core team, you can have a rule forward meeting minutes to extended team members. Managing Your Mailbox 165 Action Delegate Reply Accept Delete/Decline Empty Item Move to Folder Link to Folder Mark as Private Mark as Read Archive Mark as Unread Stop Rule Processing Result Delegates an appointment, reminder note, or task to another user when the rule conditions are met. For example, if someone is covering for you while you're away from the office, your rule can delegate appointments, tasks, or reminder notes to that person. Sends a prepared reply to the sender when the rule conditions are met. For example, if you need to be out of the office for several days, your rule could send a reply to incoming items indicating when you'll be back. You can also use Define Conditions to prevent replies going to mail list servers and other large groups. Accepts an appointment, reminder note, or task when the rule conditions are met. For example, your rule could accept all appointments from a specific individual. Deletes or declines any item when the rule conditions are met. For example, your rule could decline any appointment scheduled for a certain day of the week if you are always unavailable for meetings on that day. Deletes items from the Trash when the rule conditions are met. For example, your rule could empty items received from a company that routinely sends you junk mail. Moves items to a folder when the rule conditions are met. For example, you may want all items with certain words in the Subject box moved to a common folder. Links items to one or more folders when the rule conditions are met. Linking an item to a folder lets you view the item from more than one folder. For example, if you have an item that relates to Marketing and Personnel, you can place it in the Marketing folder, then link it to the Personnel folder. You can then open the item from either folder. Marks all items matching the rule conditions as private. When an item is marked private, you can restrict your proxies from accessing the item. For example, your rule could mark Private all items from your family members. Marks all items matching the rule conditions as if they have been read. For example, if you are skimming a reply thread in a shared folder and don’t want to follow the thread anymore, your rule could mark all the items in the thread as if they had been read so they wouldn't sort at the top of the Item List. Archives items when the rule conditions are met. For example, your rule could archive all items regarding a certain subject. Archive is not available to use as an action when the triggering event is New Item or Filed Item. Marks all items matching the rule conditions as if they have not been read. For example, you could create a user-activated rule to mark as unread all items you have opened from your manager to remind yourself to re-read or act on them. Stops other rules from acting on items that meet the rule conditions. Rules are executed in the order they are listed in the Rules dialog box. If there are other rules that would normally affect these items, this rule action will prevent the other rules from executing. 166 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Events That Trigger a Rule Event New Item Filed Item Open Folder Close Folder Startup Exit User Activated Creating a Rule Result The rule is triggered when a new item is placed in your GroupWise Mailbox. Clicking Received lets only incoming items trigger the rule. Clicking Sent lets only items you send trigger the rule. Clicking Posted triggers the rule each time you create a posted appointment, reminder note, or task. Clicking Draft lets only items marked as unfinished, or draft, trigger the rule. The rule is triggered when an item is placed in a specific folder. If you do not specify a folder, the rule is triggered when an item is moved to any folder. The rule is triggered when you open a specific folder. If you do not specify a folder, the rule is triggered when you open any folder. The rule is triggered when you close a specific folder. If you do not specify a folder, the rule is triggered when you close any folder. The rule is triggered when you start GroupWise. The rule is triggered when you exit GroupWise. The rule can only be triggered manually by selecting the rule in the Rules dialog box, then clicking Run. For example, instead of a rule always moving certain items into a folder, you might want the items to accumulate in your Mailbox until you're ready for them to be moved all at once. To trigger a rule manually, you must first select the items or folders the rule will affect in your Mailbox or Calendar view. 1 Click Tools, click Rules, then click New. New Rule Rule name: | When event is a Newltem $| Anditems are: V Received M Sent I~ Posted IM Draft If conditions are [optional] Item types: Define Conditions... | T Mail ct on all items T Appointment [| Task T Reminder note F Phone message Appointment conflict exists: [Does not matter (Yes or No] y] Then actions are Add Action v | EqitActor 2 Type a name in the Rule Name box. 3 Click the When Event Is pop-up list, then click an event to trigger the rule. Managing Your Mailbox 167 4 If you clicked New Item, Startup, Exit, or User Activated, click one or more sources for the item. For example, click Received and Posted. or If you clicked Filed Item, Open Folder, or Close Folder, click the folder icon, click a folder, then click OK to display the folder name. 5 Click one or more types of items you want the rule to act on in the Item Types list. If you want to further restrict the items affected by the rule, click Define Conditions, click the appropriate options, then click OK. For more information, see “Limiting Items Affected by a Rule” on page 170. 6 Click Add Action, then click the action you want the rule to perform. Some actions such as Send Mail and Reply require you to fill in additional information. 7 Click Save. For a rule to function, it must be enabled. See “Enabling or Disabling a Rule” on page 171. Creating a Vacation Rule or Auto Reply 4 Click Tools, click Rules, then click New. 2 Type a name in the Rule Name box, such as Vacation Rule. 3 Click the When Event Is pop-up list, then click New Item. 4 Next to And Items Are, select Received. Make sure no other item source is selected. 5 Do not make any selections under Item Types. 6 Use Define Conditions to add specific information to your rule. The following are examples of using Define Conditions. + Ifyou want to set up the dates during which the rule is in effect. Click Define Conditions, click Delivered in the first drop-down list, click On or After Date in the second drop- down list, then in the date field, select the date you are leaving on vacation. Click the End pop-up list, then click And. On the new line, click Delivered in the first drop-down list, click On or Before Date in the second drop-down list, in the date field, select the date you are returning from vacation, then click OK. + Ifyou want to make sure you reply only to items that are sent specifically to you (and not to list servers or newsgroups). Click Define Conditions, if you have already specified information in this dialog box, click the End pop-up list, then click And. On the new line, click To in the first drop-down list, click [ ] Contains in the second drop-down list, then in the next field, type your name as it displays in the To field of a mail message. + Ifyou want to make sure that you do not reply to items from yourself (possible through delayed delivery, proxies, and so forth). Click Define Conditions, if you have already specified information in this dialog box, click the End pop-up list, then click And. On the new line, click From in the first pop-up list, click [x] Does Not Contain in the second drop-down list, in the next field, type your name as it displays in the From field of a mail message, then click OK. + Ifyou want to reply to internal items only. Click Define Conditions, if you have already specified information in this dialog box, click the End pop-up list, then click And. On the new line, click From in the first drop-down list, click [x] Does Not Contain in the second drop-down list, in the next field, type *@*, then click OK. 168 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 7 9 10 Under Then Actions Are, click Add Action, then click Reply. The Reply dialog box is displayed, showing Reply to Sender selected (you cannot select Reply to All). If you want your reply to include the sender's original message, select Include Message Received From Sender. Click OK. Type a message, for example: I will be out of the office from September 3-September 10. If you need assistance during this time, please contact Martha Robbins at extension 1234. Click OK. Click Save, verify that the rule has a check mark next to it, indicating that it is enabled, then click Close. Rules that trigger a reply (such as this vacation rule) keep a record of who a reply has been sent to, and make sure that a reply is sent only once to that user. Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to a Private Mail Account 1 oon GO oT A WO DN =a = = N = © Copying a Rule to 1 a Ah WO N Click Tools > Rules, then click New. Type a name in the Rule Name box, such as Forward Rule. Click the When Event Is pop-up list, then click New Item. Next to And Items Are, select Received. Make sure no other item source is selected. Select Mail under Item Types. Click Add Action, then select Forward. Type the address that you want the items forwarded to in the To field. Type a subject you want to use for forwarded items, for example frwd:. (Optional) Type a name of a filter to use for forwarded items. (Optional) Type a message for all forwarded items. Click OK. Click Save, verify that the rule has a check mark next to it indicating that it is enabled, then click Close. Make a New Rule Click Tools, then click Rules. Click the rule you want to copy, then click Copy. Type the name of the new rule. Make changes to the rule. Click Save. Managing Your Mailbox 169 Editing a Rule Deleting a Rule 1 Click Tools, then click Rules. 2 Click the rule you want to edit, then click Edit. 3 Make changes to the rule. 4 Click Save. 4 Click Tools, then click Rules. 2 Click the rule you want to delete, click Delete, then click Yes. Limiting Items Affected by a Rule Use Define Conditions to further limit the items affected by a rule. 1 In the Rules dialog box, click Define Conditions. 2 Click the first drop-down list, then click a field. To learn about what the fields represent, see “Understanding Filter and Rule Fields” on page 193. Click the operator drop-down list, then click an operator. To learn how to use operators, see “Using Filter and Rule Operators” on page 192. Type the criteria for the filter. or If provided, click the drop-down list, then click existing criteria. If you type criteria, such as a person's name or a subject, you can include wildcard characters such as an asterisk (*) or a question mark (?). Text you type is not case-sensitive. To learn more about wildcard characters and switches, see “Using Filter and Rule Wildcard Characters and Switches” on page 191. Click the last drop-down list, then click End. or Click the last drop-down list, then click And or Or to further limit the items affected by the rule. Running a Rule Manually 1 Click the items or folders that you want affected by the rule. 2 Click Tools, then click Rules. 3 Click the rule you want to run manually. 4 Click Run, then click Close. The rule actions occur after you close the Rules dialog box. 170 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Enabling or Disabling a Rule A rule must be enabled before it can be triggered. When a rule is enabled it is marked with a check. When you disable a rule, the rule cannot be triggered. However, the rule is still listed in the Rules dialog box so you can enable it when you need it again. 1 Click Tools, then click Rules. Rules E E3 Rules are executed in the order they appear in the list. Drag a Close rule to a different position to change the order. _ Rule list: New... _ Rule Name — d Move status 1 New Item O Mark Private New Item Copy... Delegate New Item 2 Click the rule you want to enable or disable. 3 Click Enable or Disable. An enabled rule has a check mark in the box. Giving Other People Access to Your Mailbox Use Proxy to manage another user's Mailbox and Calendar. Proxy lets you perform various actions, such as reading, accepting, and declining items on behalf of another user, within the restrictions the other user sets. IMPORTANT: You can proxy for a user in a different post office or domain, as long as that person is in the same GroupWise system. You cannot proxy for a user in a different GroupWise system. This section contains the following topics: + “Receiving Proxy Rights” on page 171 + “Assigning Proxy Rights to Another User” on page 172 + “Adding and Removing Proxy Names and Rights in Your Access List” on page 172 + “Managing Someone Else's Mailbox or Calendar” on page 173 + “Adding and Removing Users in Your Proxy List” on page 174 + “Marking an Item Private” on page 174 Receiving Proxy Rights Two steps must be completed before you can act as someone's proxy. First, the person for whom you plan to act as proxy must grant you rights in the Access List in Options. Second, you must add that user's name to your Proxy List so you can access his or her Mailbox or Calendar. Managing Your Mailbox 171 When these two steps are complete, you can open your Proxy List and click the name of the person you're proxying for whenever you need to manage his or her Mailbox or Calendar. You can also manage the schedules of users and resources for whom you have proxy rights with the Multi-User Calendar view. Assigning Proxy Rights to Another User Use the Access List in Security Options to give other users rights to proxy for you. You can assign each user different rights to your calendaring and messaging information. If you want to let users view specific information about your appointments when they do a Busy Search on your Calendar, give them Read access for appointments. The following table describes the rights you can grant to users: This right Read Write Subscribe to my alarms Subscribe to my notifications Modify options/rules/ folders Read items marked Private Lets your proxy do this Read items you receive. Proxies cannot see your Contacts folder with this or any other proxy right. Create and send items in your name, including applying your signature (if you have one defined). Assign categories to items, change the subject of items, and perform checklist options on items. Receive the same alarms you receive. Receiving alarms is supported only if the proxy is on the same post office you are. Receive notification when you receive items. Receiving notifications is supported only if the proxy is on the same post office you are. Change the options in your Mailbox. The proxy can edit any of your Options settings, including the access given to other users. If the proxy also has Mail rights, he or she can create or modify rules and folders. This right allows a proxy to add, delete, and modify categories. Read the items you marked Private. If you don't give a proxy Private rights, all items marked Private in your Mailbox are hidden from that proxy. Adding and Removing Proxy Names and Rights in Your Access List 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Proxy Access tab. 3 To add a user to the list, type the name in the Name box, then when the full name appears, click Add User. 4 Click a user in the Access List. 172 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Security Options E Ea Password | Notify Proxy Access | Send Options | Name: Add User | El Remove User | a Access list: Name Address | Kuo-Chang Hua... KHuang.Developme... Lori Tanaka LTanaka.Developm... Molly Jones MJones.Developme... y Access rights for Molly Jones y Mail/phone: M Read I write Appointments: M Read [ Write Reminder notes: M Read [ Write Tasks: FT Read P Write IV Modify options/rules/folders T~ Read items marked private 5 Select the rights you want to give to the user. 6 Repeat Steps 4-5 to assign rights to each user in the Access List. You can select All User Access in the Access List and assign rights to all users in the Address Book. For example, if you want all users to have rights to read your mail, you would assign Read rights to All User Access. 7 To delete a user from the Access List, click the user, then click Remove User. 8 Click OK. Managing Someone Else's Mailbox or Calendar Before you can act as a proxy for someone, that person must give you proxy rights in his or her Access List in Options. The amount of access you have depends on the rights you have been given. 1 If you haven't already done so, add the username of the person to your Proxy List. See “Adding and Removing Users in Your Proxy List” on page 174. 2 In the Main Window or Calendar, click File, then click Proxy. or Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of Group Wise you are running in). 3 Click the name of the person whose Mailbox you want to access. 4 When you have finished your work in the other person's Mailbox, click the folder list header drop-down list, then click your own name to return to your Mailbox. You can work with several Mailboxes open at one time by opening a new Main Window for each Mailbox (click Window, click New Main Window, then switch to the Mailbox you want.) You can tell the Mailboxes apart by looking for the Mailbox owner's name, which appears as the root folder label for each Mailbox. If you have the appropriate Proxy rights, you can view the schedules of multiple users or resources side-by-side. See “Viewing the Calendars of Multiple Users or Resources” on page 131. Managing Your Mailbox 173 Adding and Removing Users in Your Proxy List Before you can act as a proxy for someone, that person must give you proxy rights in his or her Access List in Options, and you must add that person’s name to your Proxy List. The amount of access you have depends on the rights you have been given. 1 In the Main Window or Calendar, click File, then click Proxy. or Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in), then click Proxy. 2 To remove a user, click the name, then click Remove. 3 To add a user, type the name in the Name field, then click OK. The user's Mailbox is opened. The name of the person for whom you are acting as proxy is displayed at the top of the Folder List. If the user has not yet given you proxy rights in his or her Access List, the name is added to the Proxy List but the user's Mailbox is not opened. 4 To return to your own Mailbox, click the folder list header drop-down list, then click your name. You can work with several Mailboxes open at one time. (Click Window, click New Main Window, then switch to the Mailbox you want.) You can tell the Mailboxes apart by looking for the Mailbox owner's name, which appears as the root folder label for each Mailbox. Removing a user from your Proxy List does not remove your rights to act as proxy for that user. The user whose Mailbox you access must change your rights in his or her Access List. Marking an Item Private You can limit a proxy's access to individual items in your Mailbox or Calendar by marking items Private. When you mark an item Private, you prevent unauthorized proxies from opening it. Proxies cannot access items marked Private unless you give them those rights in your Access List. If you mark an item Private when you send it, neither your proxies nor the recipient's proxies can open the item without rights. If you mark an item Private when you receive it, it cannot be read by your unauthorized proxies, but it can be read by the sender's proxies. Appointments marked Private display in Busy Search according to the status you selected when you accepted the appointment. 1 In an open item, click Actions, then click Mark Private. or In your Calendar, click an item in the Appointments, Reminder Notes, or Tasks List, click Actions, then click Mark Private. Saving Items in Your Mailbox This section contains the following topics: + “Saving an Item to Disk or to a GroupWise Library” on page 175 + “Saving Status Information” on page 175 + “Saving an Unfinished Item” on page 176 174 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Saving an Item to Disk or to a GroupWise Library 1 In your Mailbox or Calendar, click the item you want to save, click File, then click Save As. Save Fa [x | ltems to save: Save + Attachment: viewhlp.chm Close | Save to Di ave t SK Save to GroupWise Librar Current directory: [c: \Novell\Groupwise Browse... | IV Report file name conflicts 2 Ctrl+click the item and attachments you want to save. 3 Select to save the item to disk or to a GroupWise Library. 4 Type a filename for the item in the Save File As text box. or Type a subject name in the Subject box. 5 To save the item in a different directory than is shown in the Current Directory text box, click Browse, then select the new directory. or To save the item in a different GroupWise Library, click the drop-down list, then select a library name. 6 Ifyou are saving to disk, select Report Filename Conflicts to be prompted before replacing a file with the same name. 7 Ifyou are saving to a GroupWise Library, make sure Set Properties Using Default Values is selected unless you want to specify document properties at this time. 8 Click Save, then click Close. Saved items remain in your Mailbox and Calendar as well as being copied to the location you specify. Items saved to disk are saved in WordPerfect format with a .doc extension so that they can also be opened in Word. Attachments are saved in their original format. Saving Status Information 1 Right-click an item, then click Properties. Managing Your Mailbox 175 2 Click File, then click Save As. GroupWise gives the item a temporary filename. You can change the filename and default folder to save the file. 3 Click Save. Saving an Unfinished Item 1 In an open item click File, then click Save Draft. 2 Click the folder you want to save the item to, then click OK. The draft message is placed in the folder you chose in Step 2. The default folder for unfinished messages is the Work In Progress folder [4. Owning Resources Resources are items that can be scheduled for meetings or other uses. Resources can include rooms, overhead projectors, cars, and more. The system administrator defines a resource by giving it an identifying name and assigning it to a user. Resources can be included in a busy search, just as users can. Resource IDs are entered in the To box. A user assigned to manage a resource is the owner of that resource. The owner of a resource is responsible to accept and decline appointments for the resource. In order to do so, the owner must have full proxy rights to the resource. As a resource owner, you can select to receive notification of appointments for the resource. You can also create a rule to automatically accept or decline appointments for a resource. To do so, proxy to the resource, then create a rule to accept all appointments if no appointment conflict exists. See “Creating Rules” on page 165 for information on creating and enabling rules. This section contains the following items: + “Accepting and Declining Resource Requests” on page 176 + “Receiving Notification for Another User or Resource” on page 177 + “Creating a Rule for a Resource” on page 177 Accepting and Declining Resource Requests You can accept or decline requests for a resource only if you are the owner and have been granted Read and Write rights. 41 In the Main Window or Calendar, click File, then click Proxy. or Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; probably displays Online or Caching to indicate what mode of GroupWise you are running in). 2 Click the resource you own. If the resource you own isn't listed in the Proxy pop-up list, click Proxy, type the name of the resource you own in the Name box, then click OK. 3 Double-click the item you need to accept or decline. 4 Click Accept or Decline on the toolbar. 176 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Receiving Notification for Another User or Resource 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Notify tab. 3 Click the name of a user for whom you are a proxy or the name of the resource you own. If the user or resource is not listed in the Notification list, type the name, is DS Add User. You can select the name from the Address Selector dialog box by clicking E i 4 Make sure Subscribe to Alarms and Subscribe to Notification are selected. You are automatically subscribed to alarms and notification for yourself. If you deselect Subscribe to Alarms and Subscribe to Notification for yourself, you will no longer receive alarms and notifications. You will need to repeat the steps in this topic for your username. 5 Click OK. Notify must be open or minimized in order to receive notification or alarms. For more information, see “Running Notify” on page 157. Creating a Rule for a Resource As the owner of a resource, you have full Proxy rights to that resource, including the ability to create rules for it. The following steps show you how to create a rule that accepts all requests for an available resource. This is an example of one rule that is useful for a resource. You can create other rules that perform different actions. For example, you might create a rule that declines requests for a resource that is already scheduled. 1 Click the folder list header drop-down list (above the Folder List; it probably displays Online or Caching). or Click File, then click Proxy. 2 Click the resource you own. If the resource you own isn't listed in the Proxy dialog box, type the name of the resource you own in the Name box, then click OK. Click Tools, click Rules, then click New. Type a name for the rule. Click Appointment. Make sure the other item types are deselected. Click the Appointment Conflict Exists drop-down list, then click No. NO 0 A W Click Add Action, click Accept, type a comment if desired, then click OK. Steps 6 and 7 instruct the rule to accept the appointment for the resource only if the resource is available. 8 Click Save, then click Close. Managing Your Mailbox 177 Opening and Emptying the Trash All deleted mail and phone messages, appointments, tasks, documents, and reminder notes are stored in the Trash. Items in the Trash can be viewed, opened, or returned to your Mailbox until the Trash is emptied. (Emptying the Trash removes items in the Trash from the system.) You can empty your entire Trash, or empty only selected items. Items in the Trash are emptied according to the days entered in the Cleanup tab in Environment Options, or you can empty the Trash manually. The system administrator can specify that your Trash is emptied automatically on a regular basis. This section contains the following topics: + “Opening Your Trash” on page 178 + “Undeleting an Item in the Trash” on page 178 + “Saving an Item That Is in Your Trash” on page 178 + “Emptying the Trash” on page 178 + “Emptying Selected Items from the Trash” on page 179 + “Emptying the Trash Automatically” on page 179 Opening Your Trash 4 In your Folder List, click Y. You can open, save, and view information on items in the Trash. You can also permanently remove items or return them to the Mailbox. Right-click an item in the Trash to see more options. Undeleting an Item in the Trash 4 In your Folder List, click Y. 2 Select the items you want to undelete. 3 Click Edit, then click Undelete. The undeleted item is placed in the folder from which it was originally deleted. If the original folder no longer exists, the item is placed in your Mailbox. You can also restore an item by dragging it from the Trash folder to any other folder. Saving an Item That Is in Your Trash You can save items that are in the Trash the same way you would save any other item. See “Saving an Item to Disk or to a GroupWise Library” on page 175 for more information. Emptying the Trash 1 Right-click ©, then click Empty Trash. 178 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Emptying Selected Items from the Trash 4 In your Folder List, click Y. 2 Select one or more items. 3 Click Edit, click Delete, then click Yes. Emptying the Trash Automatically 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment, then click the Cleanup tab. General | Views | File Location Cleanup | Default Actions | Signature | Backup Options | m Mail and phone [ON © Auto-delete after: © Auto-archive after: Appointment, task, and reminder note ( Manual delete and archive C Auto-delete after: 14 = days C Auto-archive after: y days m Empty trash C Manual (* Automatic after: FF H days 3 Select the Automatic After button in the Empty Trash group box, then specify the number of days between automatic deletions. 4 Click OK. If your system administrator has specified that your Trash is automatically emptied on a regular basis, you might not be able to change this option. Deleting Items from Your Mailbox Use Delete to remove selected items from your Mailbox. You can also use Delete to retract items you have sent. You can retract mail and phone messages if the recipients have not read them or if they have not been sent to the Internet. You can retract appointments, reminder notes, and tasks at any time. Ifyou receive junk mail that requires frequent manual deletion, you might want to set up Junk Mail Handling. See “Handling Unwanted Mail” on page 92 for more information. This section contains the following topics: + “Deleting an Item from Your Mailbox” on page 180 + “Deleting and Emptying Items from Your Mailbox” on page 180 Managing Your Mailbox 179 Deleting an Item from Your Mailbox 1 In the Main Window, select one or more items, then press the Delete key. 2 Ifyou delete a sent item, the Delete Item dialog box displays. Select the appropriate Delete From option, then click OK. If you delete a document reference from your Mailbox, only the reference is deleted. The document remains in the library. Deleted items are moved to your Trash and remain there until the Trash is emptied. Deleting and Emptying Items from Your Mailbox 1 In the Main Window, select one or more items, click Edit, then click Delete and Empty. Deleted items are not moved to your Trash if you select this option; they are unrecoverable. Backing Up Your Mailbox Your system administrator typically backs up your network mailbox on a regular basis. You can back up your local mailbox if you want to have an additional copy of your mailbox, or if you want to back up information that is no longer in your network mailbox. If the system administrator has created a restore area and has backed up the entire GroupWise system, or if you have backed up your local mailbox in Remote or Caching mode, you can open a backup copy of your mailbox to view and restore items. You need Read and Write access to the restore area if it is on the network. This section contains the following topics: + “Backing Up Your Mailbox” on page 180 + “Restoring Items from Backup” on page 181 Backing Up Your Mailbox 1 To manually back up your local mailbox in Remote or Caching mode, click Tools, then click Backup Mailbox. 2 Specify the location for the backup, if prompted, then click OK. You can also set up an automatic backup: 1 In Remote or Caching mode, click Tools, click Options, then click double-click Environment. 2 Click the Backup Options tab, then select Backup Remote Mailbox. 3 Specify the location for the backup. The default location is c:\novell\groupwise\backup. 4 Specify how often you want to back up your mailbox. 5 If you want, select Do Not Prompt Before Performing Backup. 180 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Restoring Items from Backup 1 Click File, then click Open Backup. GroupWise Restore Path x| Restore from: | C1 Basswood | Cancel | 2 Type the full path or browse to the path of the backed-up mailbox, then type your password if required. 3 Select the item you want to restore, click Actions, then click Restore. You cannot restore documents through this method. For more information, see “Replacing a Document with a File from Backup” on page 336. 4 To exit your backed-up mailbox, click File, then click Open Backup. Finding Items Use Find to look for items that match the criteria you specify. Use the Find by Example tab to find items that match an example you specify in a field. Find by Example is especially helpful for finding documents. You can save the results in a Find folder, where you can retrieve them any time you open the folder. Information you specify on the Find tab will not appear on the Find by Example tab and vice versa. This section contains the following topics: + “Finding an Item By Example” on page 182 ¢ “Finding an Item Using Search Criteria” on page 182 + “Saving the Results of a Find” on page 184 + “Finding a Document and Creating a Reference to It in Your Mailbox” on page 185 ¢ “Finding an Item Using Advanced Find” on page 185 + “Narrowing an Advanced Find Using Filter Operators” on page 186 Managing Your Mailbox 181 Finding an Item By Example 4 Click a| on the toolbar, then click the Find By Example tab. Find [2 Lx] Find Find by Example | me CEE -] M Received [ Sent M Posted T Draft Erom: fo E To, CC: — y y y yl B Subject: D Message: a 2 In the Item Type drop-down list, click the type of item you want to search for. 3 If you selected Document in Step 2, click the library you want to search in the Library drop- down list. 4 In each field, specify the information you want to look for. 5 Click OK to begin the Find. Finding an Item Using Search Criteria This section contains the following topics: ¢ “Finding an Item Using Search Criteria” on page 182 + “Narrowing a Find” on page 183 Finding an Item Using Search Criteria 4 Click a| on the toolbar. 182 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Narrowing a Find A a Find | Find by Example | Full Text ~A oe From/Author + | — ltem type: FT Mail T Task F Note — ltem source: M Received l Sent —Date range: Appointment Phone message Document Posted T Draft M Created or delivered between: 1/20/2002 and |1/20/200: Advanced Find... Reset M Find only official document versions _Aebvanced Find. | ea | Look in: Sophie Jones 6 Mailbox [5] M di Sent Items [1] DE] Calendar 3) Contacts O [El Documents M Checklist oO A Work In Progress Cabinet Trash H-A Y All Libraries +) + @ Caching © Online data 2 To search for specific text, select Full Text or Subject from the drop-down list, then type what you are looking for in the text box. 3 To search for a name, select From/Author or To/CC from the drop-down list, then type the name in the text box. 4 Select each item type you are looking for, then select each item source you are looking for. 5 To specify a date range, select the Created Or Delivered Between check box, then type or select the dates. 6 In the Look In list box, click the folders and/or libraries you want to search in. You might need to click the plus sign (+) next to your user folder to expand the folder structure. 7 Click OK to begin the Find. Use Advanced Find to make your search more specific. For example, you might want to search for messages from two or three users at once. Select the Find Only Official Document Versions check box to locate only the official document version of a document with multiple versions. Your folders and library are marked for search by default with a check in the box. To speed up your search, unmark any folders you don't want to search. The following list explains how to narrow your search using Find. Managing Your Mailbox 183 In the first text box of the Find dialog box, type the uncommon words you've noticed in the item. If you search using common words, the results of your search will likely be too large to be very helpful. To increase the speed of your search, deselect the folders and/or libraries you know do not contain the item you are looking for. For example, if you know your document is not in Library C, click the plus (+) sign next to All Libraries in the Look In box, then click Library C to deselect it. If you are searching for more than one word or want to search for words in a particular field of an item (like the Subject field), click Advanced Find to set up your search properly. The words you type can be combined with operators to further narrow the search. If you cannot find the document or message, check your search criteria for misspelled words. Also, check the syntax of your search to make sure you are telling Find to search for exactly what you want. Saving the Results of a Find 184 4 Click a| on the toolbar. 2 Perform a Find. 3 In the GroupWise Find Results dialog box, click File, then click Save As Folder. Create Find Results Folder J xi Name the new folder and set its position in the folder list. Name: Find Results Folde Description: Find items where Item Type is Mail and From contains ‘Tabitha Hu! and Item Source is Received Position: Sent Items [1] E] Calendar 3) Contacts Down | &-[] Documents (4 Checklist Right [4 ‘Work In Progress -E Cabinet Left | (3 [Find Results Falda] Technology Ideas [5 a Hashar di aie Maatina zi 4 Type aname for the folder, type a description for the folder, click Up, Down, Right, or Left to place your folder where you want it to display in your Folder List, then click Finish. To see your Find results at any time, select the folder. For more information about Find Results folders, see “Understanding Find Results Folders” on page 142. You can update a Find folder each time you open it. Make sure Find New Matching Items Each Time the Folder Is Opened is selected. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Finding a Document and Creating a Reference to It in Your Mailbox 1 og AO N Click File, click New, then click Document Reference. Click Find. On the Find by Example tab, click Document from the Item Type drop-down list. Specify the information about the document you want to search for. Click OK to begin the Find. In the GroupWise Find Results dialog box, click the document for which you want to create a document reference, then click OK. The Group Wise Find Results dialog box displays only the documents to which you have at least View rights. GroupWise creates a document reference in the current folder. Finding an Item Using Advanced Find 1 2 3 4 Click a| on the toolbar. Click Advanced Find. Select a field in the first drop-down list, click an operator, then type or select a condition. Advanced Find |?) x] Filter Include entries where … o All Fields... Click the last drop-down list, click And, Or, Insert Row, or New Group, add more criteria for your filter, click End from the last drop-down list, then click OK. Insert Row makes your filter more specific. Additional rows narrow your search criteria even further. For example, to search for items from John Smith that were carbon-copied to Mary Jones, use the first row to search for John Smith and the second row to search for Mary Jones. New Group creates a new row for a filter whose first group of rows contains several parameters for one column. For example, to create a filter to display all opened items from John Smith and Mary Jones, click From in the first drop-down list, click the = Matches operator, type John Smith as the parameter, then click Or in the last drop-down list. A second row appears. Click From in the first drop-down list, click the = Matches operator, type Mary Jones as the parameter, then click New Group. Click Item Status in the first drop-down list, click the [ ] Includes operator, click Opened in the third box, then click OK. Delete Row removes a row from your filter definition. You cannot delete a one-row filter. Click OK when your filter is complete. Find searches all folders and libraries selected in the Look In box. To narrow your Find, deselect unnecessary folders and libraries. Managing Your Mailbox 185 Narrowing an Advanced Find Using Filter Operators When you click Advanced F'sghe Advanced Find dialog box appears. Select the operator from the Operator drop-down list 11. The list of available operators changes depending on the selection you make. Some operators, such as [ ], have two or more distinct names. Although the name may change, the purpose of the operator remains the same. For example, the [ ] operator in the table below finds all items containing John in the From box or including a Sound file in the Attachment List. Click All Fields to see a list of all available fields, including user-defined fields. Operator [] Contains -> Begins With -> Within <- Previous = Matches, Equal To, Equal To Field, On ! Does Not Include, Not Equal To, Not Equal To Field < Before,Less Than, Less Than Field <= On or Before, Less Than or Equal To, Less Than or Equal To Field > After, Greater Than, Greater Than Field >= On or After, Greater Than or Equal To, Greater Than or Equal To Field Finding Text in Items Include All items containing the condition All items whose first text begins with the condition All items falling within a range starting from a certain day forward All items falling within a range previous to a certain day All items that equal the condition All items except the condition All items less than the condition All items less than or equal to the condition All items greater than the condition All items greater than or equal to the condition 1 In an open item, click Edit, then click Find Text. Find F Match whole word only I Match case Find what: [procedure Cancel | Examples From[ ]John, Attachment List[ ]JSound Author ->Karen Created->5 Day (created within 5 days of today) Created <-5 Day (created 5 days or fewer previous to today) Cc=Jill, Document Creator=JFerguson, Retrieved Date=Tomorrow Item Status!Opened, Number Accepted!5 Retrieved Date<Today, Document Number<1000 Retrieved Date<=Yesterday, Total Recipients<=10 Retrieved Date>This Week, Version Number>4.0 Retrieved Date>=This Month, Number Replied>=7 2 Type the text you want to search for in the Find What box. 186 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 Click Find Next to search for the text you typed. You can also search for text in the Quick Viewer. Filtering Items Basic Filtering If your Mailbox or Calendar contains many items, you might have a difficult time finding just one of them. Filter lets you display items according to specific criteria. For example, a filter can display only items that have a certain word in the subject. You can also use a filter to hide items that you want to get out of your way. Filter does not actually move or delete items; it displays certain items based on the criteria you specify. When you clear the filter, all the items reappear. Filters you create affect all folders. The basic Filter dialog box lets you filter on the following information: From, To, CC, Subject, Message, and Category. If you want to filter on additional fields, click Advanced Filter. Limiting an Advanced Filter You may want to limit an advanced filter by specifying additional criteria. For more information, see “Narrowing Your Filter” on page 190. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a New Filter” on page 187 + “Creating a New Filter Using Advanced Filter” on page 189 + “Selecting a Filter” on page 190 + “Clearing a Filter” on page 190 + “Deleting a Filter” on page 190 + “Narrowing Your Filter” on page 190 + “Using Filter and Rule Wildcard Characters and Switches” on page 191 + “Using Filter and Rule Operators” on page 192 + “Understanding Filter and Rule Fields” on page 193 Creating a New Filter 4 Click a folder (such as Mailbox, Trash, or a folder you have created). Filters affect all folders. By clicking a folder, you can see the filter results immediately. or Click the Appointments, Reminder Notes, or Tasks List in a calendar view. The filter applies to all lists in the calendar view. For example, if you click the Reminder Notes List, the Appointments and Tasks Lists are also affected by the filter. 2 In the upper-right corner of the Main Window or calendar view, double-click Y. Managing Your Mailbox 187 To, 06 a | Subject: Open... | IE Save... | Advanced Filter... | a Reset | Message: 3 In most folders, the following fields display. Fill in one or more of the following fields: + From: To display items from a specific person, type a name in the From field. Click to select a name from a list. + To, CC: To display items to a specific person, type a name in the To, CC field. Click to select a name from a list. + Subject: To display items containing specific text in the subject, type text in the Subject field. Text you type is not case sensitive. + Message: To display items containing specific text in the message, type text in the Message field. Text you type is not case sensitive. + Category: To display items that have been assigned a category, click =, then select a category name. If you are creating a filter in the Contacts folder, the Filter Contacts dialog box fields include Display Name, E-Mail Address, Last Name, Organization, Department, and Category. Type or select information in one or more fields to filter for contacts. F ane FN Resource | Organization E Cancel | Display Name: | JE Open... | Email Address: | Save... | Last Name: = A Advanced Filter... | Rs Reset | Organization: Department: Category: To specify other information you want to filter on, click Advanced Filter. For more information, see “Creating a New Filter Using Advanced Filter” on page 189. 4 Click OK. The filter icon changes to @ indicating that a filter is on. 5 To save the filter for future use, click ®, click Filter, click Save, type a name, then click OK. 188 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Creating a New Filter Using Advanced Filter 1 10 Click a folder (such as Mailbox, Trash, or a folder you have created). Filters affect all folders. By clicking a folder, you can see the filter results immediately. or Click the Appointments, Reminder Notes, or Tasks List in a calendar view. The filter applies to all lists in the calendar view. For example, if you click the Reminder Notes List, the Appointments and Tasks Lists are also affected by the filter. In the upper right corner of the Main Window or calendar view, double-click Y, Click Advanced Filter. In the first drop-down list, click the field you want to filter. For example, click From if you want to display items from a specific person. To find out what the fields represent, see “Understanding Filter and Rule Fields” on page 193. Click the operator drop-down list E] then click an operator. To find out more about the operators, see “Using Filter and Rule Operators” on page 192. Type the criteria for the filter. or If provided, click the drop-down list, then click existing criteria. Ifyou type criteria, such as a person's name or a subject, you can include wildcard characters such as an asterisk (*) or a question mark (?). Text you type is not case sensitive. To find out more about wildcard characters and switches, see “Using Filter and Rule Wildcard Characters and Switches” on page 191. Click the last drop-down list, then click End. or Click the last drop-down list, then click And or Or to narrow your filter by adding more filter criteria. Read the text in the Filter dialog box beginning with "Include entries where..." as you create your filter. This summarizes how your filter will work. Click OK, then click OK. The filter icon changes to ® indicating that a filter is on. To save the filter for future use, click ®, click Filter, click Save, type a name, then click OK. Save Filter BEI Save As: Description: [Manager Messages From is eanie pacoub' a [Y Put on menu H Name: Description: L Managing Your Mailbox 189 Selecting a Filter 1 In the upper-right corner of your Mailbox or Calendar view, click 0, then click the filter. You can select one of the predefined filters to filter for received items, sent items, posted items, or draft items. If you have a long list of filters, click O), click More, then click the filter. To see a description of a filter before you select it, double-click %, click Open, then click the filter. Click OK after clicking the filter you want. Clearing a Filter 4 In the upper-right corner of the Main Window or calendar view, click ®, then click Clear Filter. After you've cleared a filter, the icon in the upper-right corner of the Main Window changes back to @. If the filter is saved, you can use it again by clicking ®, then clicking the filter. Deleting a Filter 4 In the upper-right corner of the Main Window or Calendar, double-click Y. 2 Click Open. 3 Click the filter you want to delete, then click Delete. 4 Click OK, then click OK. Narrowing Your Filter And You may want to limit an advanced filter by specifying additional criteria. Each filter criteria is displayed in a separate row. The options in the drop-down list let you expand your filter criteria. The ways to add and delete rows to narrow your filter are explained below. This section contains the following topics: + “And” on page 190 + “Or” on page 190 + “Insert Row” on page 191 + “Delete Row” on page 191 + “New Group” on page 191 + “End” on page 191 Creates a new row. The filter will display items that match the conditions in each row joined by And. Creates a new row. The filter will display items that match the conditions in either row joined by Or. The items don't have to match the conditions in both rows. 190 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Insert Row Delete Row New Group End Inserts a new row below the current row and pushes the remaining rows down. Insert Row is useful if you've already created a filter, and you want to add more criteria in the middle. Removes the current row from the filter. Begins a new group of rows. You can then join the groups by an And or Or. If two groups are joined by And, the items must match all conditions in both groups. If two groups are joined by Or, the items must match all conditions in either group, but not necessarily both. Designates the last row of conditions in the filter. If you select End in a row that is followed by other rows or groups, the subsequent rows and groups are deleted. Using Filter and Rule Wildcard Characters and Switches These wildcard characters and switches are available in the Filter dialog box and the Define Conditions dialog box only when you've selected certain fields that require you to type additional text. They are applicable only when you select the [ ] Contains operator. Wildcard Character(s) | What the Filter or Rule Will Match and Switches AND, &, or a space All items that meet two or more conditions. For example, mountain & goat, mountain AND goat, and mountain goat all find items containing the words "mountain" and "goat." OR or | All items that meet one of two or more conditions. For example, mountain goat and mountain OR goat both find items containing "mountain" or "goat" or both words. NOT or! All items containing one condition but not the other. For example, mountain ! goat and mountain NOT goat both find items containing the word "mountain" but not the word "goat." Items that contain both are not included. All text found within quotation marks. For example, "mountain goats" finds all items containing the phrase "mountain goats." This does not work with documents or document references. ? Matches any one character. For example, jo?n finds all items containing the word "john," "joan," "join," and so on. Matches zero or more characters. For example, mountain* finds all items containing the words "mountain," "mountains," "mountainous," and so on. INOCASE (default) Items containing a specific word, regardless of case. For example, /NOCASE ZOO finds both "Zoo" and "Zoo." /WILDCARD (default) Items containing the search terms where * and ? are treated as wildcard characters. For example, /WILDCARD jo?n finds "john", "joan", and "join." Managing Your Mailbox 191 Using Filter and Rule Operators The available operators depend on the field you have selected in the first drop-down list. Operator = Equal To ! Not Equal To < Less Than <= Less Than or Equal To > Greater Than >= Greater Than or Equal To = Equal to Field ! Not Equal to Field < Less Than Field <= Less Than or Equal to Field > Greater Than Field >= Greater Than or Equal to Field [] Includes ! Does Not Include [] Contains [x] Does Not Contain 192 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Example Item Type = Mail Item Type ! Appointment Number Accepted < 4 Number Accepted <= 4 Number Read > 6 Number Read >= 6 Number Accepted = Total Recipients Number Read ! Number Accepted Number Opened < Total Recipients Number Opened <= Total Recipients Number Opened > Number Deleted Number Opened >= Number Deleted Item Status [ ] Completed Item Status ! Accepted From [ ] Bill From [x] Bill Result Includes Only mail messages. All item types except appointments. Items in which fewer than 4 recipients accepted. Items in which 4 or fewer recipients accepted. Items that more than 6 recipients read. Items that 6 or more recipients read. Items in which the number of recipients that accepted equals the total number of recipients. Items in which the number of recipients who read the item is not equal to the number of recipients who accepted. Items where the number of recipients who opened the item is less than the total number of recipients. Items where the number of recipients who opened the item is less than or equal to the total number of recipients. Items in which the number of recipients who have opened the item is greater than the number of recipients who have deleted the item. Items where the number of recipients who have opened the item is greater than or equal to the number of recipients who have deleted the item. Items that have been completed. Items that have not been accepted. Items where the From field contains "Bill" such as items from Bill Jones, Bill Smith, and so on. Contains does not support wildcard characters. Items where the From field does not contain "Bill" such as items from Bill Jones, Bill Smith, and so on. Does Not Contain does not support wildcard characters. Operator |-> Begins With = Matches = On >= On or After > After < Before <= On or Before -> Within <- Previous = On Date > After Date >= On or After Date < Before Date <= On or Before Date Understanding Filter and Rule Fields Example To -> cli Subject = customer reports Created = Today Created >= Yesterday Created > Yesterday Due/End Date < Tomorrow Due/End Date <= Tomorrow Due/End Date -> 3 Day Due/End Date <- 3 Day Created = 5/29/03 Created > 5/29/03 Created >= 5/29/03 Created < 5/29/03 Created <= 5/29/03 Result Includes Items where the To field begins with "cli" such as "Client Group" or "Clive Winters". Items where the Subject line reads "Customer Reports". Items that were sent today. Items that were sent yesterday or later. Items that were sent later than but not including yesterday. Tasks that are due before tomorrow. Tasks that are due tomorrow or earlier. Tasks that are due between and including today and three days after today. Tasks that were due between and including today and three days before today. Items that were created on May 29, 2003. Items that were created after May 29, 2003. Items that were created on or after May 29, 2003. Items that were created before May 29, 2003. Items that were created on or before May 29, 2003. The following table explains many of the fields available to you when you're creating a filter or a rule. Other user-defined fields might also be available. For information about the fields that are available when you filter the Contacts folder, see “Contact Fields” on page 197. Field Name This Field Refers to: Field Criteria Entry Account The account used to send or the account Specify GroupWise, POP3, the item was received from. IMAP, or NNTP. Managing Your Mailbox 193 Field Name Assigned Date Attachment List Attachments Author Caller's Company Caller's Name Caller's Phone Number Category Copy Type Created Date Opened Delivered Document Created Date Document Creator Document Number Document Type This Field Refers to: The start date of a task. Types of attachments such as files, sounds, movies, or OLE objects. Attachments containing certain text or phrases that you specify. The name of the person who authored a document. Text appearing in the Caller's Company box of a phone message. Text appearing in the Caller box of a phone message. A phone number appearing in the Phone box of a phone message. The category assigned to an item. The type of message a user receives (To, CC, or BC). The date you clicked the Send button or posted an item to your Calendar. The date a document was last opened. The date and time that the item appeared in the recipients' Mailboxes. The date the document was created. The name of the person who created the document. The number of a document. The type of a document in the library such as a form, expense report, or memo. 194 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Field Criteria Entry Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the task falls within, or specify an exact date. Select an attachment from the drop-down list. Specify attachment text. Specify the document author's name. Specify a company name. Specify a caller name. Specify a phone number. Specify an existing category. Select To, CC, or BC from the drop-down list. Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the item falls within, or specify an exact date. Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the document falls within, or specify an exact date. Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the item falls within, or specify an exact date. Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the item falls within, or specify an exact date. Specify the document creator's name. Specify an integer. Specify a document type. Field Name Due / End Date Filename Extension From Item Source Item Status Item Type Library Message My Subject Number Accepted Number Completed Number Deleted Number Opened Number Replied Opened By This Field Refers to: The date that a task is due, or the end date and time of an appointment. The filename extension of a document in a library. The name of a person in the From box of an item. Whether the item was received, sent, posted, or a draft. Whether an item has been accepted, completed, opened, read, marked private, or the subject is concealed. Types of items such as mail messages, appointments, and so on. The library in which documents are stored. Text appearing in the Message box of an item. Text appearing in the My Subject field of the Personalize tab. The number of recipients that have accepted an item you've sent. The number of recipients that have completed an item you've sent. The number of recipients that have deleted an item you've sent. The number of recipients that have opened an item you've sent. The number of recipients that have replied to an item you've sent. The name of the person who last opened this version of a document. Field Criteria Entry Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the task or appointment falls within, or specify an exact date. Specify a filename extension (for example, .exe). Specify the From box name. Select the item source from the drop-down list. Select the item status from the drop-down list. Select the item type from the drop-down list. Select the library from the drop-down list. Type part or all of the Message box text. Specify part or all of the My Subject text. Depending on the operator, you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop-down list. Depending on the operator, you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop-down list. Depending on the operator, you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop-down list. Depending on the operator, you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop-down list. Depending on the operator, you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop-down list. Specify a name. Managing Your Mailbox 195 Field Name Place Posted By Priority Send Options Size Started Subclass Subject Task Category Task Priority Thread State To Total Recipients Version Created Date Version Creator Version Description Version Number This Field Refers to: Text appearing in the Place box of an appointment. Name appearing in the From box of a posted item. The priority of an item, either high, standard, or low. Items with a reply requested send option. The size of an item including its attachments. The start date of a task. When a task is carried forward to the next day, the start date becomes the new date. Other items such as forms, custom messages, and C3PO™ programs. Text appearing in the Subject box of an item. The alphabetical priority of a task (A, B, C, and so on). The numerical priority of a task (1, 2, 3, and so on). The "state" assigned to an item in a message thread. A person's name appearing in the To box of an item. The total number of recipients of an item. The date a specific version of a document was created. The name of the person who created this version of a document. The description of the document version. The version number of the document. 196 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Field Criteria Entry Type part or all of the Place box text. Specify the From box name. Select the priority from the drop-down list. Select the option from the drop-down list. Specify an integer. Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the task falls within, or specify an exact date. Specify part or all of the Subject box text. Specify a single letter. Specify an integer. Specify Read, Watch, or Ignore. Specify a To box name. Depending on the operator, you can specify an integer or select a variable from the drop-down list. Depending on the operator, you can specify a time period that the document falls within, or specify an exact date. Specify the document creator's name. Specify a document version description. Select the version from the drop-down list, or click Select Version and specify the version number. Contact Fields Field Name This Field Refers to: Field Criteria Entry Version Status The current status of a document. Select a status from the drop- down list. View Name The name of the view in which you're Specify a view name. creating or reading an item. The view names correspond to the names displayed when you click the down-arrow next to the item view buttons on the toolbar. If you filter from within the Contacts folder, you can filter by any of the information in a contact record, for example, department, middle name, title, and so forth. You can also filter by the post office, domain, or Internet domain of the contact. If your Contacts folder shows contacts from the Frequent Contacts address book, you can filter by Last Reference (the last date you received an item from this contact) and Reference Count (the total number of times you have received items from this contact). Using the Columns in Your Mailbox The Item List in the Main Window is divided into columns. Each column displays information about the items in the list. For example, different columns display the subject of items, the date they were sent, and so forth. You can customize the column display for each folder in your Main Window by changing column widths, by adding or deleting columns, and by changing the order of columns. You can even define a different column display setting for each personal folder in your Folder List. This section contains the following topics: + “Changing Columns in Your Mailbox” on page 197 + “Sorting Items in Your Mailbox by Column” on page 198 Changing Columns in Your Mailbox 1 In the Main Window, open the folder you want to change column settings for. 2 To remove a column, drag the column heading off the column bar. 3 To change the order of a column, right-click a column heading, click More Columns, click a column name in the Selected Columns box, then click Down or Up. 4 To add a column, click a column name in the Available Columns list box, then click Add. 5 Click OK. You can also drag columns to new positions in the Main Window. You can select multiple columns to add by pressing Ctrl while you click columns. You can resize a column by dragging the edge of the column heading. You can define different column settings for each folder in your Mailbox. See “Changing or Deleting Folder Display Settings” on page 144 for more information. Managing Your Mailbox 197 Sorting Items in Your Mailbox by Column 1 Click the folder containing the items you want to sort. 2 Click View, click Display Settings, then click Sort. Sat by Cancel | Deleted Date Deletedtt y] Order @ Ascending © Descending 3 Click the category you want to sort by in the list box. 4 Click Ascending to sort from A to Z. or Click Descending to sort from Z to A. 5 Click OK. You can also sort the Item List by clicking a column heading. To reverse the sort order, click the column heading a second time. Repairing Your Mailbox Periodic mailbox maintenance keeps GroupWise running smoothly. Occasionally, mailbox maintenance is required to resolve a problem with a mailbox or other GroupWise database. Group Wise client users can perform the following mailbox maintenance actions using the Repair Mailbox feature: + “Analyze/Fix Databases” on page 199 + “Structural Rebuild” on page 200 The mailbox maintenance actions are performed on the mailbox to which the user is currently connected, such as the Caching mailbox, the Remote mailbox, or the Archive. The Repair Mailbox function is only available in the menu if you are in Caching, Remote, or Archive mode. 198 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide About Your GroupWise Mailbox In Online mode, your GroupWise mailbox resides in the post office to which you belong and Maintenance of your Online mailbox is performed by your GroupWise administrator. In other modes, you can perform some of your own maintenance, depending on what GroupWise client features you are using. Archive: When you archive GroupWise items, they are stored at the location you have specified using Tools > Options > Environment > File Location. You must open your archive using File > Open Archive in order to repair your archive. Caching Mailbox: If you are using Caching mode, your Caching mailbox is stored at the location you specified when you set up your Caching mailbox. You must be in Caching mode in order to repair your Caching mailbox. Remote Mailbox: If you are using Remote mode, your Remote mailbox is stored in whatever location you specified when you used the Hit the Road feature in the client to create your Remote mailbox. You must be in Remote mode in order to repair your Remote mailbox. Three databases are associated with each of these mailbox locations: User Database: Your user database contains your client options settings, pointers to messages, personal groups, personal Address Books, and rules. Message Database: Your message database contains your GroupWise items. Document Database: Your document database contains any documents you are accessing from a Group Wise library. When you are repairing a mailbox, you can choose which databases to repair, depending on the type of problem you are having with your mailbox. Analyze/Fix Databases The Analyze/Fix Databases action of GroupWise Mailbox Maintenance can check your mailbox for various types of problems and can repair problems that it detects. To check and optionally repair your mailbox: 4 Click Tools > Repair Mailbox, then click Yes. 2 From the Action drop-down list, select Analyze/Fix Databases. 3 Select from the following Analyze/Fix Databases options as needed: Structure: The structure check verifies the structural integrity of the mailbox and reports the amount of space that could be recovered if the mailbox is rebuilt. Index Check: If you select Structure, you can also select Index Check. You should perform an index check if you try to open a message and get a read error, or if someone sends you a message that does not appear in your mailbox, even though the sender sees a Delivered status for the message. Depending on the size of your mailbox, an index check can be time- consuming. Contents: A contents check verifies references to other items. For example, in your user database, a contents check verifies that all messages listed in your mailbox actually exist in your message database. In your message database, a contents check verifies that all attachments to messages in your mailbox actually exist in the attachment directories. A Managing Your Mailbox 199 Structural Rebuild contents check also makes sure that your rules, distribution lists, and personal groups are valid. Collect Statistics: If you select Contents, you can also collect statistics during the contents check. The statistics include the number of messages and appointments in your mailbox, the amount of space consumed by your mailbox, and so on. Select Fix Problems to repair your mailbox. If you deselect Fix Problems, problems with your mailbox are reported but not fixed. On the Databases tab, select one or more databases to analyze and optionally fix. For information about the databases, see “About Your GroupWise Mailbox” on page 199. On the Logging tab, the Log File field shows that, by default, a file named GWCHK32.LOG will be created in the Group Wise client installation directory. You can specify a different filename and location. You can also select Verbose Logging to record more detailed information during the analyze/fix process. Click Run to start the Analyze/Fix Databases option. A progress log displays during the analyze/fix process. You can click Stop at any time to stop the analyze/fix process. An error code is displayed but it simply indicates that the process has been stopped. You can click Statistics at any time during the analyze/fix process to add interim statistical information to the log, such as how many problems have been identified and fixed so far in the process. Click Close, then click OK when the analyze/fix process is complete. Click Close to return to your GroupWise mailbox. The Structural Rebuild action of GroupWise Mailbox Maintenance forces a structural rebuild of a database in your mailbox regardless of whether problems with the database have been detected using the Analyze/Fix Databases action. A structural rebuild ensures that the various record containers in the database are correctly organized so that data can be successfully retrieved from them by the Group Wise client. To perform a structural rebuild on your mailbox: 1 2 3 Click Tools > Repair Mailbox, then click Yes. From the Action drop-down list, select Structural Rebuild. On the Databases tab, select one or more databases to rebuild. For information about the databases, see “About Your GroupWise Mailbox” on page 199. On the Logging tab, the Log File field shows that, by default, a file named GWCHK32.LOG will be created in the Group Wise client installation directory. You can specify a different filename and location. You can also select Verbose Logging to record more detailed information during the structural rebuild. Click Run to start the structural rebuild. A progress log displays during the structural rebuild. 200 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You can click Stop at any time to stop the rebuild. An error code is displayed but it simply indicates that the process has been stopped. You can click Statistics at any time during the rebuild to add interim statistical information to the log, such as how many problems have been corrected so far in the structural rebuild process. 6 Click Close, then click OK when the structural rebuild is complete. 7 Click Close to return to your GroupWise mailbox. Managing Your Mailbox 201 202 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using the Address Book Use an address book like a contact management tool, phone directory, and information center for your addressing needs. Address books can store names and addresses, e-mail addresses, phone numbers, and much more. You can initiate an instant messaging session from an address book if the instant messaging product is installed and supported. Entries in an address book can be a contact, group, resource, or organization. For information about the information you can store in each type of entry, see “Managing Contacts” on page 147, “Managing Groups” on page 149, “Managing Resources” on page 150 and “Managing Organizations” on page 151. This section contains the following topics: + “Understanding Address Books” on page 203 + “Quick Info” on page 208 + “Searching for Users and Resources” on page 209 + “Using LDAP in the Address Book” on page 211 + “Using Groups to Address Items” on page 214 + “Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books” on page 218 + “Printing Labels and Lists from the Address Book” on page 224 + “Using the Address Selector and Address Book to Send Messages” on page 226 + “Using Frequent Contacts” on page 227 + “Creating Personal Address Books” on page 229 + “Setting Personal Address Book Properties” on page 233 + “Viewing Groups, Organizations, or Resources in the Address Book” on page 235 + “Advanced Address Book Options” on page 236 Understanding Address Books Click a link below to learn about different types of address books. + “Using the Address Book, the Address Selector, and the Contacts Folder” on page 204 + “System Address Book” on page 206 + “Frequent Contacts Address Book” on page 207 + “Personal Address Books” on page 207 + “LDAP Address Books” on page 207 + “Shared Address Books” on page 208 Using the Address Book 203 Using the Address Book, the Address Selector, and the Contacts Folder Address Book Address Selector There are three ways to access address book information: the Address Book, the Address Selector, and the Contacts Folder. To open the GroupWise Address Book, click the Address Book button E actress Book | on the Main Window toolbar. The Address Book opens, displaying a left pane that lists the system address book, LDAP address book, Frequent Contacts address book, and any personal address books you have created. “y Address Book 3 File Edit View Help ja Wew + [5] Details ef ES Action ~ Novell Groupwise Ad Look For: E at | fa a 4 Novell LDAP Address = = E-Mail Address Office Phone... | Title 4) @ Alfons Skoczylas - hsarmiento@Corporate.com x11005 Manager Group å (4) @ Frequent Contacts 11022 x =la x| a Heather Sarmiento g Team A Members a Jason Stevens a Joe Pangilinan a Kuo-Chang Huang jstevens@Corporate.com ipangilinan@Corporate.com khuang@Corporate.com ltanaka@Corporate.com x11000 x11017 x11018 Tester Group B Tester Group B Engineer Group å Engineer Group å Lunchroom@Corporate.com mdelatore@Corporate.com x11019 mbarnard@Corporate.com x11015 mpalu@Corporate.com #11002 Project Future@Corporate.... Engineer Group B Tester Group A Director of Engine... a Martha de la Torre a Matt Bamard a Mike Palu € Project Future B Project JJ89 Project JJ89@Corporate.c... @ Resource Resource@Corporate.com a Samantha Murphy smurphy@Corporate.com #11016 Admin. Assistant Bi a Sophie Jones sjones@Corporate.com #11006 Engineer Group 4, 4 >| a Tabitha Hu thu@Corporate.com #11013 Engineer Group B Le You can use File > Open Book and File > Close Book to display and hide the address books in this pane. The right pane lists all the entries in the selected address book. What You Can Do in the Address Book Using the Address Book, you can open contacts to view details, select names to send an item to, create and modify groups, and create and delete contacts. The Address Book also provides you with advanced address book options, such as, creating and modifying personal address books, changing your Name Completion search order, changing the properties of an address book, defining copy options, changing your MAPI configuration, importing and exporting address books, sharing address books, adding directory services, printing labels, and more. When you are composing a new item and click the Address button Rp adress | on the item view toolbar, the Address Selector displays. The Address Selector presents a simplified view of the Address Book, providing you with the options you need to select a name or create a group. 204 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 Address Selector | 21x| Look in: [a Novell GroupWise Address Book +] | To cc | BC | Look for: | Match|Name y] Selected: Routing Slip J Address List: €» o: 8 Heather Sarmiento [hme e a Matt Barnard mbarnar a Mike Palu mpalu@ B0, Project Future Project | BO, Project 1189 Project . @ Resource Resourc a Samantha Murphy smurphy a Sophie Jones sjones@ a Tabitha Hu thu@Ca a Xander Dominguez xdominc a New Contact Details a Save Group + X Remove Changing the Address Book Displayed in the Address Selector In the Address Selector, you view one address book at a time. To choose a different address book to look at, click an address book in the Look In drop-down list. What You Can Do in the Address Selector Double-click the entries you want placed in To, CC, or BC fields of the item you are addressing. You can filter the list of entries by contacts, groups, and resources using the ® drop-down list. You can search the list by name, first name, or last name using the Match drop-down list. You can add and remove columns and change the column order in the list of address entries. You can change the sort order of the list based on the entries in any column. You can resize the Address Selector by dragging a corner of the window. You can open a contact entry to view details by clicking the contact, then clicking Details. You can add contacts to the right pane and then create a group by clicking Save Group. If you click the down-arrow on the Send Group button, you can select which address book the group is saved to. Otherwise it is saved to the address book displayed in the Address Selector. You can create new contacts using the New Contact button. This button is not active if you are currently displaying the system address book. To create a new contact, click New Contact, enter the contact information in the different tabs, then click OK. For more information, see “Managing Contacts Through Your Mailbox” on page 146. To create a routing slip in the item you are creating, click Routing Slip. For more information, see “Creating a Routed Item” on page 55. Where the Address Selector Displays The Address Selector displays in other places throughout GroupWise, for example, when you are selecting members of a group, entries for a filter or find, and so forth. It might be slightly modified to show only context-appropriate options. Using the Address Book 205 Contacts Folder The Contacts folder Hi in the GroupWise Folder List, by default, represents the Frequent Contacts address book in the Address Book. ox File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | 7 Address Book fa) & Q | GÈ New Mail + Ey New Appt ~ all Y- ] A) New Contact Q NewResource 2, New Organization & New Group | E) Contacts Show: All Categories <> (® Sophie Jones [Mame | E-Mail Address Office Pho... Cellul + & @ Mailbox [6] Alfons Skoczylas askoczylas@Corporate.com x11014 Lala q & ae us [1] Art Ramirez aramirez@Corporate.com x11010 Calendar Ontario Claudia Wong cwong@Corporate.com x11003 Company Car 1 Company Car 1@Corporate.co Conference Room Conference Room@Corporate, x11111 Grace Smith gsmith@Corporate.com x11012 Group A Group Meeting Room Group Meeting Room@Corpora x11118 Harry Wong hwong@Corporate.com x11999 Heather Sarmiento hsarmiento@Corporate.com x11005 Joe Pangilinan jpangilinan@Corporate.com x11000 Kuo-Chang Huang khuang@Corporate.com x11017 Lunchroom Lunchroom@Corporate.com Mike Palu mpalu@Corporate.com x11002 555-0002 Prniert Future fl » | Mailbox size: 0% | Selected:1 | Tota 19 5 H-E] Documents E Checklist [F Work In Progress € Ej Cabinet © Trash BO? © 626203628 BHO 0 la If you want the Contacts folder to display entries from a different address book, right-click the Contacts folder, click Properties, click the address book name from the Address Book drop-down list, then click OK. Any modification you make in the Contacts folder will also be made in the corresponding address book (Frequent Contacts or other address book). What You Can Do in the Contacts Folder Use the Contacts folder to view, update, delete, and add information to the contacts in your address book. For more information, see “Managing Contacts Through Your Mailbox” on page 146. System Address Book The system address book is marked with a Y icon. The system address book is the address book configured and maintained by the system administrator. Use this address book to view information about everyone in your GroupWise system. Because the system address book is generally quite large, you might want to search for names or use predefined filters to find the name you are looking for, rather than scrolling through the entire address book. See “Searching for User, Resource, Organization, and Group Addresses” on page 210 and “Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search” on page 210. You can view information about contacts in the system address book, but you cannot edit this information. When you use Remote mode, you can restrict the entries that are downloaded from the system address book to reduce download time. See “Filtering the System Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox” on page 249. 206 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Frequent Contacts Address Book The Frequent Contacts address book is marked with a Y icon. Use the Frequent Contacts address book to access your most frequently used or most recently used entries. When you use an address in a message, the entry is copied to the Frequent Contacts address book if the book's options are set to do so. You can view the date and time you last used an entry and the number of times you have used it. After an entry is placed in Frequent Contacts, it remains there until you delete it. The entry also remains in its original address book. You can use Frequent Contacts Properties to decide which addresses to capture (if any) from either received or sent items, and how long you want addresses to remain in the address book before deleting them. Although the Frequent Contacts address book is created by Group Wise, it is considered a personal address book because you can edit the information for contacts. If you select the Junk Mail Handling option to only accept mail from contacts in personal address books, you will be able to receive mail from any contact in the Frequent Contacts address book. Personal Address Books Personal address books are marked with a & icon. You can create, edit, save, and rename multiple address books for your personal use, and you can share these address books with other users. You can add and delete names and address information for any contact (person, company, or resource) you want in your personal address books. You can also create your own information properties (fields). When you create a personal address book, a book icon is added to the main Address Book window. You can expand and collapse open books by clicking + and -. When you create multiple address books, you can include the same name and address in several books. If the entry is copied from an address book and you edit the entry's information in one book, it is updated in all books. Personal address books list addresses according to your preferences. For example, you can include Internet addresses or no address at all for the people you add to your personal address books. You can also create personal groups. If you save a list of people as a group, you only need to type the group name in the To box to send the entire group a message. See “Using Groups to Address Items” on page 214. LDAP Address Books LDAP address books are marked with a 2¥ icon. You can use Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) providers to access address books on the Internet. See “Using LDAP in the Address Book” on page 211. Using the Address Book 207 Shared Address Books Shared address books are marked with a & icon. This icon may be slightly different, depending on whether or not you created the address book. You can share personal address books with other users. You can give users read only rights, or you can give them rights to read, add, edit, and delete information in the address book. When you share an address book, the users receive a notification that they can accept or decline. See “Sharing an Address Book with Another User” on page 234. Quick Info Summary information about users is displayed in an address book and in the Address Selector when you position your mouse pointer over that name. The same information will display in the To, CC, BC, or From boxes of a message if you first click on the name. This display is called Quick Info. This shows Quick Info in a mail message: File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Gil send X Cancel Address 2 | E ue | Fs EX | FE b Uu Zé Es EN Mail | Send Options | From: -| [Sophie Jones CC: | To: Subject: AIM/IM Screen Name: nov:askocz: This shows Quick Info in the Address Book: 208 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide I dix! File Edit View Help A New + [a] Details GP Delete GR Action ~ * / Novell GroupWise Address Book Name Completion Position: 2 “2 in Novell LDAP Address = - E Alfons Skoczylas : E-Mail Address Office Phone... Title a Heather Sarmiento hsarmiento@Corporate.com x11005 Manager Group 4 @ Frequent Contacts a Jason Stevens jstevens@Corporate.com #11022 Tester Group B a Joe Pangilinan ipangilinan@Corporate.com x11000 Tester Group B a Kuo-Chang Huang khuang@Corporate.com 211017 Engineer Group å hi Fnaine et Group 4, a Sophie Jones 3 1 UE ngineer Group 4, >| a Tabitha Hu thu@Corporate.com #11013 Engineer Group B y] This shows Quick Info in the Address Selector: sò Address Selector ax Look in: [a Novell GroupWise Address Book +] | g| ec] Look for: | Match| Name y] Selected: Routing Slip I Address List: a Heather Sarmien hsarmiento(WCorporate.corr 8 Jason Stevens jstevens@Corporate.com 8 Jog Pangilinan jpangilinan@Corporate.com Joe Pangilinan E- Ma Address: jpangilinan@Corporate.com @_ ut Office Phone Number: x11000 4 Title: Tester Group B Department: Development a MA First Name: Joe md Last Name: Pangilinan jpangilinan jpangilinan@Corporate.com a New Contact Details & Save Group + X Remove Cancel | á If multiple users are listed in the To, CC, BC, or From boxes of a message, click the box to open the list of users, select one of them, then position the mouse pointer over the selected user. Quick Info is enabled by default. To disable Quick Info, 4 In the Main Window, click @& address Book | 2 Click View, then click Disable Quick Info. on the toolbar. Searching for Users and Resources You can quickly find entries in an address book by using the Search List. You can also specify search criteria by defining one or more filters. For example, you can define a filter which displays only entries with last names that begin with "D." Using the Address Book 209 When you begin typing a name in the To, CC, or BC boxes of an item you are creating, Name Completion tries to complete the name for you. It searches the address books in the order you specify in the Name Completion Search Order dialog box for entries that match what you're typing. If Name Completion finds the name you are looking for, you can stop typing. If Name Completion doesn't find it, continue typing: Name Completion searches again after each new character you type. If Name Completion finds a name that is close to but doesn't exactly match the one you are looking for, you can use the Up or Down arrows to scroll to adjacent names in the Address Book. You can tell Name Completion to search your address books in a specific order. However, Name Completion always searches the system address book last. You can also search Internet address books by using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). See “Using LDAP in the Address Book” on page 211. This section contains the following topics: + “Searching for User, Resource, Organization, and Group Addresses” on page 210 ¢ “Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search” on page 210 + “Defining Name Completion Search Order” on page 211 Searching for User, Resource, Organization, and Group Addresses 1 In the Main Window, click @ actress Book | on the toolbar. or Click Rp adress | on the toolbar in an item you are composing. 2 Select the address book where you want to search for addresses. 3 Begin typing what you are searching for. Name Completion completes the name. Using Filters to Narrow an Address Search 1 In the Main Window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click View, then click Define Custom Filter. Building a Filter 2x} Find entries where ... Last Name is Davis Cancel | Reset | [Last Name +] -+| [Davis End z] 3 Click the first drop-down list, then specify the column you want to filter. 4 Click =el then specify an operator. An operator is a symbol used with a condition to specify a particular value. For example, to create a filter that lists only users whose last name is Davis, click the Last Name column, click = Equal To, then type "Davis." In this example, = Equal To is the operator and Davis is the condition. For more information, see “Using Filter and Rule Operators” on page 192. 5 Type the condition you want to filter by, then click OK. The filtered search sorts the Address Book accorded to the results it found. 210 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide After a filter has been defined for an address book, you can enable the filter again later by displaying the address book in which you want to enable the filter and clicking View, then clicking Custom Filter. Clicking OK enables it; it will remain in effect until you turn it off or delete it. Defining Name Completion Search Order 4 In the Main Window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click File, then click Name Completion Search Order. 3 In the Available Books box, click or Ctrl+click the books you want Name Completion to search, then click Add. 4 To change the search order of an address book, select the address book in the Selected Books list, then click Down or Up. 5 To disable Name Completion, deselect the Disable Name Completion check box. 6 Click OK. Using LDAP in the Address Book Directory services such as Bigfoot* and Switchboard* assist you in searching for people around the world. Each search can check potentially millions of names. Because each directory service uses a different search method, you can choose to search with a different directory service if you do not get the search results you want. The Address Book supports LDAP (Lightweight Directory Services Protocol) for accessing directory services, and is already set up to access a number of well-known directory services. You can add additional directory services from your Internet service provider. You can connect to an LDAP server through Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to assure increased security for the LDAP address books you access. Connecting through SSL requires that you have a digital certificate, which enables GroupWise to use SSL to authenticate to the LDAP server you have chosen. After you complete a directory service search, you can add the names you find to your personal address books. While using Remote or Caching mode, you can perform a directory service search without connecting to Group Wise. This section contains the following topics: + “Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book” on page 212 ¢ “Searching for a Person Through a Directory Service” on page 212 + “Establishing a Secure Connection to a Directory Service” on page 213 + “Modifying the Properties of a Directory Service” on page 213 + “Specifying the Search Criteria a Directory Service Uses” on page 213 + “Changing the Length of Time a Directory Service Searches” on page 214 Using the Address Book 211 Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book 1 Make sure you know the server name and port number of the LDAP directory service. You can get this information from your Internet Service Provider or system administrator. k @ address Book on the toolbar. 2 In the Main Window, clic 3 In the left pane, click LDAP Address Book. 4 In the right pane, click Directories, then click Add. 5 Follow the prompts. When you specify the server address, you can specify an IP address or Internet domain name. 6 Click Finish. 7 Ifyou are adding a directory service to search for security certificates, the directory service must be set as the default. Click the directory service account you just added, then click Set as Default. 8 Click Close. Searching for a Person Through a Directory Service 1 In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the LDAP Address Book. lol File Edit View Help AA Wew v [xe] Details Y Delete E Action X 34 Novell LDAP Address Book Name Completion Position: Not searched “2 Novell Groupwise Address Boc By, Novell LDAP Address Book Look in: +) €) Frequent Contacts Display Name: >= $ a + Sophie Jones sind E-Mail Address: >= [| y] Clear All Stop | pot X y Retrieve Directories | 3 Select a directory service from the Look In drop-down list. 4 Type the name you want to search for. or Type an e-mail address you want to search for. If other search fields are available, enter the information you want to search for. 5 Click Retrieve. 6 When the search is complete, double-click the name you want. 7 Click Close. If you want to save the names you find in the search, click the names, click Edit, click Copy To, select a personal address book, then click OK. 212 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Establishing a Secure Connection to a Directory Service 1 2 og bh © In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. Click the LDAP Address Book. Click Directories, then click a directory service. Click Properties. Click Connect Using SSL. Specify the path to your digital certificate file. This file enables GroupWise to use SSL to authenticate to the LDAP server (that is, the directory service) you have chosen. Contact your system administrator to learn the location of this certificate file, or obtain a certificate file from your Internet Service Provider. You can click the Browse button to find the exact location of the file. Modifying the Properties of a Directory Service 1 a AON In the Main Window, click Y address x Click the LDAP Address Book. on the toolbar. Click Directories, then click a directory service. Click Properties. Click the Connection, Searching, and Field Mapping tabs to find the properties you want to modify. Modify the properties, then click OK. Specifying the Search Criteria a Directory Service Uses 1 2 oa bh WwW In the Main Window, click E) address Book | Click the LDAP Address Book. on the toolbar. Click Directories, then click a directory service. Click Properties. Click the Searching tab, then click Search Fields. Select up to four fields. If you want to add search fields that you do not see listed, click the Field Mapping tab, then click Retrieve All LDAP Fields. Click a MAPI search field name, then click the right arrow button to add it to the LDAP Fields List. Click Apply, click the Searching tab, click Search Fields, then select the fields you want to search. The available search fields depend on the selected directory service. Many directory services allow you to search using only the Name and E-Mail Address fields. Click OK twice, then click Close twice. Using the Address Book 213 Changing the Length of Time a Directory Service Searches k © Address EEK on the toolbar. 4 In the Main Window, clic 2 Click the LDAP Address Book. 3 Click Directories, then click a directory service. 4 Click Properties, then click the Searching tab. 5 Click and drag the bar under Amount of Time to Search Before Timing Out until it shows the amount of time you want. 6 Click OK, click Close, then click Close. Using Groups to Address Items A group is a list of users or resources you can send messages to. Use groups to send a message to several users or resources by typing the group name in the To, BC, or CC boxes. There are two types of groups: public and personal. A public group is a list of users created by the system administrator and is available for use by each Group Wise user. For example, there may be a public group for the Accounting Department. Each employee in Accounting is included in the group. Public groups are listed in the system address book. A personal group is a group created by you. For example, if you often send an appointment to your work group, you can include each co-worker's address or name and a meeting place (a resource) in a personal group. Groups are marked with the & icon, and are displayed in both the left and right panes of the open address book. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating and Saving a Personal Group” on page 214 + “Addressing Items to a Group” on page 216 + “Adding and Removing Contacts from a Personal Group” on page 217 + “Viewing Group Information” on page 218 Creating and Saving a Personal Group 1 In the Main Window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the personal address book you want to add this group to. 3 Click New on the toolbar, click Group, then click OK. 214 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide ¿$ New Group: (Frequent Contacts) y xl Summary Details | Name: PO Comments: a B Members: D Contacts, 0 Groups, O Resources Add... X Remove Type a name for the group. Type comments, such as a description of the group. Click Add to open the Address Selector dialog box and display the address list. N © a A Click To, CC, or BC, double-click or Ctrl+click and drag the users and resources for your group. If the users you want to add are in a different address book, click the address book on the Look In drop-down list. To filter the list of entries by contacts, groups, or resources, click an option on the Y drop- down list. 8 To add an entry that is not in an existing address book, click New Contact, fill in the information, click OK, then double-click the entry. 9 Click OK twice to save the group in the personal address book. You can also create and save a personal group from the Address Selector when you are addressing a message or other item: 1 In an item view, click Rp address | on the toolbar. sà Address Selector a 21x) Look in: [a Novell Groupwise Address Book +] | To ce | BC | Look for: | Match [Name y] Selected: Routing Slip I Address List: OS fo: a Heather Sarmiento [hme TEMA] a Matt Barnard mbarnar 8 Mike Palu mpalu@ ©, Project Future Project | A Project 3389 Project . @ Resource Resourc 8 Samantha Murphy smurphy a Sophie Jones sjones@ a Tabitha Hu thu@Ca a Xander Dominguez xdominc a New Contact Details a Save Group + X Remove Cancel | 2 Using the Address Book 215 2 Double-click contacts to add them to the right pane. If the users you want to add are in a different address book, click the address book on the Look In drop-down list. To filter the list of entries by contacts, groups, or resources, click an option on the Y drop- down list. 3 To add an entry that is not in an existing address book, click New Contact, fill in the information, click OK, then double-click the entry. 4 Click Save Group. or If you want to save the group to a different address book than the one that is displayed, click the arrow on the right of Save Group, then select the address book. ¿$ New Group: (Frequent Contacts) xj Summary Details | Name: | Comments: a Members: 5 Contacts, 0 Groups, 0 Resources Add... X Remove To: Mike Palu 8 To: Martha de la Tore 8 To: Xander Dominguez 8 To: Kuo-Chang Huang 8 To: Jason Stevens 5 Type a name for the group. 6 Type comments, such as a description of the group. 7 Click OK twice. Addressing Items to a Group 4 In an item view, click Rp adress | on the toolbar. 216 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Look in: Z Frequent Contacts -| | To E El Look for: | Match [Name +] Selected: Routing Slip [~ Address List: €» o: e Group A [ [Name | E-Mail Address 2 a Alfons Skoczylas askoczylas@Corporate.com a Art Ramirez aramirez@Corporate.com a Claudia Wong cwong@Corporate.com Ey Company Car 1@ Company Car 1@Corporate @ Company Car 2@ Company Car 2@Corporate 8 Conference Roor Conference Room@Corpore 8 Gi Smith ith@ci a Heather Sarmien hsarmiento(WCorporate.corr A Jason Stevens verse operat con E a New Contact Details a Save Group + X Remove Cancel | Á 2 Select a group, then click To, CC, or BC. 3 Repeat as necessary. 4 To show all the members of the group, right-click the group, then click Expand Group. 5 To see more information about the group, right-click the group, then click Details. 6 Click OK to return to the item view. Adding and Removing Contacts from a Personal Group 1 In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. In the left pane, click + to expand the address book the group is located in, then click the name of the address book. or Click Rp adress | on the toolbar in an item you are composing. 2 Right-click the group, then click Details. Groups are marked by the & icon and display in the right and left panes of the Address Book. 3 On the Details tab, click Add to open the Address Selector dialog box and display the address list. Click the Y drop-down list to filter the list by contacts, groups, or resources. 4 To add a contact, click the Look In drop-down list, then click the address book the contact is in. 5 Click the Match drop-down list, then click the way you want to locate the contact (by first name, last name, or full name). 6 In the Look For field, type the contact you want to add. The address list scrolls to the nearest match. 7 Double-click the contact in the list so that it is added to the Selected list. 8 To delete a contact, click the name in the Selected list, then click Remove. 9 Click OK twice to save the group. Using the Address Book 217 Viewing Group Information 1 In the Main Window, click E adress Book | on the toolbar. In the left pane, click the address book where the group is located. Click + to expand the address book. or Click address | on the toolbar in an item you are composing. or Click the Contacts folder & in the Folder list. 2 Right-click the group, then click Details. Groups are marked with the & icon. 3 Click the Details tab. ¿5 Group A (Frequent Contacts) x| Summary Details | Name: Comments: Members of the Group 4 segment of the department a Members: 5 Contacts, 0 Groups, 0 Resources add... X Remove To: Art Ramirez 8 To: Claudia Wong 8 To: Jason Stevens a To: Kuo-Chang Huang 8 To: Martha de la Tore Importing and Exporting Addresses and Address Books Use the Import and Export features in the Address Book to transfer your existing Novell® and third-party address books into and out of the GroupWise Address Book. If your former address book was a MAPI service provider, your conversion should be smooth. If not, your address books can still be imported with some reformatting. Novell address books are best exported in .nab format, and importing address books is also more accurate if the .nab format is used. You can also import and export your personal groups. Address books from supported POP3 and IMAP4 e-mail clients can be imported using the GroupWise E-Mail Client Import Utility. You can also share personal address books. See “Sharing an Address Book with Another User” on page 234. This section contains the following topics: + “Importing Addresses into a Personal Address Book” on page 219 + “Exporting Addresses from the Address Book” on page 219 + “Importing Third-Party Address Books” on page 219 218 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Importing Addresses into a Personal Address Book 1 If you have received a Novell personal address book as an attachment, right-click the attachment, click Save As, select the folder or floppy disk you want to save it to, then click Save. Novell address book files have a .nab extension. They are ASCII files with specific formatting. If you want to import an address book file that is not from Novell, look at a .nab file to determine its format, then mirror this format with your own address book's information. See “Importing Address Books from Non-POP3/IMAP4 E-Mail Accounts” on page 220 for more information. In the Main Window, click @ adcress Book | on the toolbar. Click the address book you want to import addresses into. or Create a new personal address book to import the addresses into. For information, see “Creating a Personal Address Book” on page 229. 4 Click File, then click Import. 5 Select the address book *.nab file, then click Open. To stop the import, press Esc, then click Yes. You cannot import addresses into the system address book. Exporting Addresses from the Address Book 1 2 3 In the Main Window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. Click the address book from which you want to export names. Select the addresses you want to export. If you want to export an entire address book, you don't need to select any names. Click File, then click Export. Click Entire Address Book if you want to export the entire address book. or Click Selected Items if you want to export the addresses you have selected. Type a filename for the exported file, click a folder for the file to be saved to, then click Save. The exported file is saved with a .nab extension (Novell Address Book). To stop the export, press Esc, then click Yes. Importing Third-Party Address Books This section contains the following topics: + + + “Importing Address Books from POP3/IMAP4 E-Mail Accounts” on page 219 “Importing Address Books from Non-POP3/IMAP4 E-Mail Accounts” on page 220 “Importing Information from a vCard” on page 221 Importing Address Books from POP3/IMAP4 E-Mail Accounts 1 Click File, then click Import POP3/IMAP. Using the Address Book 219 The Installed E-Mail Clients list box displays the e-mail accounts installed on your machine. 2 Select the e-mail account you want to import into GroupWise, then click Next. 3 Click the Address Books check box, then click Next. 4 Type a name for the new GroupWise address book that will contain the imported addresses. The name you type will display on a new tab in the GroupWise Address Book. 5 Click Next. 6 Review the summary information to ensure that it is correct, then click Next. or Click Back to change your import options. 7 Check to see if the e-mail account was successfully imported, then click Done. Importing Address Books from Non-POP3/IMAP4 E-Mail Accounts 1 From your third-party e-mail application, export the address book you want to import into Group Wise. 2 Open a DOS editor or Notepad, then open the third-party address book file. You can also open the file in any word processor. To make editing easier, set the margins so that the lines do not wrap. 3 Export a small Novell address book. See “Exporting Addresses from the Address Book” on page 219. 4 Open the address book in a second copy or split window of the application used in Step 2. Novell Address Book files have a .nab extension. They are ASCII files with specific formatting. If you want to import a third-party address book file, look at a .nab file to determine its format, then mirror this format with your own address book's information. 5 Cut, copy, and paste, or retype the fields for each entry from the third-party book into the Novell address book. Place each field behind the comma corresponding to the similar field in the first line of the Novell address book. Each field should be enclosed in quotes. The order of the fields for each entry must correspond to the order of the fields in the first line of the Novell address book file. For example, if the Name field follows the first comma in the first line, the Name field information must also follow the first comma in the entry's line, for example: "U","John Smith". Novell address book files are in ANSI-delimited format. In the first line, the characters up to the first comma must not be edited. Each field's title follows a comma. The hexadecimal numbers in each title represent the MAPI tags. User-defined fields may share the same hexadecimal number. If you want to leave a field blank for an entry, you must type the comma. This way you keep the fields lined up, so that, for example, all information following the tenth comma of each entry goes to the same field. There can be spaces inside of the quotes, but you must delete all spaces outside of the quotes. Each Novell address book entry starts with C, U, or R. C is for company entries, U is for user entries, and R is for resource entries. In addition, groups are enclosed by G> and G< tags. This order (all C entries before U entries, and U entries before R entries) is important if you want user entries to be linked to their organizations and resource entries to be linked to their owners. Groups can go anywhere after company entries in this order. 220 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Each Group entry begins with a C, U, or R, and also contains a T (To or primary recipient), C (carbon-copy recipient), or B (blind-copy recipient). For example, a UT entry is a user who will receive an item as a primary recipient. When you are finished, the address book should look similar to this: : : : TAGMAP : : :OFFE0003:***,3001001E:Name, 3A06001E:First Name, 3A11001E:Last Name, "C", "Novell GroupWise'","Novell",'"GroupWise", U","John Smith","John","Smith", U", "Kenichi Aoki","Kenichi", "Aoki", "U", "Marina Sanchez","Marina","Sanchez", R","Conference Room One",,, R","Overhead Projector",,, 6 Delete all extra spaces at the end of each line, then save your formatted file with a .nab extension. 7 In GroupWise, open the Address Book. 8 To import the entries into a new address book, click File, click New Book, type a name, then click OK. or To import the entries into an existing book, click the book you want to import the names into. 9 Click File, click Import, select the address book file, then click Open. Importing Information from a vCard To import information into an address book from a vCard you have received: 1 Right-click the vCard, then click Import. 2 Click the address book where you want the information to be added, then click OK. Changing How Information Displays in the Address Book You can control which address books are displayed in the Address Book by opening and closing address books. For example, you might have a personal address book for an account that you deal with only six months out of the year. You can close it when you don't need it and open it again six months later. You can also control the information that is displayed in a single address book. In order for you to change displayed information in an address book, that address book must be opened. Address books contain more information than can be displayed at one time. You can change what information is displayed at any time by selecting different column markers. You can also change column order, sort columns, or change their widths. You can view contacts in personal address books that are linked to the system address book. You can also choose how names display in an address book. This section contains the following topics: Using the Address Book 221 + “Opening and Closing Address Books” on page 222 + “Specifying the Columns to Display in an Address Book” on page 222 ¢ “Sorting an Address Book” on page 223 + “Viewing Links to the System Address Book” on page 223 + “Choosing the Display Format of Names” on page 223 Opening and Closing Address Books 4 In the Main Window, click @D adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click File, then click Open Book. Open Address Book 12 fx] Available address books If all of your address books are open, Open Book is dimmed. 3 Click or Ctrl+click one or more address books, then click OK. 4 To close an address book, select the address book, click File, then click Close Book. Closing an address book does not delete it; you can open it again at any time. Specifying the Columns to Display in an Address Book B) address Book | 1 In the Main Window, click on the toolbar. or Click adress | in an item you are composing. 2 Click the address book where you want to change the displayed columns. 3 Right-click a column heading, then click a column name. If the column name is not displayed, click More Columns. To add a column, click the column in the Available Columns list box, click Add, then click OK. 222 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Address Book Column Selection 121 xi] Available columns: Cancel | Extemal GUID First Name GUID >> Add >> | Internet Domain Ti Last Name << Remove «| Network ID Post Office Fax Number E-Mail Address Column width 4 To remove a column, drag the column heading off the address book. 5 To arrange columns, drag a column heading to another position. Sorting an Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click @ adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the address book you want to sort. 3 Right-click the column you want to sort by, then click Sort on 'co/umn' First (for example, sort by the E-Mail Address column rather than by the Name column). or Right-click any column heading, click Sort All Ascending (for example, A to Z or 1, 2, 3) or Sort All Descending (for example, Z to A or 3, 2, 1) to sort the column entries. Viewing Links to the System Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click @D address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the personal address book where you want to view links. A linked contact in an address book is shown with the E icon. 3 Click View, then click System Book Links to select it. Links show that an entry in a personal address book is linked to an entry in another book. When one is updated, the other is also updated. Choosing the Display Format of Names 1 In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click View, then click Name Format. 3 Click a radio button to display address books by first name first or last name first. 4 Ctrl+click the personal address books you want the format to apply to. 5 Click Apply to Selected Books to apply these changes without exiting the dialog box. or Click OK to apply these changes and exit the dialog box. Using the Address Book 223 Printing Labels and Lists from the Address Book You can print addresses in labels or lists from the Address Book. This section contains the following topics: + “Printing Labels” on page 224 ¢ “Printing Lists” on page 225 Printing Labels 1 In the Main Window, click E Address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the address book that contains the entries you want to print. 3 Ctrl+click or Shift+click to select individual entries. or Make no selections if you want to print the entire address book. 4 Click File, then click Print. 5 Ifprompted, click Selected Items. or Click Entire Address Book. 6 Make sure the Form tab is selected. 7 Make sure Labels is selected in the Format group box. Print Address Book x| Form | Content | Options | ¡Format : Form size C List Selected form: © Latter Cas i C 55x85in C 45 © Custom Width: Height: 850 in 111.00 in. © Franklin sizes Available forms: Monarch (8.5x11in] y Mailing Address Selected Fields Form orientation @ Portrait C Landscape Preview... | Printer Setup... | Close | 8 To print all the address book information for each entry, make sure Mailing Address is selected in the Available Forms list box. or To print only some of the address book information for each entry, click Selected Fields in the Available Forms list box. Click the Content tab, deselect the fields you don’t want to print, then click the Form tab. 224 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Printing Lists 15 16 13 14 You can only print information that has been entered in the address book fields. If there is no information for a particular field, nothing will be printed for that field. Click a paper size in the Form Size group box. Click Portrait or Landscape in the Form Orientation group box. Click the Content tab. Specify the number of rows and columns you want. Click Font, make selections, then click OK. Click the Options tab, then make selections. For information about each option, click I then click an option. Click Preview to see how the labels will look. Click Print. In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. Click the address book that contains the entries you want to print. Ctrl+click or Shift+click to select individual entries. or Make no selections if you want to print the entire address book. Click File, then click Print. If prompted, click Selected Items. or Click Entire Address Book. Make sure the Form tab is selected. Click List in the Format group box. Click what you want to print in the Available Forms list box. You can only print information that has been entered in the address book fields. If there is no information for a particular field, nothing will be printed for that field. Click a paper size in the Form Size group box. Click Portrait or Landscape in the Form Orientation group box. Click the Content tab. Depending on what you selected to print in Step 7, you might be able to select and deselect the fields you want to print. Click Font, make selections, then click OK. Click the Options tab, then make selections. For information about each option, click E, then click an option. Using the Address Book 225 Print Address Book 121 x] | Header: | — Footer Options viene M Overflow extra text to following pages T~ Print on both sides of page (duplex) Print to a text file F Print to an HTML file - Print items | M Use shading C All I Print separator lines between items Form | Content A IV Page number M Date and time Center form on page (horizontally) @ Selected Insert blank page at beginning of print job Preview... | Printer Setup... | Close | 15 Click Preview to see how the list will look. 16 Click Print. Using the Address Selector and Address Book to Send Messages Use the Address Selector to address items you are composing. For more information about the Address Selector, see “Address Selector” on page 204. Use Mail to send items from an address book. If you have opened the Address Book from the Main Window, the Address Book and GroupWise are not connected. Mail lets you open an item view from the Address Book. This section contains the following topics: + “Using the Address Selector to Address an Item” on page 226 + “Sending Mail from the Address Book” on page 227 Using the Address Selector to Address an Item 1 In an item you are composing, click Baires | on the toolbar. 2 Select an address book from the Look In drop-down list. 3 Double-click the names you want as primary (To) recipients of your message. 4 To address carbon copy recipients, click CC, then double-click the names you want. 5 To address blind copy recipients, click BC, then double-click the names you want. 6 Click the Y drop-down list to show only contacts, groups, or resources in your list. 7 Click the Match drop-down list to select how you want to locate a recipient (by name, last name, or first name), then type the recipient’s name. 8 Click OK. 226 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide If you know the person's name, begin typing it in the To box of the item view. Name Completion searches the Frequent Contacts address book, the current address book, and the system address book, provided they are listed in the Name Completion Search Order. When Name Completion finds the person you want to send a message to, you can stop typing. If Name Completion finds a name that is close to but doesn't exactly match the one you are looking for, use the Up or Down arrows to scroll to adjacent names in the Address Book. Sending Mail from the Address Book 1 In the Main window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. File Edit View Help MENT (a) Details Y Delete E Action X Novell GroupWise Ad Look For: Posie: [Nme y] BZ Novell LDAP Address 12 E i E Alfons Skoczylas E-Mail Address Office Phone... Title É Frequent Contacts a Heather Sarmiento hsarmiento@Corporate.com x11005 Manager Group å g Team Members a Jason Stevens jstevens@Corporate.com #11022 Tester Group B a Joe Pangilinan ipangilinan@Corporate.com x11000 Tester Group B a Kuo-Chang Huang khuang@Corporate.com #11017 Engineer Group å ltanaka@Corporate.com #11018 Engineer Group å Lunchroom@Corporate.com a Martha de la Torre mdelatore@Corporate.com x11019 Engineer Group B a Matt Barnard mbamard@Corporate.com x11015 Tester Group å a Mike Palu mpalu@Corporate.com #11002 Director of Engine... B Project Future Project Future@Corporate.... Project JJ89@Corporate.c... Resource@Corporate.com a Samantha Murphy smurphy@Corporate.com x11016 Admin. Assistant a Sophie Jones sjones@Corporate.com #11006 Engineer Group 4, 4 >| a Tabitha Hu thu@Corporate.com #11013 Engineer Group B 2 Click an address book. 3 Ctrl+click the users you want to send mail to. 4 Click File, then click Mail Message. Using Frequent Contacts Use the Frequent Contacts address book to access your most frequently used or most recently used entries. When you use an address in a message, the entry is copied to the Frequent Contacts address book if the book's options are set to do so. You can view the date and time you last used an entry and the number of times you have used it. After an entry is placed in Frequent Contacts, it remains there until you delete it. The entry also remains in its original address book. You can use Frequent Contacts Properties to decide which addresses to capture (if any) from either received or sent items, and how long you want addresses to remain in the address book before deleting them. If you select the Junk Mail Handling option to only accept mail from contacts in personal address books, you will be able to receive mail from any contact in the Frequent Contacts address book. For more information, see “Junking E-Mail From Users Not In a Personal Address Book” on page 96. This section contains the following topics: + “Using Frequent Contacts to Address Items” on page 228 Using the Address Book 227 + “Setting Frequent Contacts Options” on page 228 + “Using Predefined Filters for the Frequent Contacts Address Book” on page 229 Using Frequent Contacts to Address Items 4 Click across | in an item you are composing. 2 Select Frequent Contacts from the Look In drop-down list. 3 Double-click the names you want, then click OK. The Frequent Contacts address book can be closed, but 1t cannot be deleted. Setting Frequent Contacts Options 4 In the Main Window, click E adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the Frequent Contacts address book. 3 Click File, click Properties, then click the Options tab. Frequent Contacts Properties 12 1x] General Options | Sharing | © Auto-saving off I” Save addresses of items that are received TF From external sources (Internet) T From internal sources Jo) onpi mi name or Dis in the Tio held IV Save addresses of items that are sent IV To external sources [Internet] FN To intemal sources T Delete addresses not referenced within time period Time period: le + Months + | Delete Now | 4 Select the options you want. To turn off names being placed into the Frequent Contacts address book, click Auto-Saving Off. 5 To delete names from this book, select the Delete Addresses Not Referenced Within Time Period check box, type a number in the Time Period box, click a time period from the drop- down list (from hours to years), then click Delete Now to remove old addresses. 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties dialog box. 228 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide or Click Apply to save your changes and keep the Properties dialog box open. Using Predefined Filters for the Frequent Contacts Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the Frequent Contacts address book. If the Frequent Contacts address book is not visible, you must open it by clicking File, then clicking Open Book. 3 Click View, then click Filter for at Least 3 References. or Click View, Define Filter for References (a reference is the number of times you have sent or received items from an entry), type the minimum number of references an entry must have in order to be included in the filter, then click OK. Creating Personal Address Books You can create, edit, save, and rename multiple address books for your personal use, and you can share these address books with other users. You can add and delete names and address information for any contact (person, company, or resource) you want in your personal address books. You can also create your own information properties (fields). When you create a personal address book, a book icon is added to the main Address Book window. You can expand and collapse open books by clicking + and -. When you create multiple address books, you can include the same name and address in several books. If the entry is copied from an address book and you edit the entry's information in one book, it is updated in all books. Personal address books list addresses according to your preferences. For example, you can include Internet addresses or no address at all for the people you add to your personal address books. You can also create personal groups. If you save a list of people as a group, you only need to type the group name in the To box to send the entire group a message. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a Personal Address Book” on page 229 + “Deleting a Personal Address Book” on page 230 ¢ “Editing a Personal Address Book” on page 231 + “Synchronizing Address Book Entries” on page 232 Creating a Personal Address Book 4 In the Main Window, click BD adress Bock | on the toolbar. 2 Click File, then click New Book. 3 Type a name for the new book, then click OK. 4 To add new entries to the new address book, click the address book, then click New on the toolbar. Using the Address Book 229 AA -olx Fie Edit view Help A New ~ [E] Details $ Delete GR Action ~ Y People With MBAs Name Completion Position: Not searched 2 E > Novell LDAP Address Book = 44% Frequent Contacts Name E-Mail Address Office Phone... | Department E © Pepe rr 1 OK lx Select the entry type: Organization 5 Click the Entry Type, then click OK. 6 Fill in the fields for the entry. For information about the different fields, see “Managing Contacts” on page 147, “Managing Groups” on page 149, “Managing Resources” on page 150, and “Managing Organizations” on page 151. 7 Click OK. 8 To copy entries to the new address book from existing address books, click the existing address book, click an entry, then drag the entry to the new address book. You can add and modify records in your personal address books. However, only the system administrator can add and modify records in the system address book. Deleting a Personal Address Book 41 In the Main Window, click BD adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click File, then click Delete Book. Delete Address Book 27 xi] Available address books Tools Contacts 3 Click or Ctrl+click the books you want to delete, click OK, then click Yes. After it is deleted, a personal address book cannot be recovered. 230 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Editing a Personal Address Book In a personal address book, you can add or delete entries, edit existing information, copy names from one book to another, or rename a book. You can also create your own custom address book fields. This section contains the following topics: + “Deleting Entries from a Personal Address Book” on page 231 ¢ “Editing Entries in a Personal Address Book” on page 231 + “Copying Entries Between Personal Address Books” on page 232 + “Renaming a Personal Address Book” on page 232 + “Copying a Personal Address Book” on page 232 + “Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book” on page 232 Deleting Entries from a Personal Address Book 4 In the Main Window, click BD adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click an address book, then click or Ctrl+click the names you want to remove. 3 Press the Delete key, then click Yes. Editing Entries in a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click an address book, then double-click the name you want to edit. 3 Edit the information on the different tabs, then click OK. x Summary Contact | Office | Personal | Comments | Advanced | Certificate | > Name Fist [Bee pee [| Middle Sue [>| Last [Smith Display [Grace Smith xl m Email Address r Phone O ee © otie [no 0 M asmith@Corporate.com Remove Home | Edi C Mobile [ C Fax a Pager a m Instant Messaging Categories: | | = Using the Address Book 231 Copying Entries Between Personal Address Books You cannot copy to a closed address book; you must open the book first. You cannot copy names to the system address book. 1 In the Main Window, click @D adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click an address book, then click or Ctrl+click the names you want to copy. 3 Click Edit, then click Copy To. 4 Select the address book you want to copy the names to, then click OK. Renaming a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click E address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the personal address book you want to rename. TIP: You cannot rename the Frequent Contacts address book. 3 Click File, then click Rename Book. 4 Type the new name, then click OK. Copying a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click @ Address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the personal address book you want to copy. 3 Click File, then click Save As Book. 4 Type a name for your address book, then click OK. Defining Custom Fields in a Personal Address Book 1 In the Main Window, click @ adress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the personal address book where you want to define custom fields. 3 Double-click an entry, then click the Advanced tab. 4 Click Add, then type a title for the field in the Field Name box. 5 In the Value text box, type the information you want to display in the field for that entry. 6 Click OK. After you have added a custom field to an address book, the field cannot be deleted. However, because custom fields are displayed as columns, you can remove the column from your display. Because each address book can have different columns displayed, the column must be removed from each address book individually. Synchronizing Address Book Entries You can use Synchronize to make sure that your personal address book entries match the corresponding entries in the system address book. You can synchronize an entire personal address book or just the entries you have selected. For example, you might have a personal address book containing the names of your contacts in the Marketing department. When the Marketing department changes buildings and phone numbers, Synchronize saves you from having to create a new personal address book. 232 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 1 In the Main Window, click MUI] on the toolbar. 2 Click the personal address book you want to synchronize. 3 To synchronize an address book, click File, click Synchronize, then click Current Book. or To synchronize selected entries, Ctrl+click or Shift+click the entries, click File, click Synchronize, then click Selected Items. Setting Personal Address Book Properties Use the Address Book Properties dialog box to view the properties of each of your address books (including the system address book). There are three property tabs in the Address Book, not all of which are visible from every address book. The General tab is visible from all address books. Use the General tab to view the name of the address book, the MAPI service provider (if known), a summary of what the address book contains, and so forth. You can also use it to add a description of the address book. The Options tab is visible only from the Frequent Contacts address book. Use the Options tab to specify what gets saved in Frequent Contacts and how this address book should be cleaned up. See “Using Frequent Contacts” on page 227. The Sharing tab is visible for personal address books for which you are the owner, including your Frequent Contacts address book. Use the Sharing tab to choose whether or not to share an address book, who to share it with, and which Access rights each person should have. You can also share your personal groups or distribution lists by placing them in an address book you share with others. This section contains the following topics: + “Viewing an Address Book's Properties” on page 233 ¢ “Sharing an Address Book with Another User” on page 234 Viewing an Address Book's Properties 1 In the Main Window, click @ address Book | on the toolbar. 2 Click the address book you want to view the properties for. If the book is not visible, the book is not open. 3 Click File, then click Properties. Using the Address Book 233 Tools Contacts Properties | 27 x! General | Sharing | T, Tools Contacts Type: Novell Personal Address Book Access: All Owner: Harry Wong ~ | Press the button to see a summary of this address Contains: book! ook's contents. Description: [ Ps 4 To view the number of individuals, resources, companies, and so forth, click Contains. If the address book is large, this may take some time. The status bar measures the progress of this operation. 5 To add or modify a description for the address book, click in the Description box, then type or edit the description. 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties dialog box. or Click Apply to apply your changes and keep the Properties dialog box open. Sharing an Address Book with Another User 4 In the Main Window, click @Dreséress Book | on the toolbar. 2 Right-click the address book you want to share, then click Sharing. If the address book is not visible, you must open it by clicking File, then clicking Open Book. 3 Click the Shared With radio button. 4 Type the name of the person with whom you want to share the address book, then click Add User. If you do not know the name of the person, click Bi You cannot share address books across external domains. 5 Click each user's name in the Share List, then assign him or her Access rights in the Access group box. 234 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Tools Contacts Properties | 2) x! General Sharing | Not shared © Shared with Name: Add User fleanie Yacoub LE} | Share list: DK | Cancel | Apply | 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties dialog box. or Click Apply to apply your changes and keep the Properties dialog box open. When you click OK or Apply, the person with whom you want to share the address book receives a notification. The Status column displays as Pending until the user accepts or declines the shared address book request, then the column is updated to reflect the user's selection. In the Address Book, shared address books are marked with the & icon. You and the users you share an address book with can arrange your address book columns differently. Viewing Groups, Organizations, or Resources in the Address Book Use the predefined filters in the View menu to display only groups, users, organizations, or resources in an address book. Address books display all entries by default. Although all groups, companies, and resources are marked by icons, finding specific entries in large address books can prove difficult. A predefined filter displays only the type of entry you are looking for. There is one predefined filter which applies only to the Frequent Contacts address book: Filter for at Least X References. You can use it to filter all entries with at least the number of references you specify. To view groups, organizations, or resources in an address book, in Window, click MAN 1 In the Main Window, click 2 Click an address book. 3 Click View, then click the filter you want to sort by. on the toolbar. Using the Address Book 235 -10/x File Edit | view Help [i Mew Details Disable Quick Info Onling Define Custom Filter... Define Filter for References... lovell GroupWise Address Book Name Completion Position: Not searched 2 or: Inside: | Name + ] - First... | Office Pho... Department artha de la Torre dela... Martha x11019 mdelatore Development Er al att Barnard Barnard Matt x11015 mbamard Development Te ike Palu Palu Mike x11002 mpalu Development Dit oject Future Proje... Projec... Project F... oject JJ89 Proje... Projec... Project J... esource Reso... Resou... Resource emantha Murphy Murphy Sama... x11016 smurphy Development Ac bphie Jones Jones Sophie x11006 sjones Development Er abitha Hu Hu Tabitha x11013 thu Development Er ander Dominguez Domi... Xander x11001 xdoming... Development Er Filter Off Wo Custom Filter Defined Filter for at Least 3 References Filter For Contacts Filter For Resources Filter for Organizations Name Format... System Book Links Refresh 4 To return to the non-filtered address book view, click View, then click Filter Off. In the Address Selector, click a predefined filter from the Y drop-down list to filter for contacts, groups, and resources. The Address Book places icons to the left of contacts, resources, groups, and organizations in all address books. These are what the icons look like: E Contacts @ Resources & Groups o Organizations Advanced Address Book Options This section contains the following topics: + “Defining Copy Options” on page 236 + “Changing Your MAPI Configuration” on page 237 Defining Copy Options Use Copy Options to select the copying format to use when you copy address book data to the clipboard. When copied to the clipboard, the address book data is formatted as a "virtual business card" (vCard) or address book "text." A vCard includes all of identifying information for an individual that is included in an address book. When you select one of the two copy formats, Display Data (ASCII text format) or vCard Data (.vcf stream format), the vCard data copied thereafter with the standard Windows text-copy procedure (select text, then press Ctrl+C), can be pasted in that format into other applications (such as personal information managers and Web applications) to fill your particular needs. For example, you could paste the display text into an HTML editor or a word processor for import into a database or for formatting as a mail merge document. Or, if you chose to copy in vCard format, you could paste the data into a vCard editor or viewer to include sound clips, graphics, or 236 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide additional text. You could also save the data as a .vef file for import into any other application that supports the vCard standard. GroupWise supports up to version 2.1 of the vCard standard. To select the vCard text format to copy: 4 Inthe Main Window, click BD adress Bock | on the toolbar. 2 Click Edit, then click Copy Options. 3 Select the copy option you want. The Display Data button copies text as "display" text. The vCard Data button renders text as a vCard data stream. 4 To make your current selection the default, click the check box. 5 Click OK. Changing Your MAPI Configuration 1 In the Address Book, click File, then click Services. 2 Make your changes, then click OK. If the address book's name is visible, it is a MAPI service provider. Using the Address Book 237 238 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using Remote Mode Remote mode is familiar to GroupWise® users on the road. Similar to Caching mode, a copy of your network mailbox, or the portion of the mailbox you specify, is stored on your local drive. You can retrieve and send messages on a periodic basis with the type of connection you specify (modem, network, or TCP/IP). If you do not want a complete copy of your network mailbox, you can restrict what is retrieved, such as only new messages or only message subject lines. For more information about Caching mode, see Chapter 10, “Using Caching Mode,” on page 257. To use Remote mode, the client installation must be a standard installation, not a workstation installation. 44 Novell GroupWise Remote - Mailbox E TES] File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | & Address Book a | Ef New Mail + ÉNewappt ~ rNewTask + Ty | g fal - | E - | y + reply + > ¿2 Mailbox Show: All Categories <2 ( Sophie Jones & 89 [Malbox](71 Sophie Jones 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM Sent Items @ Calendar D Contacts HE] Documents Claudia Wong Y Checklist Alfons Skoczylas Alfons' question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM [A Work In Progress Alfons Skoczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM & 8 Cabinet Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM © Trash Matt Barnard Notes from last project meeting 1/7/2003 5:49:35 PM 4 Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM Sophie Jones Core Team Meeting 1/16/2003 9:00:00 AM [El | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Total: 18 Your system administrator can specify settings that do not allow you to use Remote mode. This section contains the following topics: + “Remote Password” on page 240 + “Remote Requests” on page 240 + “Remote Connection Types” on page 240 + “Remote Features” on page 240 + “Smart Docking” on page 240 + “Preparing to Use Remote” on page 241 + “Sending and Retrieving Items in Remote Mode” on page 245 + “Configuring Your Remote Connections” on page 250 + “Remote (Offline) Mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 255 Using Remote Mode 239 Remote Password To use Remote mode, you must have a password set in Online mode. When you run in Remote mode for the first time, you can specify to use the same password in Remote mode or choose a new one. For more information about passwords, see “Assigning Passwords to Your Mailbox” on page 41. Remote Requests Each time you send and retrieve messages, move items into folders, delete items, create rules, and so forth, this is stored as a request. If you have made requests but exit GroupWise without connecting to your network mailbox, your pending requests are stored until the next time you run GroupWise, when you are prompted to complete the requests. Remote Connection Types When you run GroupWise in Remote mode, you can connect to your Online GroupWise system through a modem connection, a network (direct) connection, or a TCP/IP connection. When you use Hit the Road to set up your Remote Mailbox, Group Wise creates the appropriate connections based on how you are currently running GroupWise. You can create new connections as well as change or delete existing ones. You will most likely use Remote away from the office with a computer that has no permanent network access. In these situations, you can use a TCP/IP connection or a modem connection to connect to your GroupWise system. Modem connections dial into a gateway in your Group Wise system. TCP/IP connections use unique IP (Internet Protocol) address and port information to connect to your Group Wise system. You can also use Remote in your office and connect to your GroupWise System via a TCP/IP connection or a network drive mapping. These connections are useful to download large quantities of information, such as your system address book. For more information, see “Configuring Your Remote Connections” on page 250. If Your Remote Connection Is Expensive If your remote connection is expensive, you can save money and connection time by connecting after peak business, downloading address books with a network connection prior to being on the road, restricting the messages you download, and waiting until you have a number of requests before connecting. Remote Features Most Group Wise features are available in Remote mode, with the exception of subscribing to other users’ notifications and Proxy. Smart Docking Group Wise automatically processes outstanding Remote requests when you run GroupWise on your docked laptop after you return to the office. For example, you might have sent an item while you were away from your office, but didn't connect to the GroupWise system to process that 240 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide request. When you return to the office and run GroupWise, you are asked if you want to process the outstanding requests. To see what requests still need to be processed, click Requests. Preparing to Use Remote Use Hit the Road on the Tools menu (or switch from Online mode to Remote mode) to create, set up, or update your Remote Mailbox. Your local mailbox is created on your local drive and any current connections are detected and set up. If you have already used Caching mode, your local mailbox has already been created. You can also use Hit the Road to create setup files on a diskette to set up your Remote Mailbox on a computer that's not connected to the network. Several users can set up their Remote Mailboxes on a single shared computer. This section contains the following topics: + “Setting Up Your Remote Mailbox” on page 241 + “Setting Up Multiple Remote Mailboxes on a Shared Computer” on page 242 + “Specifying Remote Properties” on page 243 Setting Up Your Remote Mailbox If you switch from Online mode to Remote mode, you can enter the path to the Remote Mailbox. If this path does not exist, Hit the Road will run automatically. The following steps explain how to set up your Remote Mailbox using Hit the Road. 1 Make sure GroupWise is installed on the computer where you want to set up your Remote Mailbox. 2 Make sure you have a password on your Online Mailbox. 3 Run GroupWise in your office on your docked laptop or a workstation. 4 Click Tools, then click Hit the Road. ‘Hit the Road’ Wizard xi Welcome to 'Hit the Road! This Wizard will guide you through the steps necessary to update your Remote Mailbox from your Network Mailbox. Do you want your Remote Mailbox created on: C Another machine Bact Cancel | Using Remote Mode 241 5 6 14 15 Type your Mailbox password, then click OK. To create your Remote Mailbox on the docked laptop that is currently connected to the network with your Online GroupWise system, click This Machine, then click Next. If you click This Machine and Group Wise is not installed on the docked laptop, you are prompted to install GroupWise. To use GroupWise away from your office, click Yes to install Group Wise on the computer you're traveling with. Continue with Step 7. or To create a setup diskette for another computer, such as your home computer, click Another Machine, then click Next. Have a diskette ready. When your setup diskette is created, insert it into the computer where you want to set up your Remote Mailbox (such as your home computer), then run setup.exe from the diskette. Go to Step 10. Type the path for your Remote Mailbox, then click Next. Select the phone numbers you'll use to connect to your Online Mailbox, then click Next. Select the items you want to copy to your Remote Mailbox, then click Finish. Exit GroupWise. Right-click the Windows desktop, click New, then click Shortcut. Type c: \novell\groupwise\grpwise.exe /pr- path to remote mailbox. The path is the path you typed in Step 7. Click Next. Type a name for the shortcut, such as Remote. Click Finish. After setting up your Remote Mailbox, you can begin sending and retrieving items and Address Book information from your Online Mailbox. Setting Up Multiple Remote Mailboxes on a Shared Computer These steps should be completed by each user who is setting up a Remote Mailbox on the shared computer. 1 2 3 4 Run GroupWise in Online mode, click Tools, then click Hit the Road. If prompted, enter your password. To create a Remote Mailbox setup diskette, click Another Machine. Follow the steps in the Hit the Road Wizard, inserting a blank diskette in the last step to save the setup files on. Log in to Windows on the shared computer using a unique username. Insert the setup diskette into the shared computer, then run setup.exe from the diskette. Make sure GroupWise is installed on the shared computer. Select a folder for your Remote Mailbox files, then click OK. This folder should not be shared with other users. To run GroupWise against your Remote Mailbox, each user should log in to Windows with a unique username before starting GroupWise. 242 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Specifying Remote Properties You can change the way Remote mode is set up, including your connection, time zone, how often to send and retrieve items, system information, delete options, signature, and so forth, in Remote Properties. For information about changing your connections, see “Configuring Your Remote Connections” on page 250. This section contains the following topics: + “Specifying Time Zone Settings” on page 243 + “Sending and Retrieving Items At Regular Intervals” on page 243 + “Specifying User and System Information for Your Remote Mailbox” on page 244 + “Changing Remote Delete Options” on page 244 + “Changing Your Signature” on page 244 Specifying Time Zone Settings The items in your Calendar are scheduled according to the time zone settings in the Windows Date/ Time Properties. You can access this dialog box in Remote Properties on the Server tab. If you use Group Wise in another time zone, you can change to that new time zone so that your scheduled items reflect the time zone difference. Typically, if you're leaving your office for several days, you will use your Calendar information to attend and schedule appointments. Therefore, you will need to use the local time zone. However, if you're leaving your office for a short time, (for example, a day), you will probably keep the same time zone as your GroupWise system. If you change time zone settings, be sure to change your computer's clock to match the new time zone. 1 In Remote mode, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Accounts (Remote). 2 Click the remote account, click Properties, then click the Server tab. 3 Click Time Zone, click the current time zone, then click OK. 4 Click Time Zone, click the Date & Time tab, change your computer's clock to match the new time zone, then click OK. For more information about using Date/Time Properties, see your Windows documentation. Sending and Retrieving Items At Regular Intervals 1 In Remote mode, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Accounts (Remote). 2 Make sure the remote account is marked with a check mark. 3 Click the General Options. 4 Select Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts Every __ Minutes, then specify the number of minutes. 5 Click OK. For this option to work, your computer must stay connected to the network or phone line, depending on the connection you're using. To quickly turn this option on and off, click Accounts, then click Auto Send/Retrieve. It is active when a check mark is displayed. Using Remote Mode 243 Specifying User and System Information for Your Remote Mailbox 1 In Remote mode, click Tools, click Options, double-click Accounts (Remote), then click General Options. 2 In the Display Name box, type your first and last name. This name appears in the From box of an item you send someone. The name is also used as your user folder name. Click OK. Click the remote account, click Properties, then click the Server tab. Type your GroupWise user ID. Type the domain name of your Online Mailbox. Type the post office name of your Online Mailbox. on oa A Ww To change the password for your Online Mailbox, click Online Mailbox password, type your Online Mailbox password, then click OK. Specify the new password in both text boxes, then click OK. If your administrator has turned on LDAP authentication, read and follow the additional information about your Online Mailbox password that is provided in this dialog box. Your Online Mailbox must have a password before you can use Remote mode. If you have not assigned a password to your Online Mailbox, do so in Security Options while running Group Wise in your office. Changing Remote Delete Options By default, if you delete an item from your Remote Mailbox, the item will be deleted from your Online mailbox the next time you connect. You can change the deletion options in Remote Properties so that an item deleted from your Remote Mailbox will stay in your Online mailbox or vice versa. 4 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Accounts (Remote). 2 Click the remote account, click Properties, then click the Advanced tab. 3 Make your changes, then click OK. TIP: This process does not apply to Caching mode. GroupWise automatically synchronizes the deletions between the Online and Caching modes. Changing Your Signature 244 The signature you specify for Remote mode is the same signature that is used for Online mode. You can specify this signature in Remote Properties. 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Accounts (Remote). 2 Click the remote account, click Properties, then click the Signature tab. 3 Change your signature text. 4 Click OK. For more information about signatures, see “Adding a Signature or vCard to Items You Send” on page 51. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Sending and Retrieving Items in Remote Mode Use Send/Retrieve to synchronize your Online and Remote Mailboxes. When you connect to your GroupWise system, items you sent from your Remote Mailbox are delivered to the recipients. Remote also sends a request to your Online Mailbox to retrieve your items, such as mail. Your Group Wise system processes the request, then sends your items to your Remote Mailbox, restricting the items according to the limits you set in the Send/Retrieve dialog box. In addition to items, you can retrieve rules, documents, and address books. This section contains the following topics: + “Downloading Items, Rules, Addresses, and Documents to Your Remote Mailbox” on page 245 + “Sending Items in Remote Mode” on page 246 + “Viewing Pending Requests” on page 247 + “Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded” on page 247 + “Using Busy Search in Remote Mode” on page 248 ¢ “Filtering the System Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox” on page 249 + “Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox” on page 250 Downloading Items, Rules, Addresses, and Documents to Your Remote Mailbox 1 If you're running GroupWise in Online mode, click Tools, click Hit the Road, type your Online Mailbox password, select a connection phone number if prompted, then click OK. or If you're running GroupWise in Remote mode, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click Group Wise Options. Send/Retrieve 121 x] Send: 1 new messages to be sent. Connect | ~ Retrieve: E | IV Items (Mail, Appt, etc.) Advanced... | = @ New Only C All FT Rules I System Address Book Filter I” Personal Address Books F Documents Documents r Connecting: From: Default Location To: 15551112222 Last Connection: 3/13/01 4:41PM 2 To retrieve items, make sure Items is selected, click Advanced, click a tab if available, click an option, then click OK. Using Remote Mode 245 If you specify to limit the items you retrieve, for example, by selecting Get Subject Line Only or setting size limits, you can download the rest of the item or items later. See “Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded” on page 247. If you are in Remote mode and only want to download new items, select New Only on the Retrieve tab. 3 Click OK. 4 To retrieve rules, click Rules to select it. 5 To retrieve addresses from the system Address Book, click System Address Book to select it, click Filter, specify the addresses to retrieve, then click OK. Because retrieving address books can take a long time with a modem connection, it is recommended that you retrieve address books using a network or TCP/IP connection. For more information about filtering the system Address Book, see “Filtering the System Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox” on page 249. 6 To retrieve your personal address books, click Personal Address Books to select it. 7 Toretrieve copies of documents from your Online Mailbox, select the Documents check box, click Documents, select your documents, mark applicable documents as In Use, then click OK. Marking a document as In Use prevents others from modifying the document. If you don’t mark a document as In Use, someone can edit it while you have the copy in your Remote Mailbox. If you then edit the document and return it to the Master Library, your document is saved as a new version and the edits are not saved to the other version. If you don't plan to edit a document, don't mark it In Use. When you exit an In Use document, you're asked to send the document to the Master Library and mark it as Available. If you're done with the document, the document should be marked Available to allow others editing access to it. 8 If you are in Remote mode and you want to specify your remote location and connection before downloading, click Configure, select your remote location from the Connecting From drop-down list, select a connection from the Connecting To drop-down list, then click OK. 9 Click Connect or Finish. If you are in Remote mode, all items in your Pending Requests list are sent at this time. Sending Items in Remote Mode 4 Create a new item, then click Send on the toolbar. Remote places the item in the Pending Requests list. When you connect to your master GroupWise system, all items in the Pending Requests list are sent. 2 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click the remote account. or If you want to specify your remote location and connection before sending the item, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, click Group Wise Options, click Configure, select your remote location from the Connecting From drop-down list, select a connection from the Connect To drop-down list, click OK, then click Connect. At the same time your items are being sent, your new items are retrieved according to what you have specified in the Send/Retrieve dialog box. 246 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You can switch between connection types (network, modem, and TCP/IP) if there are no pending requests on the connection you are switching from. For example, if you're sending and retrieving items with a network connection and disconnect before the transmission is complete, you should not switch to a modem connection later to process the requests. Complete the original request with the original connection. Viewing Pending Requests Whenever you perform an action that requires information to be sent from your Remote Mailbox to your Online Mailbox, GroupWise creates a request that is placed in the Pending Requests list. When you connect to your master GroupWise system, all the requests are sent to your Online Mailbox. Use Pending Requests to check for outstanding requests. 1 Click Accounts, then click Pending Requests. Pending Requests to Online Mailbox Requests: Request Status Date Requested Retrieve Library Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:35PM New Document Reference Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:36PM Create document reference Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:36PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Last connection: 3/13/01 4:41PM To prevent a request from being processed, click the request, then click Delete. Only requests that haven't been sent to the master Group Wise system and have the "Waiting to be Sent" status can be deleted. If you've already sent a request to the master GroupWise system, you cannot cancel the request. Retrieving Items That Were Not Completely Downloaded If you set size limit restrictions or specified Subject Line Only when you downloaded items, you might have items in your Remote Mailbox that are only partially downloaded. These are sometimes called ghosted items. 1 Select the items in your Remote Mailbox. 2 Click Accounts, then click Retrieve Selected Items. 3 To connect immediately to your Online Mailbox, click Connect Now. or To create the request but not send it, click Connect Later. This way, you can wait until you have several requests and connect later. Using Remote Mode 247 Using Busy Search in Remote Mode If you want to perform a busy search on users in a POP3 or IMAP4 account that supports the CAP protocol, you must first add a CAP account on the CAP tab in the Accounts dialog box. For information, see “Adding a CAP Account to GroupWise (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111. You do not need to add a CAP account if you are searching on users in a GroupWise system. 1 Create a new appointment. 2 To select the first possible meeting day, click a then click a date. 3 Click Busy Search on the toolbar. Busy Search ES m Start Busy Search To begin the Busy Search immediately, press 'Connect Now". To start the Busy Search the next Connect Later | time you connect, press Connect Later’. m Connecting: From: Default Location - To: 15551112222 _Lonfigue...| 4 To immediately connect to your master GroupWise system and search for available times, click Connect Now. or To search for available times later, click Connect Later. Clicking Connect Later creates a busy search request, but doesn't send the request to the master GroupWise system. You can save your appointment as a draft item in the Work In Progress folder until you are ready to send it. When you're ready to check appointment times later, click Busy, then click Connect Now. 5 When the Choose Appointment Time window appears, click Auto-Select for the first available meeting time. Click Auto-Select until the best available time is displayed, then click OK. or Click the Available Times tab, click an available time, then click OK. 6 Complete the appointment, then click Send on the toolbar. If you're disconnected before all schedule information returns from a busy search, clicking Busy again lets you update the information from the original busy search request. 248 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Filtering the System Address Book for Your Remote Mailbox The system address book is usually large, because it contains information for your entire organization. If you don't need all the information in the system address book when using GroupWise away from your office, use System Address Book Filter to retrieve only the user addresses, resource addresses, and public groups you need from the GroupWise system. For example, the filter statement, Dept [ ] Marketing, instructs Group Wise to retrieve all addresses with "Marketing" in the Department column in the Address Book. This way you can contact anyone from your Marketing department while you're traveling. You should also retrieve system address book information before leaving your office to save downloading time and costs, especially if you're planning to travel to a location where you will incur long-distance phone charges. 1 If you're running GroupWise in Online mode, click Tools, click Hit the Road, type your Online Mailbox password, select a connection phone number if prompted, then click OK. or If you're running GroupWise in Remote mode, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click Group Wise Options. 2 Click System Address Book, then click Filter. System Address Book Filter | 2) x! Filter Include entries where ... Clear | 3 Click an Address Book column in the first drop-down list. For example, click Dept to search for addresses from a specific department. 4 Click the operator drop-down list, click an operator, then type your search criteria in the box or click a value, if provided. For example, click [ ], then type Accounts to search for addresses from the Accounts department. Use the operator that is most appropriate for your search. Your search criteria, such as a person's name or a subject, can include wildcard characters such as an asterisk (*) or a question mark (?) Filter is not case sensitive to the criteria you type. 5 To add more filter conditions, click the last drop-down list, then click And. 6 After specifying all filter conditions, read the text beginning with "Include entries where..." as you create your filter. This summarizes how your filter will work. 7 Click OK, then click Connect. For more information on operators see “Using Filter and Rule Operators” on page 192. Using Remote Mode 249 Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox Use Delete and Empty and Manage Library Size to remove items from your Remote Mailbox. This section contains the following topics: + “Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox” on page 250 + “Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library” on page 250 Deleting Items from Your Remote Mailbox In Remote mode, you can delete items, retract items, and empty the Trash the same way you would in the Online mode. 4 Click the item in your Mailbox. 2 Click Edit, then click Delete. 3 If you're deleting an outgoing item, click one of the available options. 4 To free up disk space, click Edit, then click Empty Trash. This permanently removes all deleted items from your Remote Mailbox. The next time you connect to your master GroupWise system, the changes in your Remote and Online Mailboxes will automatically synchronize. You can turn off this synchronization by changing the delete options in Remote Properties. See “Changing Remote Delete Options” on page 244. Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library Deleting files from your Remote Library Disk Space Management will not remove them from the Master Library. It will also not remove the document references for the deleted documents. The files are removed only from the computer where you have your Remote Mailbox, freeing disk space for you. 1 In Remote mode, click Tools, then click Manage Library Size. 2 Click the documents you want to delete, then click Delete. 3 When you’re done, click Close. If you delete an In Use document, the status of the document in the Master Library is reset to Available the next time you connect to your Online Mailbox. Configuring Your Remote Connections When you run GroupWise in Remote mode, you can connect to your Online GroupWise system through a modem connection, a network (direct) connection, or a TCP/IP connection. When you use Hit the Road to set up your Remote Mailbox, Group Wise creates the appropriate connections based on how you are currently running GroupWise. You can create new connections as well as change or delete existing ones. This section contains the following topics: + “Connections” on page 251 + “Creating a Modem Connection” on page 252 + “Creating a TCP/IP Connection” on page 253 250 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Connections + “Creating a Network Connection” on page 254 + “Copying a Remote Connection” on page 254 + “Editing a Remote Connection” on page 254 + “Deleting a Remote Connection” on page 255 + “Specifying Your Remote Location” on page 255 You can switch between connection types if there are no pending requests on the connection you are switching from. For example, if you're retrieving and sending items with a network connection and you disconnect before the transmission is complete, you should not switch to a modem connection to process the requests. Complete the original requests with the original connection. This section contains the following topics: + “Modem Connections” on page 251 + “TCP/IP Connections” on page 251 + “Network (Direct) Connections” on page 251 + “Connection Status” on page 251 + “Connection Log” on page 252 Modem Connections TCP/IP Connections When you connect with a modem connection, you dial in to your Online GroupWise system over a phone line. You’ll need to set up dialing information for each remote location. For example, in a hotel you often need to dial 9 to access an outside line, but at home you don’t. Each of these situations would require a separate remote location. For more information about setting dialing properties for each remote location, see your Windows documentation. TCP/IP connections use an IP address and port to connect to your Online GroupWise system. If you use a toll-free Internet provider while you're away from your office, you can avoid phone charges by using a TCP/IP connection. In addition, you don't need to exit an Internet connection and hang up the phone to connect to your Online GroupWise system via a modem connection. You can use the same Internet connection to connect to your Online GroupWise system. Network (Direct) Connections Connection Status When you're at the office, you can run GroupWise in Remote mode with a network connection. A network connection is useful for quickly retrieving large amounts of information, such as your system address book. When you use Hit the Road to update your Remote Mailbox before leaving the office or when you send and retrieve items remotely, the Connection Status window displays. This window lets you monitor the information transfer between your Online GroupWise system and your Remote Mailbox. To display detailed connection information, use Show Log. To display the number of requests the Online GroupWise system needs to process, use Requests. To stop the information transfer anytime, use Disconnect. Using Remote Mode 251 In addition to the Connection Status window, the icon in the Windows taskbar lets you know the status of your connection. Icon Means g You are connected. SS You are disconnected. Oe You are sending items. +2 You are receiving items. Connection Log Use the Connection Log to display connection information and to troubleshoot connection problems. This log includes information about connection time, error messages, and so forth. GroupWise uses three Connection Log files to log the connection information: remotel.log, remote2.log, and remote3.log. GroupWise uses the next log file each time you run GroupWise in Remote mode. Creating a Modem Connection Contact your system administrator for your gateway's phone number, login ID, and password. 1 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click GroupWise Options. 2 Click Configure, click Connect To, then click New. 3 Make sure Modem is selected, then click OK. Modem Connection 12 1x] General | Advanced | Connection name: I m Phone Number Country Code: AreaCode: Telephone Number: [United States of America [1] y] | | — Gateway settings Gateway login ID: | Password... | Cancel | 4 In the Connection Name box, type a description. 5 Click the country code, then type the area code and phone number for the gateway to your Group Wise system. 6 Type the gateway login ID. 252 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 7 Click Password, type the gateway password, click OK, retype the password, then click OK. 8 Click the Advanced tab. |Modem Connection 9 Ifyour modem requires a script, click Edit Script, then specify the necessary When Given and Respond With commands. To save the script without changing its filename, click Save, then click Close. or To save the script with a new filename, click Save As, then click Close. 10 To retrieve an existing script file, click [es | select the script file, then click Open. 11 Click a disconnect method. 12 In the Attempts box, specify the number of times to redial if the line is busy. 13 In the Retry Interval box, specify the time interval between each redial attempt. 14 Click OK, then click Close. Creating a TCP/IP Connection 1 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click GroupWise Options. 2 Click Configure, click Connect To, then click New. 3 Click TCP/IP, then click OK. TCP/IP Connection Using Remote Mode 253 4 Type a descriptive name for the TCP/IP connection. 5 Type the IP address and port information provided by your system administrator. Instead of an IP address, you can also type the DNS (Domain Name System) host name in the IP Address box. Check with your system administrator. 6 Click a disconnect method, click OK, then click Close. Creating a Network Connection 4 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click GroupWise Options. 2 Click Configure, click Connect To, then click New. 3 Click Network, then click OK. Network Connection 27 xi] Connection name: | Path to post office: | Ll Cancel | — Disconnect method @ When all updates are received © Do not wait for responses C Manually 4 Type a descriptive name for the network connection. 5 Type the path to any post office directory in your GroupWise system. Contact your system administrator for the path to your post office. You can also connect to any post office in your GroupWise system to access your Online Mailbox. You don't need to connect to the post office containing your Online Mailbox. 6 Click a disconnect method, click OK, then click Close. Copying a Remote Connection 4 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click GroupWise Options. 2 Click Configure, click Connect To, click the connection, then click Copy. 3 Modify the connection, then click OK. Editing a Remote Connection 4 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click GroupWise Options. 2 Click Configure, click Connect To, click the connection, then click Edit. 3 Make the necessary changes, then click OK. 254 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Deleting a Remote Connection 4 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click GroupWise Options. 2 Click Configure, click Connect To, then click the connection. 3 Click Delete, then click Yes. Specifying Your Remote Location 1 Click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, click GroupWise Options, then click Configure. Novell GroupWise Properties 121 x] General | Server Connection | Advanced | Signature | Connecting from: [Default Location y] Ñ | Connecting to: [Modem St. Louis +1 (555) 111-2222 y] Connect To... | Connect using: [Standard Modem y] Modem... | ©) Gormect through my local area networks LEN] ©) Gonnect using my modemand phone line (©) Automatically cial O Prompt beoe dialing © Manually dial Dial-Up Networking connection to use: —— Hew Eroperties | 2 To select your remote location, click the Connecting From drop-down list, then click the remote location. 3 To change the dialing properties of your modem, click Connect From, specify changes in the Dialing Properties dialog box, then click OK. For help on specifying Dialing Properties, see your Windows documentation. Remote (Offline) Mode (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) Remote (Offline) mode is the same as Remote mode except that connections are not made automatically. Working offline is beneficial when you are working on a disconnected laptop and do not need to connect, and also when you want to reduce charges for online time. Any feature that requires a connection, for example to the GroupWise system or to an IMAP4 account, is not available in Remote (Offline) mode (see “Using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 18 for more information). Using Remote Mode 255 Working Offline 4 Click File, then click Work Offline. This will change you to Remote (Offline) mode, which never automatically connects. If you want to connect to your accounts, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click the account. A message displays asking if you want to stop working offline. After you click Yes, your mode is changed to Remote mode and a connection is made. After the connection has completed, you can return to Remote (Offline) mode by clicking File, then clicking Work Offline. 256 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using Caching Mode Caching mode stores a copy of your network mailbox, including your messages and other information, on your local drive. This allows you to use GroupWise® whether or not your network or Post Office Agent is available. Because you are not connected to the network all the time, this mode cuts down on network traffic and has the best performance. A connection is made automatically to retrieve and send new messages. All updates are performed in the background so your work is not interrupted. You should use this mode if you have enough disk space on your local drive to store your mailbox. Several users can set up their Caching Mailboxes on a single shared computer. 4% Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox = (01 x) File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | @& Address Book a | Ef New Mail + ÉNewappt ~ rNewTask + Y | | fal | E - = = | Y + ren ~ ras] att Barnar otes from last project meeting 149: Trash Matt B: d Notes f last project ti 1/7/2003 5:49:35 PM Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM Sophie Jones Core Team Meetinq 1/16/2003 9:00:00 AM z Z | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Total: 18 ¿2 Mailbox Show: All Categories > ® Sophie Jones | From Subject te # | Al of [7] W) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM Sent Items je] Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesday by 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM © E] Calendar = I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM 3) Contacts = El El Documents : | Y Checklist © Alfons Skoczylas Alfons' question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM A Work In Progress El Alfons Skoczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM H-8 Ej Cabinet El Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM a 2% If you run Caching Mode and Remote Mode on the same computer, the same local mailbox (also called the Caching Mailbox or Remote Mailbox) can be used to minimize disk space usage. For information about Remote mode, see Chapter 9, “Using Remote Mode,” on page 239. If disk space is limited, you can restrict the items that are downloaded to your local mailbox. You can specify to get the subject line only or specify a size limit. Your system administrator can specify settings that do not allow you to use Caching mode or that require you to use only Caching mode. This section contains the following topics: + “Caching Features” on page 258 ¢ “Setting Up Your Caching Mailbox” on page 258 ¢ “Synchronizing Your Caching Mailbox with Your Online Mailbox” on page 258 + “Deleting Items in Your Caching Mailbox” on page 259 + “Opening a Different Version of a Document in Your Caching Mailbox” on page 259 + “Viewing Pending Requests” on page 260 + “Connection Status” on page 260 Using Caching Mode 257 Caching Features Most GroupWise features are available in Caching mode, with the exception of subscribing to other users’ notifications. Setting Up Your Caching Mailbox Setting up a Caching Mailbox requires enough disk space (either on your local hard drive or another network drive) to store all the data in your mailbox. 1 2 Make sure Group Wise is installed on the computer where you want to set up your Caching Mailbox. Click File, click Mode, then click Caching. or Click Caching on the drop-down list above the Folder List. $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox = =O) x} File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | @& Address Book a | Ef New Mail ~ Ef New Appt ~ rNewTask + Y | g A-| fA - | Y - rer - > AE Show: All Categories» | [From (sube ate _____([ ol ($ Sophie Jon Y (9 Sophie Jones Osma 5 Online Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/2/2003 8:28:44 PM Sen Claudia Wong Project status report due Wednesday by 1/3/2003 10:03:00 AM © 5 as Remote I forgot to mention... 1/3/2003 2:03:06 PM onig HE] Doc G Proxy... Y Checklist Alfons Skoczylas Alfons' question about HHY Technology 1/7/2003 5:47:44 PM [A Work In Progress Alfons Skoczylas Another question 1/7/2003 5:47:56 PM H- 8 Cabinet Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM © Trash Matt Barnard Notes from last project meeting 1/7/2003 5:49:35 PM Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM Sophie Jones Core Team Meeting 1/16/2003 9:00:00 AM xl | Connection Failed -- check status window for detail | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 Total: 18 % Type the path for your Caching Mailbox, then click OK. Make sure you have a password on your Online Mailbox. Group Wise automatically updates the Caching Mailbox with an image of the Online Mailbox. The initial update or "priming" should not be interrupted until it is complete. You will be prompted to restart Group Wise to change to the Caching Mode. After the Caching Mailbox is primed, you may want to run GroupWise in Caching Mode without changing modes from Online to Caching. Group Wise automatically starts in the mode that it was last in. You can also open your Mailbox in any mode and select Caching from the Mode drop-down list. Synchronizing Your Caching Mailbox with Your Online Mailbox Use the following steps to update or synchronize your Caching Mailbox items, rules, addresses, documents, and settings with your Online Mailbox. 1 2 3 To synchronize items, click Accounts, click Send/Retrieve, then click Novell Group Wise. To synchronize rules, click Tools, click Rules, then click Refresh. To retrieve addresses from an address book, click Tools, then click Address Book. 258 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Select the system address book, click View, then click Retrieve System Address Book. To retrieve your personal address books, click Personal Address Books. 4 To specify that the system address book, your personal address books, and rules be downloaded to your Caching Mailbox on a regular basis, click Accounts, click Account Options, click your GroupWise account, click Properties, click Advanced, then select and specify the number of days in the Refresh Address Books and Rules Every field. 5 To update all of the items in your Caching Mailbox at one time, click Tools, then click Retrieve Entire Mailbox. Updating your entire Caching Mailbox can take a lot of time and bandwidth (just like the initial "priming" of your Caching Mailbox) and monopolize resources in your client and at the server. You should use this complete synchronization sparingly, as in the case of suspected database corruption of your Caching Mailbox. If you have documents in your Mailbox, marking a document as In Use prevents others from modifying the document. If you don’t mark a document as In Use, someone can edit it while you have the copy in your Caching Mailbox. If you then edit the document and return it to the Master Library, your document is saved as a new version and the edits are not saved to the other version. If you don't plan to edit a document, don't mark it In Use. When you exit an In Use document, you're asked to send the document to the Master Library and mark it as Available. If you're done with the document, the document should be marked Available to allow others editing access to it. Deleting Items in Your Caching Mailbox In Caching mode, you can delete items, retract items, and empty the Trash the same way you would in the Online mode. 1 Click the item in your Mailbox. 2 Click Edit, then click Delete. 3 If you're deleting an outgoing item, click one of the available options. 4 To free up disk space, click Edit, then click Empty Trash. This permanently removes all deleted items from your Caching Mailbox. Changes in your Caching and Online Mailboxes will automatically synchronize. Opening a Different Version of a Document in Your Caching Mailbox 1 Click a document in your Caching Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Version List. Where to search | 24 x] Select the libraries you would like GroupWise to search, Master Libraries | Using Caching Mode 259 3 Click Remote Libraries to display the versions you previously retrieved into your Caching Mailbox. or Click Master Libraries to display the versions available in your master GroupWise system. If you chose to search the Master Libraries, you can connect to your GroupWise system immediately or save the search request until you are ready to connect later. 4 Click the versions you want to open in the Versions list box. 5 Click Actions, then click Open. Viewing Pending Requests Whenever you perform an action that requires information to be sent from your Caching Mailbox to your Online Mailbox, GroupWise creates a request that is placed in the Pending Requests list. When you connect to your GroupWise system, all the requests are sent to your Online Mailbox. Use Pending Requests to check for outstanding requests. 1 Click Accounts, then click Pending Requests. Pending Requests to Online Mailbox HE Requests: Request Status Date Requested Retrieve Library Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:35PM New Document Reference Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:36PM Create document reference Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:36PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Update Item Waiting to be Sent 4/28/01 5:39PM Last connection: 3/13/01 4:41PM In Caching mode, GroupWise immediately uploads send requests and other important messages. If a Caching request hasn't been processed yet, you can delete it by clicking the request, then clicking Delete. Only requests that haven't been sent to the GroupWise system and have the "Waiting to be Sent" status can be deleted. If you've already sent a request to the Group Wise system, you cannot cancel the request. Connection Status By default, the Connection Status window is not displayed in Caching mode, but you can display it by clicking Account, then clicking Show Status Window. 260 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using Newsgroups You can view and post newsgroup items from GroupWise®. Newsgroups are similar to bulletin boards on the Internet. You can find newsgroups about almost any topic. Newsgroups are similar to Group Wise shared folders, except instead of sharing information within your department or company, you can share information with anyone on the Internet. To use newsgroups, you must have access to an NNTP server. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will give you the correct server information and login name (if necessary). You can also search the Internet for a list of free NNTP servers that you can use. This section contains the following topics: + “Adding a News Account” on page 261 + “Deleting a News Account” on page 262 + “Subscribing to a Newsgroup” on page 262 + “Posting a New Discussion to a Newsgroup” on page 263 + “Replying to a Message in a Newsgroup” on page 263 + “Adding a Signature to All Newsgroup Items You Send” on page 264 + “Changing the Display Name for Newsgroup Postings” on page 264 + “Updating the Local Newsgroup Folder” on page 264 + “Deleting an Item in a Newsgroup from Your Group Wise Item List” on page 265 + “Collapsing or Expanding All Threads in a Newsgroup” on page 265 + “Performing a Search on a Newsgroup Server” on page 265 + “Marking Items in a Newsgroup According to Your Interests” on page 265 + “Indenting Newsgroup Reply Text with a Specific Character” on page 265 + “Specifying Download Settings for Individual Newsgroups” on page 266 Adding a News Account 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the News tab, then click Add. 3 Type an account name, then click Next. The name can be anything you want. The name you type will display next to the folder in your Folder List. Using Newsgroups 261 Create News (NNTP) Account [x | Your Internet Service Provider will give you the correct server information and login name [if necessary]. You may also add a name to be used for the From text when you post to a news group. News [NNTP] server: T My server requires authentication Login name: | Password: | E-mail address: [hwong DEVELOPMENT.PROVOT From name: JH arry Wong < Back Cancel | 4 Type the name of the News (NNTP) server. To use newsgroups, you must have access to an NNTP server. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will give you the correct server information and login name (if necessary). You can also search the Internet for a list of free NNTP servers that you can use. 5 Ifthe server requires authentication, click My Server Requires Authentication, then fill in the Login Name and Password boxes. 6 Fill in the E-Mail Address and From Name boxes, then click Next. 7 Click Connect Through My Local Area Network (LAN). or Click Connect Using My Modem and Phone Line, click a dialing option, then click a connection in the Dial-Up Networking Connection to Use list box. 8 Click Next. 9 Type a folder description, position the folder in the Folder List, then click Finish. Deleting a News Account 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the News tab, click the account you want to delete, then click Remove. 3 Click Yes. Subscribing to a Newsgroup 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the News tab, click an account, then click Newsgroups. 262 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Close | Add | Remove | Properties | Set Default General Options | Mail News | Account Type Incoming Server | News A... News (NNTP] news.usr.com O Takway News (NNTP) www.talkway.com 3 Click a newsgroup. or Type a search term, click Search, click a newsgroup, then click Subscribe. To unsubscribe to a newsgroup, repeat Step 1 and 2, click the Subscribed tab, click a newsgroup, click Unsubscribe, then click Yes. Posting a New Discussion to a Newsgroup 1 Right-click the newsgroup, then click New Discussion. 2 Type a subject. 3 Type a message. 4 To change the newsgroup you are posting to or to post to additional newsgroups, click Newsgroups. Press F1 in the Select Newsgroups dialog box for more information. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Post on the toolbar. You cannot retract an item posted to a newsgroup. If there is a problem posting an item to a newsgroup (for example, the NNTP server reports an out- of-disk-space error), your message is saved in your Work in Progress folder so that you can try to post it again later. Replying to a Message in a Newsgroup 1 Right-click the item in the Item List, then click Reply. 2 Click a Reply option. For more information about each option, click 2], then click an option. 3 Click OK. 4 Type a reply. 5 To change the newsgroup you are posting to or to post to additional newsgroups, click Newsgroups. Press Fl in the Select Newsgroups dialog box for more information. 6 Click OK. 7 Click Post on the toolbar. You camnot retract an item posted to a newsgroup. If there is a problem posting an item to a newsgroup (for example, the NNTP server reports an out- of-disk-space error), your message is saved in your Work in Progress folder so that you can try to post it again later. Using Newsgroups 263 Adding a Signature to All Newsgroup Items You Send Click Accounts, then click Account Options. Click the News tab, click Properties, then click the Signature tab. Click Signature or Electronic Business Card (vCard). ah OQ ND = If you selected Signature, type the text you want as the signature in the Signature box. This signature is different from the one you can create for regular Group Wise messages or for IMAP or POP3 accounts. 5 Click Automatically Add to add a signature to every item you post. or Click Prompt Before Adding to give you the choice whether or not to add a signature to each item you post. 6 Click OK. Changing the Display Name for Newsgroup Postings 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the News tab, then click General Options. Internet Account General Settings 4 ax General | Display name: D Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts every fs minute(s} D Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts at startup I Hang up when Send/Retrieve IV Warm of unsent messages at exit T Use ICAL when sending appointments via SMTP N° Maximum line length in NNTP postings 76 | I Indent NNTP reply text using: E 3 Type a display name. 4 Click OK. Updating the Local Newsgroup Folder 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the News tab, then click General Options. 264 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 Click Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts Every check box, then specify how often you want to update the folders’ contents. 4 Click the Send/Retrieve All Marked Accounts at Startup check box to update the folders’ contents when you start GroupWise. 5 Click OK. Deleting an Item in a Newsgroup from Your GroupWise Item List 1 Right-click the item, then click Delete and Empty. Deleting a newsgroup item from your GroupWise Item List does not delete the item from the news server. You cannot delete an item posted to a newsgroup. To redisplay the item in your GroupWise Item List, right-click the newsgroup in the Group Wise Cabinet, then click Reset. Collapsing or Expanding All Threads in a Newsgroup 1 Right-click the newsgroup, then click Collapse All Threads. or Right-click the newsgroup, then click Expand All Threads. Performing a Search on a Newsgroup Server 1 Right-click the newsgroup, then click Search on Server. 2 In the first drop-down list, click the field you want to search, type the search words in the Contains text box, then click OK. 3 Double-click an item in the GroupWise Find Results dialog box to read the item. Marking Items in a Newsgroup According to Your Interests 1 Right-click the newsgroup item, click Mark Thread, then click Watch, Read, or Ignore. You can then filter messages based on thread status to see only the messages containing your postings. Indenting Newsgroup Reply Text with a Specific Character 1 Click Accounts, then click Account Options. 2 Click the News tab, then click General Options. 3 Select Maximum Line Length in NNTP Postings. 4 Select Indent NNTP Reply Text Using, then specify a character in the text box. The default character is ">". 5 Click OK. Using Newsgroups 265 Specifying Download Settings for Individual Newsgroups The download settings for an NNTP account are specified in Accounts > Account Options > News > the account > Properties > Advanced. Follow this procedure to change the download settings for an individual newsgroup in the NNTP account. 1 Right-click the newsgroup folder, then click Properties. 2 Click the NNTP tab. 3 Deselect Use Download Settings from Account. 4 Select options in the Override Account group box. 5 Click OK. 266 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Sending Secure Message (S/MIME) GroupWise® works with security software you have installed to send secure items. This section contains the following topics: + + + “Secure Message Concepts” on page 267 “Digitally Signing or Encrypting an Item” on page 269 “Digitally Signing or Encrypting All Items” on page 269 “Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority” on page 270 “Selecting a Security Service Provider” on page 271 “Selecting a Security Certificate for Digitally Signing Items” on page 271 “Searching for Recipient Encryption Certificates Using LDAP” on page 271 “Selecting the Method Used for Encrypting Items” on page 272 “Checking If the Digital Signature of an Item Was Verified” on page 273 “Viewing Security Certificates You Have Received and Changing the Trust” on page 273 “Viewing Your Own Security Certificates” on page 273 “Importing or Exporting Security Certificates” on page 274 Secure Message Concepts The security features described in this section are available only if you have installed one of the following security providers: + Entrust* 4.0 or higher. You must install an Entrust client from Entrust Technologies Inc. You must also have an Entrust security certificate issued by your administrator. Microsoft* Base Cryptographic Provider version 1.0 or higher. If you have a Windows 95/98/ 2000/ME workstation, this is installed when you install Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher. If you have a Windows NT* workstation, this is installed with Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 3. You can update this provider by installing Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher. You must also obtain a security certificate from an independent Certificate Authority. Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider version 1.0 or higher. If you have a Windows 2000 workstation, you must install Microsoft's Windows 2000 High Encryption Pack before installing Internet Explorer 5.5 or later. You can download this service pack from Microsoft's Web site (http://www.microsoft.com/downloads). If you have a Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT 4.0 workstation with Service Pack 3, the enhanced encryption module is installed when you install a 128-bit version of Internet Explorer. You must also obtain a security certificate from an independent Certificate Authority. Sending Secure Message (S/MIME) 267 Adding Security You can add security to the items you send by digitally signing them and/or encrypting them. When you digitally sign an item, the recipient is able to verify that the item was not modified en route and that it originated from you. When you encrypt an item, you are able to ensure that the intended recipient is the only one who can read it. When you sign or encrypt items using Group Wise, the recipients can read the items with any other S/MIME-enabled e-mail product. To find out more about S/MIME and S/MIME products, see S/ MIME Central (http://www.rsasecurity.com/standards/smime/index.htm). Security Certificates A security certificate is a file that identifies an individual or organization. Before you can send secure items, you must obtain a security certificate. If you are using Entrust, you must use an Entrust certificate. If you are using a Microsoft security provider, use your Web browser to obtain a certificate from an independent Certificate Authority. See http://www.novell.com/groupwise/ certified. html (http://www.novell.com/groupwise/certified.html) for a list of Certificate Authorities and detailed instructions for obtaining a certificate. You can also use LDAP to search for a security certificate. You use your security certificate to digitally sign items you send. You use other users' public security certificates to verify digitally signed items they send to you. To be able to encrypt an item and have the recipient user be able to decrypt it, you must have already received the user's public security certificate. An element of this security certificate, called the public key, is used to encrypt the item. When the recipient opens the encrypted item, it is decrypted with another element from the security certificate, called the private key. There are two ways to obtain a user's public security certificate: + The user can send you a digitally signed item. When you open the item, you are prompted to add and trust the security certificate. ¢ The user can export his or her public certificate, save it to a diskette, and deliver it to you. You then import the public certificate. Receiving a Secure Item Secure items are marked in your Item List with the following icons: Icon Description R Signed item à Encrypted item Q Signed and Encrypted item Security Service Providers Depending on the security software you have installed, you can select different security service providers for the items you send. For example, your organization might require you to use one security service provider for work items because of a preferred encryption method, but you might want a different security service provider for sending personal items. The security options available depend on the security service provider you select. 268 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Advanced Information Group Wise is compatible with the S/MIME version 2 and 3 specification. The security service providers that GroupWise supports have common encryption algorithms such as RC2 and RC4. When digitally signing an item, GroupWise hashes the item into a message digest using the standard algorithm SHA-1. The message digest is distributed with the item being sent. Digitally Signing or Encrypting an Item To be able to encrypt an item and have the recipient be able to decrypt it, you must have received the recipient's public security certificate. 1 Make sure you have a security certificate and that you have selected the security service provider you would like to use in Security Options. Open an item view. Click the To box, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat for additional users. Click e to digitally sign the item. Click [3] to encrypt the item. Type a subject and message. NO oF BR WO N Click Send on the toolbar. If you receive a Recipient Certificate Not Found message when you attempt to send the item, one of the following is true: 1) You are trying to encrypt an item for a recipient and don't have his or her public certificate, 2) The e-mail address in the public certificate does not match the recipient's e-mail address, or 3) There is no e-mail address in the recipient's public certificate and the recipient's e-mail address cannot be verified. If 1) is true, you need to obtain the recipient's public security certificate. If 2) or 3) is true, click Find Certificate to locate the recipient's certificate. Digitally Signing or Encrypting All Items 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Send Options tab. Sending Secure Message (S/MIME) 269 Password | Notify | Proxy Access Send Options | 1d to complete routed item r Select a security service provider Name: [Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1.0 y] Secure item options — — Sign digitally J Encrypt for recipients Advanced options | 3 Select Sign Digitally or Encrypt for Recipients. 4 Click Advanced Options, then make selections. Click 21, then click an option for more information about each option. 5 Click OK twice, then click Close. Obtaining a Security Certificate from a Certificate Authority If you are using Entrust, you obtain an Entrust certificate from the system administrator. These instructions apply to other security providers. 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Certificates. 3 Click Get Certificate. Your Web browser will launch and display the Novell® GroupWise Web page, which contains a list of Certificate Authorities. This is only a partial list; GroupWise supports a wide variety of Certificate Authorities. 4 Select the Certificate Authority you want to use, then follow the instructions on the Web site. 5 If you used Internet Explorer to obtain the certificate, the certificate is available in GroupWise. If you used Netscape to obtain the certificate, you need to export or back up the certificate from Netscape* (see the Netscape documentation for how to do this), then import the certificate to GroupWise. For more information, see “Importing or Exporting Security Certificates” on page 274. 6 In GroupWise, click Tools, click Options, double-click Security, then click the Send Options tab. 7 Select Microsoft Base Cryptographic Provider or Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider from the Name drop-down list under Select a Security Service Provider. Select the appropriate security service provider based on the encryption strength of the certificate you are using. The encryption strength of a certificate depends on the encryption 270 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide strength of the browser used to obtain the certificate. For example, if you have Internet Explorer with 128-bit encryption installed, the encryption is high, and will only work with Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider. 8 Click OK. 9 Double-click Certificates, click the certificate you want to use, then click Set as Default. 10 Click OK, then click Close. Selecting a Security Service Provider 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Send Options tab. 3 Select a security service provider from the Name drop-down list. 4 Click OK, then click Close. The security service provider you select takes effect as soon as you log in to the provider (if login is required). The options and encryption methods available depend on the security service provider you have selected. Selecting a Security Certificate for Digitally Signing Items If you are using Entrust, there is only one security certificate. These instructions apply to other security providers. 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Certificates. 3 Click the certificate name. 4 Click Set As Default. 5 Click OK, then click Close. Searching for Recipient Encryption Certificates Using LDAP Before you can use an LDAP directory service to search for security certificates, you must add the LDAP directory service to your GroupWise Address Book. For more information, see “Adding a Directory Service to an Address Book” on page 212. 4 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Security. 2 Click the Send Options tab. 3 Click Advanced Options. 4 Select Search for Recipient Encryption Certificates in the Default LDAP Directory Defined in LDAP Address Book. 5 Click OK, click OK, then click Close. Sending Secure Message (S/MIME) 271 Selecting the Method Used for Encrypting Items 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Security, then click the Send Options tab. 3 Click Advanced Options. Click 21, then click an option for more information about each option. Advanced Security Options ES m Encrypted item Vu oo J Search for recip yp defined in LDAP Address Book JRc2 (40 bits) y] Broadcast my preferred encryption algorithm in signed item as: [RC2 (40 bits] y] It LDAP directory Default encryption algorithm: rm Signed item JV Send the message portion in clear text format (clear signing) IV Include my Certificate Authority's certificates r Certificate revocation IV Check incoming/outgoing security item for revoked certificates M am if revocation server is offline |” Warn if there is no certificate revocation information in certificates S/MIME compliance check © Do not check certificate for S/MIME compliance © Check certificate for compliance with S/MIME version 2 (© Check certificate for compliance with S/MIME version 3 Cancel | In the Encrypted Item box, the encryption algorithm drop-down lists are scrollable and include all encryption algorithms that are supported by the version of the Web browser installed on the workstation where you are running the GroupWise client. The following list is a sample: + 3DES (168 bits) + DES (56 bits) + RC2 (128 bits) + RC2 (40 bits) + RC2 (50 bits) + RC2 (54 bits) + RC4 (40 bits) 4 Make selections in the Encrypted Item group box. 272 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 5 Click OK twice, then click Close. The available encryption methods depend on the security service provider you have selected. Checking If the Digital Signature of an Item Was Verified 1 Open a digitally signed item that you received. 2 Click File, then click Security Properties. 3 Click the tabs to view information about the security certificate that was used. The digital signature is verified when you open the item. If there are any concerns about the certificates that sign the item, a warning or an error will display immediately and the status bar of the item will display "Untrusted". If the digital signature was not verified, the security certificate might be invalid or the message text has been changed since the item was sent. Viewing Security Certificates You Have Received and Changing the Trust 4 Click Contacts in the Folder List. You can also open the Address Book. 2 Double-click a contact, then click the Certificate tab. 3 Click a certificate, then click View Details. If you initially did not trust a recipient's security certificate and want to trust it, open a digitally signed item from the recipient, click the security certificate, click Modify Trust, click a trust option, then click OK. If you no longer want to trust a recipient's security certificate, click the security certificate, click Remove, then click Yes. When you remove a recipient's security certificate from the list, it is removed from your certificate database. If you receive an item using that security certificate in the future, it will be considered unknown. Viewing Your Own Security Certificates 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Certificates. 3 Click a certificate, then click View Details. If you have multiple security certificates, the default security certificate is indicated by a check mark. To change the default, click a certificate, then click Set As Default. You can change the name of your security certificate by clicking Edit Properties, then editing the text in the Certificate name box. The certificate name is reflected in the list and is not stored in the actual certificate. (This is not available when using Entrust.) Sending Secure Message (S/MIME) 273 Importing or Exporting Security Certificates When you export your security certificate with the private key to a file, a password is required to protect the exported file. You can use the exported file as a backup copy, or you can import the file on another workstation. If another user obtains the file and its associated password, he or she will be able to digitally sign items in your name, and will be able to read encrypted items you receive. When you export your public certificate, you can send it to another user. The other user than can import your public certificate and be able to send you encrypted items. 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Certificates. 3 Click Import or Export. Certificate file to import: | Browse... | Enter password: ———_________ JV Allow export of private key in the future [ Set strong private key protection Cancel | or Click Certificate Authorities' Certificates, then click Import or Export. 4 Type a filename, including the path. You can also click Browse to find the certificate file, click the filename, then click Save or Open. 5 If required, type your certificate password. 6 Click OK. 274 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Creating and Working with Documents GroupWise® Library lets you manage all your documents from your Mailbox. This section contains the following topics: + “Managing Your Documents in GroupWise” on page 275 + “Creating Documents” on page 279 + “Organizing Your Documents” on page 282 + “Importing Documents into a GroupWise Library” on page 284 + “Sharing Documents” on page 289 + “Publishing Documents to the Web with WebPublisher” on page 292 + “Viewing the History of a Document” on page 295 + “Checking Out Documents” on page 296 + “Checking In Documents” on page 299 + “Deleting Documents” on page 301 + “Copying Documents” on page 303 + “Saving Documents” on page 304 + “Opening Documents” on page 306 + “Storing Multiple Versions of a Document” on page 307 + “Managing Groups of Documents” on page 309 + “Viewing Documents When Your Network or GroupWise Is Unavailable” on page 328 + “Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications” on page 330 + “Returning Documents to the Library” on page 334 + “Replacing a Document with a File from Backup” on page 336 Managing Your Documents in GroupWise In GroupWise, your documents display as items in your Mailbox and folders along with your mail messages, tasks, appointments, and so on. Creating and Working with Documents 275 $ô Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox E File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | E address Book Ba | É New Mail + Ef New Appt + GeyNewTask + A | FE fl - | ma © | SS + Erorward + 0 2 Mailbox Show: All Categories ($) Sophie Jones [> From [subjee [Date _____ | 9 89 [Malbox]181 1 Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM dl Sent Items @ Sophie Jones Core Team Meeting 1/16/2003 9:00:00 AM El Calendar @1 Sophie Jones Lunch Meeting 1/17/2003 12:30:00 PM H a e 4 Alfons Skoczylas Sharing of Address Book ‘Team AM 1/22/2003 5:26:40 PM Y checklist w) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/27/2003 4:24:52 PM A Work In Progress w) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/27/2003 4:25:08 PM + E Cabinet Els Mike Palu Fwd: January Spreadsheet 1/27/2003 4:29:06 PM © Trash Ele Mike Palu i 130: a Sophie Jones ©| Preparing to Send/Retrieve all marked accounts | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Total: 21 You can select a document reference to create, delete, check out, check in, open, move, or copy the corresponding document. In addition, GroupWise Library makes it easy to maintain multiple versions of a document, determine who has access to a document, and share a document with others. This section contains the following topics: + “Storing Documents in Libraries” on page 276 + “Understanding Document References” on page 277 + “Specifying Document Properties” on page 278 Storing Documents in Libraries If your system administrator has set up libraries and enabled document management, all of your documents are stored in a library in GroupWise. GroupWise assigns a unique number to each document. This number identifies the document and makes it easy to find. You can look up a document in GroupWise Library by its document number much like you can look up a book in a library by its catalog number. In each library, the documents are compressed and encrypted. This saves disk space and maintains the security of documents because it makes it impossible to view the contents of documents outside of GroupWise. Before you can access any of the documents in a library, you must first have rights to the library. Your system administrator determines which people have access to each library. After you have imported or created a document in the GroupWise Library, you can access that document only from GroupWise. This keeps your documents secure. If you need to share the document with a user who does not have access to GroupWise, you can attach the document reference to a mail message and send it to that user, or you can click File, then click Save As to save the document in an external file, outside the Group Wise Library. In either case, the file is not updated with any changes made to the document in Group Wise and is not controlled by the sharing rights assigned in GroupWise. 276 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Specifying a Default Library The default library is where all your documents are stored and the library where Find searches for documents. 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the library you want to use as a default. 3 Click Set Default, then click OK. Understanding Document References The document items that appear in your Mailbox (and other folders) are only references that point to the actual documents in the library. 4% Novell GroupWise Caching - Mailbox 2 F1 File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | & Address Book a | Ef New Mail ~ Ef New Appt ~ GiyNewTask + A | ita Ed -| a - | Y + Giroward + 0 P Mailbox Show: All Categories | [From [sube tte | ( Sophie Jones 9 89 Maibox]() @] Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM Sent Items © Sophie Jones Core Team Meeting 1/16/2003 9:00:00 AM E Calendar el Sophie Jones Lunch Meeting 1/17/2003 12:30:00 PM al a ESE GS Alfons Skoczylas Sharing of Address Book ‘Team AM 1/22/2003 5:26:40 PM Z Checklist m) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/27/2003 4:24:52 PM [A Work In Progress w) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/27/2003 4:25:08 PM H-8 Ej Cabinet Els Mike Palu Fwd: January Spreadsheet 1/27/2003 4:29:06 PM © Trash Els Mike Palu Please review 1/27/2003 4:30:25 PM ©| Preparing to Send/Retrieve all marked accounts | Mailbox Size: 0% | Selected: 1 | Total: 21 Document references are created when you create a new document, import a document, copy a document, select a document from the results of a Find, or select File, click New, then click Document Reference. To see document references in your Mailbox or folder, you must have a display setting selected that includes documents and posted items. You can select a reference to check out, check in, open, view, copy, or delete the corresponding document, depending on the rights you have. Multiple document references can point to the same document. For example, each employee in a company could create a reference to the employee handbook. This section contains the following topics: + “Sharing Document References with Other Users” on page 277 + “Document References and Remote/Caching Modes” on page 277 Sharing Document References with Other Users If you are the author of a document or if you have sharing rights to the document, you can post the document reference in a shared folder and make it available to all users who have access to the folder. Document References and Remote/Caching Modes If you use Remote or Caching mode, updating your Remote or Caching Mailbox always gives you all of your document references, unless you choose to have none. You can use the document references to retrieve copies of the documents into your Remote or Caching Mailbox. Creating and Working with Documents 277 Specifying Document Properties Every document in GroupWise must have a set of attributes associated with it, such as the author's name, the creation date, and the document type. These attributes are called document properties. The document property information is used for finding and categorizing documents. You can use the Document tab in Properties to view version information for the specific version of a document, view the document activity history, and control sharing of the document with other users. Document | Version | Sharing | Activity Log | Library: PRv2-1-LIB1 Document number: 37151 Subject: Project 9991x Notes Document type: [Document | = Author: [Meg Desposoro = ě H Creator: Meg Desposorio Date created: 10/17/02 2:41:43 PM Official version: 2 Current version: 2 Status: Available Cancel | You can determine which fields display on the Document tab in Properties and customize their size and order using the options in the Library Setup Properties dialog box. To open this dialog box, click Tools, click Options, double-click Documents, then click Properties. This section contains the following topics: + “Specifying a Default Value for a Document Properties Field” on page 278 + “Understanding Document Types” on page 279 Specifying a Default Value for a Document Properties Field A default value is information (author, subject, etc.) that is automatically inserted in the corresponding document property field for every document you add to the selected library. You can specify default values for the document property fields that can be edited. The default values are used when you create a new document or import a document into the selected library. If no default values have been specified for Author and Document Type, GroupWise uses the creator's name as the author and Document as the Document Type. 4 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the library for which you want to specify default values. 3 Click Properties, then click the Document Defaults tab. 4 Click a field, then type the default value. For example, you could type your name as the default value for the Author field. 278 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide If you do not include a required field in the Selected Fields list box on the Property Configuration tab, you must specify a default value for the field here on the Default Values tab. Required fields are marked with an asterisk on the Property Configuration tab. Field names that are indented under another field are related to that field. For example, the "parent" field might be a project name and the "child" fields might be the sub-project names. If you want to specify a default value for a child field, you must first specify a default value for its parent field. 5 Click OK. Understanding Document Types When you create a document in GroupWise you must select a document type. The document type determines the life of the document in days. By default, a document's life is 365 days; however, your system administrator can specify a document life as long as 2.1 billion days. When a document expires, the document type determines whether the document is archived, deleted, or retained. Document expiration is based on inactivity. For example, if a document's life is 365 days, the document won't be archived or deleted until 365 days have passed since the last time it was viewed or opened. You can prolong the life of a document that is close to its expiration date by viewing or opening the document. This resets the document's expiration date. Creating Documents When you create a document in GroupWise, you are adding a document to the library. You can also add documents to the library by importing, copying, or checking in an existing document. When you create a new document using File > New > Document, GroupWise prompts you to select a template for the document. You can use an application's template, a Group Wise template, or a file on disk as the foundation for your new document. Templates Description Application Templates You can select an application to create a document based on the application's template file. The Applications list box lists all the applications that are registered as having templates in your Windows registry file. GroupWise Templates You can select GroupWise templates to use a document in the library as the foundation of a new document. You can make any document a template, and you can use these templates as the foundation for new documents. All documents have a document type (memo, expense report, letter, template, and so on). When document type is a template, the document appears in the Templates list. Files as Templates File templates are documents that are not in the library. You can select a file anywhere on your system and use it as a foundation for a new document. If a document already exists in the library and you just want to create an item for it in your Mailbox, click File, click New, then click Document Reference. You can also use Find to locate a document and then drag the document to your Mailbox or folder. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a Document Using an Application's Template” on page 280 Creating and Working with Documents 279 + “Creating a Document Using a GroupWise Template” on page 280 + “Creating a Document Using a File as a Template” on page 281 + “Making Any Document a Template” on page 282 + “Creating a Reference to a Document” on page 282 Creating a Document Using an Application's Template You can create a document using an application's default template. For example, you can select Word to create a new Word document. 4 Click File, click New, then click Document. 2 Click Select an Application, click the application you want to use as a template in the Applications list box, then click OK. The Applications list box contains all the applications that are registered as having templates in your Windows registry file. 3 Type a subject for the document. To specify additional information about the document, such as author or document type, click Properties after you type the subject. 4 Click OK. Creating a Document Using a GroupWise Template 4 Click File, click New, then click Document. New Document 121 x! s Dll a ae Cancel | C Select a file Templates library: [Manufacturing Library (Default) y] > Library where document will be stored: [Manufacturing Library [Default] y] 2 Click Select a GroupWise Template, then select a template in the list box. To select a template from a different library, click the library in the drop-down list. 3 Click OK. 280 = GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide New Document 4 Type the subject of the document, then click OK. To specify additional information about the document, such as author name or document type, click Properties after you type the subject. 5 Double-click the document reference in the current folder to open the new document. You can click Open Document Now to immediately open the document. Creating a Document Using a File as a Template 4 Click File, click New, then click Document. 2 Click Select a File. New Document Manufacturing Library (Default) ha 3 Type the name of the file you want to use as a template for the new document. You can also click the Browse button to find the file. 4 Click OK. 5 Type a subject. To specify additional information about the document, such as author name or document type, click Properties after you type the subject. 6 Click OK. Creating and Working with Documents 281 Making Any Document a Template All documents with the document type Template appear in the Templates list in the New Documents dialog box. 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 3 Inthe Document Type box, type template, then click OK. Creating a Reference to a Document If a document already exists in the library, you can create a reference for it in your Mailbox. 1 Click File, click New, then click Document Reference. Folders: Available Documents: (® Sophie Jones | From Subject ms Sophie Jones Final Test Plan & Sent Items Sophie Jones Final Test Plan E] Calendar m) Sophie Jones Final Test Plan E Contacts El HCP Info H-E] Documents (4 Checklist [A Work In Progress H-E) Cabinet 3 Trash >| Library: Document #: Version: Development Library (Default) y] | Current y] Cancel | Eind | 2 Inthe Library drop-down list, click the library that contains the document you want to access. 3 In the Document # box, type the document number. If you don't know the number of the document, you can use Find to locate the document (if the document has not been deleted) and create a reference to the document in your Mailbox or folder. 4 In the Version drop-down list, click the version you want the document reference to point to. 5 Click OK. Organizing Your Documents Your document references are organized in the Documents folder so you can locate them easily. Any document references you create or open will be added to the Documents folder; if you so specify, any document references you view or import will also be added. You can also specify that none of these actions adds a document reference to the Documents folder. The Documents folder can contain only documents. If any other type of item is moved to this folder by a GroupWise client older than version 5.5 (for example, from an older version of GroupWise Remote), the item will be deleted. The Documents folder contains, by default, your 20 most recent document references. You can change this number from 0 to 5000 document references. After the maximum number is reached, 282 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide the oldest document reference will be deleted. You can also delete document references from the Documents folder manually. Deleting a document reference does not affect the document itself. Find Results Folders The Documents folder has two Find Results folders. The Authored folder contains document references for all the documents for which you are the author. 44 Novell GroupWise - Mailbox ‘Ee Lx] File Edit View Actions Tools Window Help | Œ Address Book Bao | EE New Mail + ÉD New Appt ~ ÉrNewTask + Y | E fl | A - | Y ~ reply + > Jf Mailbox Show: All Categories €» ® Sophie Jones E From [subjee te [4] KA & [Maibox][8] Martha de la Torre Is anyone looking to carpool? 1/7/2003 5:48:45 PM Sent Items Matt Barnard Notes from last project meeting 1/7/2003 5:49:35 PM E Calendar Matt Barnard Project Meeting 1/9/2003 10:00:00 AM a aia Sophie Jones Core Team Meeting 1/16/2003 9:00:00 AM a Authored Sophie Jones Lunch Meeting 1/17/2003 12:30:00 PM ra Default Library Alfons Skoczylas Sharing of Address Book ‘Team AM 1/22/2003 5:26:40 PM Z Checklist Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/27/2003 4:24:52 PM A Work In Progress Sophie Jones Final Test Plan 1/27/2003 4:25:08 PM Q EJ Cabinet Mike Palu Fwd: January Spreadsheet 1/27/2003 4:29:06 PM Y Trash Mike Palu Please review 1/27/2003 4:30:25 PM Sophie Jones HCP Info 1/27/2003 4:31:21 PM EE LEBacreDnn | Selected: 1 | Total: 21 À The Default Library folder contains document references for all the documents you have access to in the default library. You can change or delete the Author and Default Library folders. You can create other document Find Results folders according to your needs. For example, you can create a Find folder for a specific library, subject, author, or document type. See “Creating a Find Results Folder” on page 143. This section contains the following topics: + “Specifying When Document References Are Added to the Documents Folder” on page 283 + “Changing the Maximum Number of References in the Documents Folder” on page 284 Specifying When Document References Are Added to the Documents Folder 1 Right-click the Documents folder, then click Properties. 2 Click the Documents tab. Creating and Working with Documents 283 Documents Properties | 24 x! General] Display Documents | The Documents folder displays the last several documents that you have touched as a user. You may determine how many of those documents are to be displayed and when they are to be added to this folder. Once you reach the document display count, each time a new document is added to this folder the oldest document will no longer be displayed. Document display count [50 = -Actions that add documents to the folder — FN Create [Y Open TO View Import Cancel | 3 Click the check boxes to select which actions will add document references to the Documents folder. By default, the Create and Open actions are checked. This means document references will be placed in the Documents folder when you create or open them. Selecting View as an action will place any document references in the Documents folder that were viewed with the Viewer, not with the QuickViewer. 4 Click OK. Changing the Maximum Number of References in the Documents Folder After the maximum number is reached, an additional document reference added to the Documents folder will cause the oldest document reference to be deleted. 1 Right-click the Documents folder, then click Properties. 2 Click the Documents tab. 3 Type a number in the Document Display Count text box. The maximum number you can specify is 5000. If you don't want any document references placed in the Documents folder, type 0. 4 Click OK. Importing Documents into a GroupWise Library You can import documents created outside of GroupWise into GroupWise Library. This section contains the following topics: + “Specifying Files to Import” on page 285 + “Choosing an Import Method” on page 285 + “Importing Documents Using Quick Import” on page 285 + “Importing Documents Using Custom Import” on page 286 284 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Specifying Files to Import Importing Folders When you specify the documents you want to import, you can select individual files, or you can select one or more folders and import all the documents in those folders. This makes it easy to import large numbers of documents without having to select each document individually. When you import a folder, Group Wise imports the documents in the folder; however, Group Wise does not import the folder itself or the folder structure. The folders aren't imported because documents in GroupWise Library are not stored in a folder structure, and so the folders have no meaning in the library. When you import documents in a folder, you can specify whether you want to import all, some, or none, of the documents that are contained in the folder's sub-folders. In addition, you can specify which types of files you want to import by specifying the file extensions in the File Name Filter box. Choosing an Import Method By default, GroupWise performs a Quick Import and copies the documents you specify into your default library. If you want to have more control over how your documents are imported, deselect the Quick Import check box. This lets you perform a custom import. When you perform a custom import you can specify the following information: + Whether you want to copy or move the documents into the library. ¢ The filename and location of a log file for import status messages and errors. ¢ The library where you want to store the documents. + Whether or not you want to create document references in a folder. If you create document references, you can specify which folder in the Folder List you want to store them in. + Whether you want to specify document properties for each document individually or have GroupWise create document properties using the default values. + Whether or not the current filenames will be used as part of the document subject. Importing Documents Using Quick Import 4 Click File, then click Import Documents. Select Files to Import x| Files to import: Novell, B ae Add Individual Files... | Add Entire Directory... | F Quick import (Recommended) Copies documents to your default library and creates document teferences in the folder you specify. Cancel Creating and Working with Documents 285 2 Click Add Individual Files, select the files you want to import, then click OK. (To select multiple files to import, Ctrl+click each additional document.) or Click Add Entire Directory, then select the folder or folders that contain the documents you want to import. Type a file extension, such as *.doc or *.wpd, in the File Name Filter text box if you want to import specific types of files from the selected folder or folders, then click OK. 3 Click Next. Create Document References x| C Import without displaying documents in a folder N ove | I. © Display documents in folder Puf <= Select folder for document references: Sent Items E Calendar +-M E) Cabinet | 2-0 © Documents O Remote Design Docs (9] Authored ( Default Library 3) Contacts OM Checklist O Junk Mail [1] OF work In Progress xl < Back Cancel | 4 Ifyou want GroupWise to create document references for each document, click Display Documents in Folder, then click the folder where you want to store the document references. or Ifyou do not want to create document references, click Import without Displaying Documents in a Folder. Ifyou don't create document references during the import, you can create them later using File > New > Document Reference. 5 Click Next. 6 Click Finish to begin the import. GroupWise copies the documents into the specified library. You can also import a document by dragging it from a window or your desktop to a GroupWise folder. Importing Documents Using Custom Import 1 Click File, then click Import Documents. 2 Click Add Individual Files, select the files you want to import, then click OK. (To select multiple files to import, Ctrl+click each additional document.) or Click Add Entire Directory, then select the folder or folders you want to import. Type a file extension, such as *.doc or *.wpd, in the File Name Filter text box if you want import specific types of files from the selected folder or folders, then click OK. 3 Make sure Quick Import is deselected. 286 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 Click Next. Import Method Lx] Novell. E C Move files into Groupwise <= TF Store all status and error messages in a log file so that import can run without stopping. C:AWINDOWS\TEMP\import. txt 5 Click Copy Files into GroupWise to place a copy of the files in the library and leave the original files in the source location. or Click Move Files into Group Wise to move the files into the library and delete the original files from the source location. 6 To save any import errors in a log file, click Store All Status and Error Messages in a Log File, then specify a filename. 7 Click Next. Select Library |x| Select Library: Tools Library Manufacturing Library [Default] < Back Cancel | 8 Click the library you want to store the documents in. 9 Click Next. Creating and Working with Documents 287 Create Document References xj € Import without displaying documents in a folder N ove l I. @ Display documents in folder Select folder for document references: Sent Items E Cabinet E Calendar 2-0 [El Documents i Remote Design Docs f f (9] Authored ø ( Default Library AS 3) Contacts OM Checklist O Junk Mail [1] OF work In Progress >| < Back Cancel | E 10 If you want GroupWise to create document references for each document, click Display Documents in Folder, then click the folder where you want to store them. or If you do not want to create document references, click Import without Displaying Documents in a Folder. 411 Click Next. Set Document Property Options [x | Novell. Puf <= @ Set properties using default values Modify Default Values... | NW Use current filename as the document subject < Back Cancel | 12 To specify properties for each document you are importing, click Prompt for Properties of Each Document Individually. or To have Group Wise specify properties based on the default property values specified in Document options, click Set Properties Using Default Values. 13 Ifyou want to specify different default values for this import session only, click Modify Default Values, specify the values, then click OK. 14 Click Next. 15 Click Finish to begin the import. 288 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Sharing Documents When you create or import a document in GroupWise you can specify whether you want to share the document with other users. If you share a document, you can specify which users or groups you want to share the document with and what rights each user will have. In addition, you can specify which sharing rights, if any, you want GroupWise to automatically apply to all the documents you create. When you create a new document, GroupWise inserts <General User> and <Creator> in the Share List. By default, general users (all users with access to the library) do not have any rights to the document and the author and creator have full rights to the document. You can use the <General User> entry to grant the same rights to all users who have access to the library, and you, assuming you're the author of the document, can use the <Creator> entry to limit the rights of the creator. For example, your secretary creates several blank performance review documents in the library, one for each employee in your team, and specifies you as the author of each document. This gives you full rights to each document because you're the author; however, this also gives your secretary full rights to each document because he created them. Of course, you don't want your secretary to be able to read everyone's performance reviews, so you could use the <Creator> entry to remove your secretary's rights to the performance review documents. This section contains the following topics: + “Specifying Users Who Can Share the Document” on page 289 + “Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents” on page 290 + “Specifying Users' Rights to the Document” on page 290 + “Giving a User Rights for All Document Versions” on page 290 + “Giving a User Rights to a Specific Document Version” on page 291 + “Giving Users Rights to Modify the Sharing Settings for a Document” on page 292 + “Preventing Other Users from Accessing Your Document” on page 292 Specifying Users Who Can Share the Document You can use the options on the Sharing tab in Properties to give sharing rights to a document. You can use one of the following methods to give sharing rights: + You can click Not Shared to prevent other users from viewing, editing, or deleting the document. + You can click Shared With to select specific users and groups and specify sharing rights for each user or group. When a user tries to access a document, GroupWise checks the rights of the individual user. If the user doesn't have rights to the document, GroupWise checks for any rights the user inherits as a member of a group. If the user doesn't have rights to the document as a member of a group, Group Wise checks the rights given to <General User>. + You can click Shared With and then click Version Level Security to give users different rights for each version of the document. Creating and Working with Documents 289 Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents If you typically share your documents with the same user or groups, you can specify default sharing rights for all the documents you create. After you have specified default sharing rights, Group Wise applies these sharing rights to every document you create or import in the selected library. If you don't specify any default sharing rights, the documents you create or import are not shared, which means that only the author and the creator have rights to the document. Default sharing rights apply only to the documents you create in the selected library. If you create documents in multiple libraries, you must specify default sharing rights for each library. 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the library for which you want to specify default sharing rights. 3 Click Properties, then click the Sharing Defaults tab. 4 Click Shared With. 5 Inthe Name text box, type the name of the user or group you want to grant rights to, then click Add User. 6 Click the check boxes for the rights you want to grant to the selected user or group. 7 Click OK. Group Wise applies the default sharing rights to every document you create or import in the selected library. Default Sharing Rights and Proxy If a proxy creates a document in your Mailbox, the new document receives the default sharing rights the proxy specified in his or her Mailbox, not the default sharing rights you specified in your Mailbox. Default Sharing Rights and Remote You can specify default sharing rights in your Remote Mailbox; however, the default sharing rights you specify in Remote only affect the documents while they are stored in your Remote Library. Specifying Users’ Rights to the Document You can give users rights to view, edit, delete, or share a document. When you give users rights to share a document, they can put the document in a shared folder. You can also give users rights to modify the security settings for a document. To have Modify rights, a user must also have Edit rights. The rights you specify are for all versions of a document. If you want to specify different rights for each version of a document, click the Version Level Security button. When you grant users Edit or Delete rights, GroupWise automatically gives them View rights to the document. If users don't have View rights, they can't see the document in the results of a Find. Giving a User Rights for All Document Versions 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 290 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 Click the Sharing tab. Document | Version Sharing | Activity Log | Personalize | © Not shared xi of Shared with Name: Share list: Name ¿dd User | E Remove User | M View <Creator Access> Heather Sarmiento Fs for all versions for Heather Sarmiento F Edit Security View, Edit, Del, Shr, Mod <General User Access> Denied View FF Delete F Share I Modify security Version Level Security. Status: Available 4 Click Shared With. Cancel | 5 Inthe Name text box, type the name of the user or group you want to grant rights to, then click Add User. 6 Click the user's name in the Share List, then click the check boxes for the rights you want to grant to this user. 7 Click OK. Users must have Share rights to put the document reference in a shared folder. Giving a User Rights to a Specific Document Version You must be the author or creator of a document to grant access rights, or the author or creator of the document must grant you rights to modify security for the document. 4 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 3 Click the Sharing tab. 4 Click Shared With. 5 Inthe Name text box, type the name of the user or group you want to grant rights to, then click Add User. 6 Click the user's name in the Share List, then click Version Level Security. Version Level Security 24 x! Designate the security options for the selected name(s] on a version level Official version: Current version: Other versions: V View [ Edit M View I~ Edit V View I Edit F Delete T Delete F Delete Share T Share l Share OK | Creating and Working with Documents 291 7 Click the check box for each right you want the user to have for the version type, then click OK twice. Users must have sharing rights to put the document reference in a shared folder. Giving Users Rights to Modify the Sharing Settings for a Document You must be the creator or author of a document to grant rights to modify security settings. 4 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 3 Click the Sharing tab. 4 Click Shared With. 5 Inthe Name text box, type the name of the person or group you want to grant Modify Security rights to, then click Add User. 6 Click the user's name in the Share List, click Modify Security, then click OK. Preventing Other Users from Accessing Your Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 3 Click the Sharing tab. Document | Version Sharing | Activity Log | Personalize | CO Shared with Name: E | JE Share list: Security ] yi Edit, Del, Shr, Mod Status: Available Cancel | 4 Click Not Shared, then click OK. Publishing Documents to the Web with WebPublisher WebPublisher is a component of GroupWise WebAccess. GroupWise WebAccess is a product that provides users with GroupWise functionality in their Web browsers. Check with your system administrator to see if WebAccess and WebPublisher are available before attempting to publish documents. 292 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Composing a Document You can compose a document in over 250 document formats, and WebPublisher will convert it into HTML. When you make changes to the document, the changes are automatically reflected in the published document. To see the supported document formats, see the WebAccess guide on the GroupWise 6.5 documentation Web site (http://www.novell.com/documentation/lg/gw65/ index.html). GroupWise WebPublisher supports publishing documents in a variety of languages, but each document should contain only one language character set. For example, you could publish one document in Chinese and another in Hebrew, but you should not attempt to publish a document that contains both Chinese characters and Hebrew letters. Publishing a Document In order to publish a document, you must be the author of the document, or the creator of the document must give you rights to modify the document. Your system administrator has created one or more GroupWise WebPublisher user accounts and has granted them rights to specific libraries. These user accounts represent WebPublisher and do not have actual users associated with them. You publish documents in those specific libraries by sharing documents with one of the GroupWise WebPublisher users and granting that user view rights. Your system administrator can configure multiple GroupWise WebPublisher publishing sites. For example, he or she can configure an Internet publishing site for publishing to the World Wide Web, and can also configure an intranet publishing site for publishing to the corporate intranet. Check with your system administrator for information about available publishing sites. Find out if your system administrator has specified that documents shared with General User (all users who have access to the library) are automatically published. If this is specified, you will need to be careful not to share documents with General User that you do not want published to the Web. Locating and Viewing a Published Document Web users can locate and view your published documents three ways: + They can access the GroupWise WebPublisher site and then search for the document. To do this, they must know the IP address of the GroupWise WebPublisher site, the library the document is in, and a key word (such as the title). Contact your system administrator for the IP address and for library names (the library names in your GroupWise system may be different from the library names that display in WebPublisher). + You can locate the document, copy the complete URL, and send it to the users. + You can create a separate web page that contains links to your documents and supply users with that URL. Each document published with WebPublisher must be indexed before it can be seen on the publishing site. The Post Office Agent indexes documents at intervals set by the system administrator. If you use Find to search for your document in GroupWise and the document is found in its library, the document has been indexed. This section contains the following topics: + “Publishing a Document to the Web” on page 294 + “Unpublishing a Document from the Web” on page 295 Creating and Working with Documents 293 Publishing a Document to the Web Before you publish a document to the Web, make sure you meet all of the following prerequisites: + Check with your system administrator to see if GroupWise WebAccess and WebPublisher are available before attempting to publish documents. + Make sure you are the author of the document, or that the creator of the document has given you rights to modify the document. ¢ If you do not know the name of the GroupWise WebPublisher username on your system, ask your system administrator. If there is more than one GroupWise WebPublisher username, make sure you have the correct username for your publishing purposes. 1 Click the document reference for the document you want to publish. 2 Click File, click Properties, then click the Sharing tab. Document | Version Sharing | Activity Log | Personalize | C Not shared M Shared with Name: Add User | [EJ = Remove User | Share list: Name Security <Creator Access> View, Edit, Del, Shr, Mod <General User Access> Denied Heather Sarmiento View Rights for all versions for Heather Sarmiento M View WT Edit y Version Level Security Status: Available Cancel | 3 Click Shared With. 4 Type the name of the GroupWise WebPublisher user in the Name box, then click Add User. View rights for the official version are automatically granted to this user. 5 Click OK. If you want users to see a version other than the official version, you must specify the document and version number in the URL of the document. Locate the document and copy the complete URL. Modify the part of the URL that specifies Library ID-Document Number-Version. Send the modified URL to other users or use it to create links to your documents on a separate Web page you have created. Each document published with WebPublisher must be indexed before it can be seen on the publishing site. If you use Find to search for your document in GroupWise and the document is found in its library, the document has been indexed. 294 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Unpublishing a Document from the Web + Make sure you are the author of the document, or that the creator of the document has given you rights to modify the document. + Make sure you know the GroupWise WebPublisher username for the publishing site from which you want to unpublish the document. 1 Click the document reference for the document you want to unpublish. 2 Click File, click Properties, then click the Sharing tab. 3 Click the GroupWise WebPublisher username in the Share List. 4 Deselect View, then click OK. If you want to remove the document entirely, in addition to unpublishing it, delete the document from the library. Viewing the History of a Document You can use the activity log to view the activity history for a document. The activity log displays the date and time an activity occurred, the name of the user who performed the activity, the type of activity (opened, checked out, deleted, and so forth) and the document version affected by the activity. You can display the activities associated with the selected version of a document, or you can display the activities associated with all versions of a document. The most recent document activities display at the beginning of the list. Document activity is also logged when you're using Remote mode; however, you can only view remote activities from the activity log in your Remote Mailbox. This section contains the following topics: + “Viewing the Activity Log for Deleted Documents” on page 295 + “Viewing the Activity of a Document” on page 295 + “Viewing Who Has a Document Open or Checked Out” on page 296 Viewing the Activity Log for Deleted Documents When you delete a document, GroupWise keeps a copy of the activity log for that document. This makes it possible for you to view the events that took place before the document was deleted. In addition, the system administrator can use this information to restore specific versions of deleted documents. Viewing the Activity of a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 3 Click the Activity Log tab. Creating and Working with Documents 295 Document | Version| Sharing Activity Log | Personalize | C Show selected version @ Show all versions Activity log: Action Version < : 3 00 Sophie Jones Downloaded Version 3 1/27/2003 4:27: Sophie Jones Properties Updated 1/27/2003 4:27: Sophie Jones Security Modified 1/27/2003 4:27:22 Sophie Jones Security Modified 1/27/2003 4:27:22 Sophie Jones Security Modified 1/27/2003 4:27:22 Sophie Jones Made Official 1/27/2003 4:26:13 Sophie Jones Downloaded Version 1/27/2003 4:26:11 Sophie Jones Closed 1/27/2003 4:25:52 Sophie Jones Opened À Sophie Jones Downloaded Versior Sophie Jones Downloaded Versior Sophie Jones Created 1/27/2003 4:24: Sophie Jones Downloaded Version 1/27/2003 4:24: Sophie Jones Downloaded Version 1/27/2003 4:24:51 Sophie Jones Created 1/16/2003 2:05:27 Sophie Jones Downloaded Versior 1/16/2003 2:05:27 Sophie Jones Downloaded Version 14742003 3-37-37 F Sanhie.lanes Anninaded Version Status: Available OK | Cancel | 1/27/2003 4:25: 1/27/2008 4:25: Any document activity appears in the list box (check out, check in, delete, and so forth). Viewing Who Has a Document Open or Checked Out To view document activity, you must have View rights for the selected document version. 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Properties. 3 Click the Activity Log tab to view who has the document open or checked out. You can also view who has a document open by clicking the document reference, clicking File, clicking Properties, then clicking the Version tab. Checking Out Documents Use Check Out when you want to lock the documents you are working on for extended periods of time. For example, you can use Check Out to lock documents you want to work on when you are at home or away from the office. You do not need to use Check Out to lock a file every time you edit it. When you open a document, GroupWise marks the document as In Use, and it can't be edited by other users until you close it. When a document is checked out, it is locked in the library and other users can't modify it; however, they can view it if they have View rights. GroupWise copies the document to the check- out location you specify. The document remains locked in the library until you check it back in. You can select one or more documents to check out in the Main Window, and you can specify a different filename for each document you check out. You can specify a default check out location in the File Location tab in Environment options. This section contains the following topics: + “Checking Out a Document” on page 297 + “Checking Out Multiple Documents” on page 297 + “Viewing All the Documents You Have Checked Out” on page 298 + “Updating a Checked-Out Document Without Checking It In” on page 298 296 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Checking Out a Document 1 In your Mailbox, click the document reference for the document you want to check out. 2 Click Actions, then click Check Out. Check-Out 121 x] Check out method: Check Out Check out and copy document Close | Selected documents: Ver 3 (Current): Project 91J Notes Checked out filename: [E-C.htm Checked out location: [CAWINDOWS\TEMP\ E] I Report filename conflicts 3 Inthe Checked Out Filename text box, type a filename for the document. By default, GroupWise inserts the document number as the check-out filename. If you don't specify a different filename, make a note of the numbered filename so you can locate your checked-out document. 4 In the Checked Out Location text box, type the path to the location where you want to store the checked-out document. 5 Click Check Out. Changes you make to the checked-out document do not appear in the document in the library until you check the document back in or update it. Users can view the checked-out document in the library if they have View rights, but those with Edit rights cannot edit the document while it is checked out. Checking Out Multiple Documents 1 In your Mailbox, Ctrl+click the document references for the documents you want to check out. 2 Click Actions, then click Check Out. 3 In the Selected Documents list box, click a document reference. 4 In the Checked Out Filename text box, specify a check-out filename. Creating and Working with Documents 297 By default, Group Wise inserts the document number, version, and extension as the check-out filename. If you don't specify a different filename, make a note of the filename so you can locate your checked-out document. 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have specified check-out filenames for each document. 6 In the Selected Documents list box, Ctrl+click all the documents you want to check out. 7 Click Check Out. While the document is checked out, users who have View rights can look at the copy of the document in the library. Viewing All the Documents You Have Checked Out 4 Click Actions, then click Check In. 2 Click Show All Checked-Out Documents in Selected Library. Check-In El Check in method: Check in [Check in and move document y] MEET Close Check in as: 2 | [Checked out version y] Remove | Documents to be checked in: Ver 1: Department Teleworking Ver 3 (Official): Project 91J Notes List of documents C Show craneal list @ Show all checked out documents in selected library Select library: [Manufacturing Library (Default) y] Checked out location and filename: fe: \windows\temp\2435-C. htm Browse... | You can select a different library in the Select Library drop-down list to see the documents you have checked out in that library. Updating a Checked-Out Document Without Checking It In 1 In your Mailbox, click the document reference for the document you want to update in the library. 2 Click Actions, then click Check In. 298 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Checking In Check-In tr? xi] Check in method: L 1 and me ocument Close Check in and copy document Check in only Remove | Update without checking in Ver 3 [Official]: Project 91J Notes Check In [Check in and move document y] = m List of documents © Show onainal list @ Show all checked out documents in selected library Select library: [Manufacturing Library (Default) y] Checked out location and filename: [e \windows\temp\2435-C. htm Browse... | 3 Click the Check In Method drop-down list, then click Update Without Checking In. 4 Click Update. GroupWise updates the document in the library with any changes you have made to the checked- out document, but the document is not checked in. You can use Update Without Checking In if you are still in the process of editing a document but want to allow other users to view the changes you have made. Documents Use Check In to check in documents you have checked out. After you check in a document, the document is unlocked in the library and other users can modify it. You can check in individual documents, or you can check in multiple documents. The documents you check in can be in any location. Ifone or more checked-out documents are selected when you click Check In, GroupWise displays the selected documents in the Documents to be Checked In list box. If no checked-out documents are selected, GroupWise displays a warning and then displays all the documents you have checked out in the list. There are four check-in methods: Check-In Method What It Does Check In and Move Moves the document to the library and deletes it from the check-out location. Check In and Copy Copies the document back to the library and leaves a copy in the check-out location. Check In Only Checks in the document but does not update the document in the library with any changes you made to the checked-out version. Creating and Working with Documents 299 Check-In Method What It Does Update Without Updates the document in the library with any changes you have made, but does Checking In not unlock the document. When you check in a document, you can specify which version you want the document checked in as. There are three possible versions: Version to Check In What It Does Checked-Out Version Updates the version of the document that you are checking in. New Version Creates a new version of the document. New Document Creates a document and lets you specify new document properties for it. This section contains the following topics: + “Checking in a Document and Leaving a Copy in the Check-Out Location” on page 300 + “Checking in an Unchanged Document” on page 301 + “Checking in a Document and Deleting It from the Check-Out Location” on page 301 + “Checking In a Document and Making It a New Version” on page 301 Checking in a Document and Leaving a Copy in the Check-Out Location 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Check In. Check-In Check in method: [Check in and move document y] Check in as: [Checked out version y] Remove Documents to be checked in: Ver 1: Department Teleworking Close dll. Ver 3 (Official): Project 914 Notes m List of documents Chow craneal list @ Show all checked out documents in selected library Select library: [Manufacturing Library [Default] y] Checked out location and filename: fe \windows\temp\2435-C. htm Browse... | 3 Click the Check In Method drop-down list, then click Check In and Copy Document. 300 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 Click the Check In As drop-down list, then click a version. 5 In the Checked Out Location and Filename text box, specify the path and filename of the document you are checking in. 6 Click Check In. Checking in an Unchanged Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Check In. 3 Click the Check In Method drop-down list, then click Check In Only. 4 Click Check In. Group Wise checks in the document without saving changes made while the document was checked out. Checking in a Document and Deleting It from the Check-Out Location 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox for the document you want to check in. 2 Click Actions, then click Check In. 3 Click the Check In Method drop-down list, then click Check In and Move Document. 4 Click the Check In As drop-down list, then click a version. 5 In the Checked Out Location and Filename text box, specify the path and filename of the document you are checking in. 6 Click Check In. Checking In a Document and Making It a New Version 1 In your Mailbox, click the document reference you want to check in and make a new version. Click Actions, then click Check In. Click the Check In Method drop-down list, then click a check-in method. Click the Check In As drop-down list, then click New Version. a AO DN In the Checked Out Location and Filename text box, specify the path and filename of the file you are checking in. 6 Click Check In. 7 Type a description for the new version of the document. 8 Click OK. Deleting Documents When you delete a document from one of your folders, you can specify whether you want to remove the document reference from the folder, the selected version of the document, or all versions of the document. To delete the selected version or all versions of a document, you must have Delete rights for the document. See “Sharing Documents” on page 289 for more information about document rights. Creating and Working with Documents 301 When you delete the document from the folder, the reference is removed from the folder, but the document remains in the library. When you delete the document version from the library, the selected version of the document is removed from the library and the document reference is removed from the folder. When you delete all versions of the document in the library, all versions of the document are removed from the library and the reference is removed from the folder. When you drag a document reference to the Trash folder, the document reference is deleted, but the document in the library is not deleted. Deleting Documents According to Document Type You can delete documents in your folders, or you can let GroupWise automatically delete documents that have exceeded their defined document life. GroupWise removes documents based on the document type assigned to the document on the Document tab in Properties. Each document type has an expiration date and a expiration action associated with it. The system administrator defines the expiration date and action (delete or archive) when he or she creates the library. This section contains the following topics: + “Deleting Groups of Documents” on page 302 + “Deleting a Document Reference from Your Mailbox” on page 302 + “Deleting a Specific Version of a Document” on page 303 + “Deleting All Versions of a Document” on page 303 Deleting Groups of Documents You can delete a group of documents using the Mass Document Operations Wizard. To delete a group of documents, you must have Delete rights to each document, or you must have Manage rights and be a librarian for the library. For more information see “Managing Groups of Documents” on page 309. Deleting a Document Reference from Your Mailbox 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Edit, then click Delete. Delete 21x! C Delete selected version from library C Delete all versions of document from library __ Cancel | 3 Click Remove Document from Folder, then click OK. Only the document reference is deleted. The document in the library is not deleted, and any users with references to the document can still view, open, edit, or delete it, depending on their rights. You can re-create the reference if you need it again. 302 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Deleting a Specific Version of a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Version List. a Document #8 Version List - Project 91 Notes -ioj x! File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help [$429/8 |B ww + | Display [Version List Items +] €l x 3 Version3 04/28/03 01:59f Find results updated at 4:59PM on 4/28/03 (Selected: 1 Total: 3 2 Ab 3 Click the version you want to delete. 4 Click Edit, then click Delete. Deleting All Versions of a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Edit, then click Delete. 71x! elete selected version from library Delete all versions of document from library Cancel | 3 Click Delete All Versions of Document from Library, then click OK. Copying Documents You can copy documents and their properties to create similar documents. Copying a document creates a new document in the library. When you copy a document you can specify how you want to create document properties for the new document. You can specify properties manually for the document, or you can have GroupWise create properties for you using the values in the original document. Copying Groups of Documents You can copy groups of documents using the Mass Document Operations wizard. To copy a group of documents you must have View rights to each document, or you must have Manage rights and be a librarian for the library. For more information see “Copying a Group of Documents” on page 312. Creating and Working with Documents 303 This section contains the following topics: + “Copying a Document” on page 304 + “Copying a Document to Another Library” on page 304 Copying a Document 1 Click a document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Copy Document. Copy Document Eg Select library to copy to: @ Manually set properties for each document Automatically set properties using default values Cancel | 3 Select the method you want to use for creating document properties. 4 Click OK. Copying a Document to Another Library 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Copy Document. 3 Select the library to which you want to copy the document in the Select Library to Copy To drop-down list. 4 Select the method you want to use for creating document properties, then click OK. The information in the system fields (Document Type, Author, and Document Subject) is copied with the document to the new library. Saving Documents GroupWise Library provides a secure location for you to save your documents. Ifyou need to share a document with users who do not have access to GroupWise, you can save a copy of the document outside of the library. This section contains the following topics: + “Saving Items as Documents” on page 304 + “Saving Changes to a Document's Contents” on page 305 + “Saving Documents Outside of the GroupWise Library” on page 305 Saving Items as Documents You can save any of the items in your Mailbox as a document in the library. Items are saved in WordPerfect format, but with a .doc extension so that they can also be opened in Word. For more information, see “Saving an Item to Disk or to a GroupWise Library” on page 175. 304 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Saving Changes to a Document's Contents To save changes you have made to the contents of a document, use the Save feature in the corresponding application. The Save feature in your application functions differently depending on whether you are using an integrated or a non-integrated application. Saving Documents in Non-Integrated Applications If you are using non-integrated applications (all Windows 3.1 applications and many Windows 95 applications), you can't save the document as a new version from the application. To create a new version of the a document, you must create the new version in GroupWise before you open the document in the application. To make sure your changes are saved in the library, don't rename the document when you save it from within the application. Saving Documents in Integrated Applications If you are using an integrated application, GroupWise can integrate 1ts document management features with the application's Save As feature. When you select Save As in the application, you have the option of saving the document as a new version in GroupWise Library. In addition, you can select the GroupWise folder you want to save the document in. Saving Documents Outside of the GroupWise Library To share documents with users who do not have access to GroupWise, use Save As to make a copy of a document outside of the Library. When you use Save As, any changes you make to the saved document are not updated in the library. 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, then click Save As. Save 1 E3 ltems to save: Department Teleworking Policy Close | = [Save to Disk aie Save file as: [Department Teleworking Policy Current directory: [CANOVE LL\Groupwise Browse... | IV Report file name conflicts 3 In the Save File As text box, specify a name for the document. Creating and Working with Documents 305 4 Click Browse, specify the path to the location where you want the document saved, then click OK. 5 Click Save. Opening Documents When you double-click a document reference in your Mailbox or folder, GroupWise opens the document in the associated application. You can then edit the document. If you only have rights to view the document, you can open the document two ways: you can open the document as a read- only file in the application, or you can open the document in the GroupWise viewer. Group Wise sets the status of the selected version as In Use while you have it open. This status locks the selected document version and prevents other users from editing it while you have it open. When you exit the document, the In Use status is removed and the version is unlocked. If you want to lock a version of a document for multiple editing sessions, use Check Out. Check Out lets you copy the selected version of a document to another location, and it remains locked until you check it in. For more information, see “Checking Out Documents” on page 296. Opening Read-Only Documents If you don't have Edit rights to a document, you can open a read-only copy of the document in an application. This makes it possible for you to see graphics and layout elements which may not display correctly in the GroupWise viewer. If you have Edit rights to a document, read-only documents are also a useful way to view a document if it is marked In Use or if it is checked out. You can only open one read-only document at a time in each application. Opening Documents in Non-Integrated Applications If you are using non-integrated applications (most Windows 3.1 applications, MS-DOS* applications, and many Windows 95 applications), GroupWise copies the document back to the library when you close the application, not when you close the document. Opening Documents in Integrated Applications If you are using an integrated application, GroupWise can integrate the document management features with the application's Open and Save As feature. When you select Open in the application, a dialog box displays all the available document references in your Mailbox. You can select a document reference to open the document, or you can click the Select Document Using Application Dialog button to use the application's regular Open dialog box. Opening Documents in GroupWise Remote or Caching Modes If you are using Remote mode, you must manually mark the document version as In Use when you retrieve it from your Online Mailbox. When you exit the document, Remote prompts you to clear the In Use status. If you are using GroupWise in Caching mode and the GroupWise server is available, GroupWise automatically retrieves the document (giving you a chance to mark it In Use) when you choose to open a document. 306 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide This section contains the following topics: + “Opening a Document” on page 307 + “Opening Multiple Versions of a Document” on page 307 Opening a Document 1 Double-click the document reference in your Mailbox. If you do not have access to the application the document was created in, GroupWise prompts you to specify an application. You might be able to open the document in a related application. Opening Multiple Versions of a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Version List. a Document #8 Version List - Project SIJ Notes -Iof xi File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | Display [Version List Items +] | =] Q | Ss bd | 0 "eg “6 | 5 Version# Ver Description 3 01:58 Elx 3 Version3 04/28/03 01:59 [Find results updated at 4:59PM on 4/28/03 (Selected: 1 [Total 3 aE y 3 Select the versions you want to open in the Version list box. 4 Click Actions, then click Open. Storing Multiple Versions of a Document You can store multiple versions of a document in GroupWise. Each document reference in your Mailbox points to a single document version. You can view information about a specific version of a document on the Version tab in Properties. You can manage (open, check out, check in, and so forth) document versions in the Version List dialog box. There are three categories of document versions in GroupWise: Current Version The most recent revision of the document. Official Version The version you designate as official. When you designate an official version, you can grant users different access rights to the official version than you grant them to all other versions of the document. For example, you can grant all users rights to view the official version of the employee handbook, but grant only yourself rights to view and edit all other versions of the handbook. If you Creating and Working with Documents 307 do not specify an official version of the document, the current version is considered to be the official version. In the Item List, a star (#) displays next to the document reference for the official version. Specific Version A version of a document that is referenced directly by its version number. In the Item List, the number symbol (#) displays next to the document reference. You can grant different access rights for each version of the document. For example, you can grant all users on your system View rights to the official version and grant specific users View rights to the current version. This section contains the following topics: + “Creating a New Version of a Document” on page 308 + “Viewing Version Information for a Document” on page 308 + “Specifying the Official Version of a Document” on page 309 Creating a New Version of a Document 4 In your Mailbox, click the document reference for the document you want to create a new version of. 2 Click File, click New, then click Document Version. New Version 27 xi] Version description: F Open document now Cancel | Properties... | 3 Type a description for this version of the document, then click OK. The selected version and its properties are copied to a new version. Viewing Version Information for a Document 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click File, click Properties, then click the Version tab. 308 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Document Version | Sharing | Activity Log | Personalize | m Version 3 Description: Version 3 a l- Status: Available Creator: Sophie Jones Date created: 1/27/2003 4:25:08 PM Opened by: Sophie Jones Date opened: 1/27/2003 4:25:52 PM Current location: Current filename: Expiration date: 1/27/2004 Expiration action: Archive Eile extension: doc File Size: 12288 Status: Available Cancel | Specifying the Official Version of a Document To set the official version, you must have rights to modify security settings and the system administrator must have given you rights to set the official version of a document. If you don't specify an official version, GroupWise uses the current version as the official version. 1 Click the document reference in your Mailbox. 2 Click Actions, then click Version List. a Document #8 Version List - Project 91 Notes -ioi x] File Edit View Actions Tools Accounts Window Help | Display [Version List Items +] | =] Q | td | 40 | | Vial | Version# Version2 04/28/03 01:59 Elx 3 Version 04/28/03 01:59! [Find results updated at 4:59PM on 4/28/03 (Selected: 1 [Total 3 E ; 3 Click the version you want to mark official. 4 Click Actions, then click Mark Official Version. Managing Groups of Documents Whether you're a user responsible for twenty documents or a system administrator responsible for thousands of documents, you can use the Mass Document Operations Wizard to efficiently manage groups of documents. Using the wizard, you can perform all of the following tasks: + Move a group of documents to another library. Creating and Working with Documents 309 + Share a group of documents with another user. + Copy a group of documents. + Delete a group of documents. + Assign a group of documents to a new author. + Modify the properties (subject, document type, and so on) of a group of documents. This section contains the following topics: + “Preparing for a Mass Operation” on page 310 + “Selecting Documents for the Mass Operation” on page 310 + “Acting as the Librarian” on page 311 + “Copying a Group of Documents” on page 312 + “Moving a Group of Documents” on page 315 + “Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents” on page 318 + “Changing Sharing for a Group of Documents” on page 322 + “Deleting a Group of Documents” on page 326 Preparing for a Mass Operation Before you can perform a mass operation on a group of documents you must have sufficient rights to the documents. If you have Manage rights, you're called a librarian, and you can perform the mass document operations on all the documents in the library. If you're not a librarian, you can only perform mass document operations on the documents to which you have rights. The following table shows which rights you must have to perform each operation: Document Operation Move Copy Delete Share Assign documents to a new author Modify document properties Required Rights Requires View and Delete rights to the document, or you must be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Add rights to the destination library. Requires View rights to the document, or you must be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Add rights to the destination library. Requires Delete rights to the document, or you must be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Delete rights to the library. Requires Modify Security rights to the document, or you must be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Change rights to the library. Requires Edit and Modify Security rights to the document, or you must be a librarian for the library. You must have Edit rights, or be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Change rights to the library. Selecting Documents for the Mass Operation Before you begin the mass operation, you must specify which documents you want to include. There are four methods you can use to select documents: 310 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide + You can select the documents from a Find/Advanced Find dialog box in the Mass Document Operations Wizard. + You can select the documents from a Find by Example dialog box in the Mass Document Operations Wizard. + You can select the documents in a folder or your Mailbox before you open the Mass Document Operations Wizard. + You can specify the name of a file on disk that contains a list of document IDs. Previewing the Results of a Mass Document Operation When you use Find in the Mass Document Operations Wizard to specify which documents you want to move, copy, delete, or change, you can click the Preview button (on the last dialog box in the wizard) to see a list of the documents that will be moved, copied, deleted, or changed based on the criteria you specified in Find. This makes it possible for you to review these results and verify that the criteria are accurate and select the correct documents. If not, you can return to the wizard and modify the Find criteria to expand or limit the documents included in the operation. After You Perform a Mass Document Operation If you make any changes to the author or sharing rights of a document, the original author of the document receives a mail message that notifies him or her of the change. Using Mass Document Operations in Remote/Caching Modes IMPORTANT: The Mass Document Operations Wizard is not available in Remote or Caching mode. You can perform the same tasks on individual documents while you're in your Remote/Caching Mailbox, but not with groups of documents. Acting as the Librarian The system administrator can give users Manage rights to a library. When you have Manage rights, you are called a librarian, and you can perform mass document operations, such as changing document properties, moving documents, and so on, on all the documents in the library. When a librarian performs a search, the Find dialog box displays an extra option: Apply Librarian Rights. When selected, this allows the librarian to find any documents created by other users that might not have been explicitly shared with the librarian. However, the librarian cannot perform a full-text search when using this option. The librarian can see and modify all the properties of a document, such as author, creator, security, subject, document type, and so on, but the librarian can't see the content of the document. (To see the content of a document, the librarian must have View rights for that version of the document.) If the librarian makes any changes to the author or sharing rights of a document, the original author of the document receives a mail message that notifies him or her of the change. This prevents the librarian from giving unauthorized users access to a document. In addition to modifying the properties listed above, the librarian can also perform the following actions on all the documents in the library: + Delete a group of documents from the library. + Move or copy documents to a different library. + Change the document properties (author, document type, subject, an so on) of a group of documents in the library. Creating and Working with Documents 311 + Change the sharing rights to a group of documents in the library. Reset a document's status. + Use the GroupWise third-party APIs to generate reports on all the documents in the library. Librarian and Remote/Caching Modes The librarian can see all the properties of a document while in Remote and Caching mode; however, the librarian can't change the author or sharing rights of a document while he or she is using Remote or Caching mode. Librarian and Older Versions of GroupWise If a librarian accesses a library using an older version of the GroupWise client, such as Group Wise 5.1 or 5.2, he or she will not have librarian access to documents, because neither the Manage right nor the librarian role existed in earlier releases of GroupWise. Copying a Group of Documents You can copy groups of documents using the Mass Document Operations Wizard. To copy a group of documents you must have View rights to each document, or you must be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Add rights in the library to which you want to copy the documents. When you copy a group of documents, all versions of the document are copied. In the destination library, each copy of the document receives a new document number, but the document retains the same version number that it had in the source library. For example, if document #458 had a version one, two, and five in the Marketing library and you copy it to the Sales library, it would become document #459 (or whatever the next number is) in the Sales library, but it would still have a version one, two, and five. GroupWise copies all the document properties, including document activity and custom fields, to the destination library and stores them with the document; however, the custom fields will not display in Document Properties if the destination library doesn't contain the field. When you copy documents, document references are not updated. This section contains the following topics: + “Copying a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example” on page 312 + “Copying a Group of Selected Documents” on page 314 + “Copying a Group of Documents Listed in a File” on page 315 Copying a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 312 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide | Mass Document Operations al acess eras ony 2 In the Operation group box, click Copy. 3 Inthe Selection Method group box, click Use Find By Example To Select Documents, then click Next. | Find by Example I B B 4 In the Library drop-down list, click the library you want to search. 5 In each field, specify the information you want to look for. 6 Click Next. 7 Inthe Select Library To Copy Documents To list box, select the destination library, then click Next. Creating and Working with Documents 313 Select Library x| Select library to copy documents to: Tools Library < Back Cancel | 8 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be copied based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. 9 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Copy Operation to see the outcome of the move without actually copying the documents. If you are a librarian in the destination library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying or moving. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 10 Click Finish to copy the documents. Copying a Group of Selected Documents 1 In your Mailbox or folders, select the document references for the documents you want to copy. 2 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 3 In the Operation group box, click Copy. 4 Inthe Selection Method group box, click Use Currently Selected Documents, then click Next. 5 Inthe Select Library To Copy Documents To list box, click the destination library, then click Next. 6 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Copy Operation to see the outcome of the copy without actually copying the documents. If you are a librarian in the destination library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying. Allow 314 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 7 Click Finish to copy the documents. Copying a Group of Documents Listed in a File 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Copy. 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Documents Listed In A File. 4 Specify the name of the file that contains a list of documents you want to copy, then click Next. You can specify any text file (ASCII or ANSD) as the source file for a copy operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs. If you're creating a file, make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document per line. If the file you specify is a log file from a previous copy operation, you can click Process Errors Only and Group Wise processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session. 5 In the Select Library To Copy Documents To list box, click the destination library, then click Next. 6 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Copy Operation to see the outcome of the copy without actually copying the documents. If you are a librarian in the destination library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are copying. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 7 Click Finish to copy the documents. Moving a Group of Documents You can move a group of documents to another library using the Mass Document Operations Wizard. To move a group of documents, you must have View and Delete rights for each document you want to move, or you must be a librarian for the selected library. In addition, you must have Add rights for the destination library. The documents you select for the move operation can be stored in multiple libraries on different post offices. GroupWise moves all versions of the selected documents and all document properties, including document activity and custom fields. If the destination library doesn't contain one or more custom fields that exist in the source library, GroupWise moves the value for the custom field and stores it with the document in the new library; however, the value will not display in Document Properties until the system administrator adds that custom field to the destination library. This section contains the following topics: + “Notifying Authors and Users of Moved Documents” on page 316 + “Moving a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example” on page 316 Creating and Working with Documents 315 + “Moving a Group of Selected Documents” on page 317 + “Moving a Group Documents in a File” on page 318 Notifying Authors and Users of Moved Documents When the move is complete, GroupWise sends a message to you that contains a list of all the moved documents. In addition, GroupWise sends a message to the author of each moved document that shows the document's new location. If a user is the author of multiple moved documents, the message contains a list of all his or her moved documents and the new location of the documents. Other users, who are not authors of the document, are not notified that the document was moved. GroupWise automatically updates any document references to moved documents at the end of the move process. However, if a document reference is attached to a mail message, Group Wise does not update the reference. Instead, when a user clicks the attached document reference, a message displays that explains the document was moved and gives the new location of the document. Moving a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Move. Mass Document Operations x| Select the operation you want to perform. The operation will affect all versions of a document. r Operation C Change properties C Change sharing i C Copy move Delete r Selection method @ Use Find/Advanced Find to select documents Use Find by Example to select documents Use currently selected documents Use documents listed in a file Beck Cancel | 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Find By Example To Select Documents, then click Next. 316 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Find by Example [x | ltem type: Document Library: Manufacturing Library (Default) Document text: D A Document number: fo Subject: | Document type: D E Author: fo B Creator: |. O B Date created: | ü O Official version: fo Current version: PC I Find only official document versions < Back Cancel | In the Library drop-down list, click the library you want to search. In each field, specify the information you want to look for. Click Next. N © a A In the Select Library To Move Documents To list box, click the destination library, then click Next. 8 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be moved based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. 9 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Move Operation to see the outcome of the move without actually moving the documents. If you are a librarian in the destination library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are moving. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 10 Click Finish to move the documents. Moving a Group of Selected Documents 1 In your Mailbox or folders, select the document references for the documents you want to move. 2 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 3 In the Operation group box, click Move. 4 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Currently Selected Documents, then click Next. 5 Inthe Select Library To Move Documents To list box, click the destination library, then click Next. 6 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. Creating and Working with Documents 317 You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Move Operation to see the outcome of the move without actually moving the documents. If you are a librarian in the destination library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are moving. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 7 Click Finish to move the documents. Moving a Group Documents in a File 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Move. 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Documents Listed in a File. 4 Specify the name of the file that contains the list of documents you want to move, then click Next. You can specify any text file (ASCII or ANSI) as the source file for a move operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs. If you're creating a file, make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document per line. If the file you specify is a log file from a previous move operation, you can click Process Errors Only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session. 5 Inthe Select Library To Move Documents To list box, click the destination library, then click Next. 6 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Move Operation to see the outcome of the move without actually moving the documents. If you are a librarian in the destination library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents you are moving. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 7 Click Finish to move the documents. Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents As you manage your GroupWise documents, you often need to change the properties of several documents at the same time. For example, if an employee leaves the company, you might need to reassign all of his or her documents to another person, or if a new employee joins the company, you might need to give him or her access to several documents. You can use the Change Properties in the Mass Document Operations Wizard to efficiently perform these types of tasks (reassigning documents, changing document types, and so on) for groups of documents. You can change the subject, author, or document type for a group of documents. In addition, you can change the value of any custom fields defined in the library. The fields you can modify vary depending on the location of the documents you select for the mass change operation. If the documents you select are all stored in the same library, you can make changes to system fields (subject, author, and document type) and custom fields. If the documents you select are stored in 318 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide different libraries, you can modify only system fields. GroupWise imposes this restriction because the libraries you select might not contain the same custom fields. This section contains the following topics: + “Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example” on page 319 + “Changing the Properties for Selected Documents” on page 321 + “Changing the Properties for a Group of Documents in a File” on page 321 Changing the Properties of a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Change Properties. Mass Document Operations lA Eracess only 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Find By Example To Select Documents, then click Next. Creating and Working with Documents 319 Find by Example [Document 2 Manufacturing Library (Default) SS DM PE A 4 In the Library drop-down list, click the library you want to search. 5 In each field, specify the information you want to look for. 6 Click Next. 7 Specify new values for any of the document properties, then click Next. 8 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. 9 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually changing the documents. 320 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 10 If you are a librarian in your default library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. Click Finish to change the document properties. Changing the Properties for Selected Documents 1 oa bh ON In your Mailbox or folders, select the document references for the documents for which you want to modify properties. Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. In the Operation group box, click Change Properties. In the Selection Method group box, click Use Currently Selected Documents, then click Next. Specify new values for any of the document property fields, then click Next. Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents. If you are a librarian in your default library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. Click Finish to change document properties. Changing the Properties for a Group of Documents in a File 1 2 3 4 7 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. In the Operation group box, click Change Properties. In the Selection Method group box, click Use Documents Listed In A File. Specify the name of the file that contains the list of documents for which you want to change properties, then click Next. You can specify any text file (ASCII or ANSI) as the source file for a change properties operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs. If you're creating a file, make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document ID on each line. If the file you specify is a log file from a previous session, you can click Process Errors Only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during that session. Specify new values for any of the document properties fields, then click Next. Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. Creating and Working with Documents 321 You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents. If you are a librarian in your default library, you have two additional options on the Log page of Mass Document Operations. Validate Document Property Fields lets you choose whether or not to validate the property fields of the documents. Allow Documents With Validation Errors To Be Created or Updated lets you choose to bypass any validation errors. 8 Click Finish to change document properties. Changing Sharing for a Group of Documents You can give, modify, or remove a user's access to a group of documents. You can do this two ways: you can modify a user's rights in the existing Share List for the group of documents, or you can create a new Share List which will replace the existing Share List for each document in the group. This section contains the following topics: + “Modifying the Existing Share List” on page 322 + “Replacing an Existing Share List with a New Share List” on page 322 + “Changing the Sharing Rights for a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example” on page 322 + “Changing Sharing Rights for Selected Documents” on page 324 + “Changing Sharing Rights for Documents in a File” on page 325 Modifying the Existing Share List If you select Add New Users And Rights To The Selected Documents, you can add, remove, or change a user's rights to the group of documents without changing any of the rights you've given to other users. For example, you could grant a new employee rights to all the benefit documents in the library. This adds the new employee to the Share List for each document in the group, but it doesn't modify the rights of any of the other employees. If the user you want to add already has rights to one or more of the documents in the group, the rights you specify in the wizard will replace any previous rights this user had to the documents, but it will not reduce rights the user already has. For example, suppose you give Pam View rights for a group of documents which includes Document A, but Pam already has both View and Edit rights to Document A. In this case, GroupWise will give Pam View rights to all the documents in the group, including Document A, but GroupWise will not remove Pam's Edit rights to Document A. Replacing an Existing Share List with a New Share List If you select Replace Share List for Selected Documents, you can create a new Share List for each of the selected documents. This new Share List replaces the existing Share List, and only the users on the new Share List have rights to the selected documents. Changing the Sharing Rights for a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Change Sharing. 322 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide i Mass Document Operations E acess eros ony 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Find By Example To Select Documents, then click Next. Find by Example a m I ~ | El 4 In the Library drop-down list, click the library you want to search. 5 Ineach field, specify the information you want to look for. 6 Click Next. Creating and Working with Documents 323 @ Add new users and rights to selected documents C Replace share lists for selected documents Name: Share list: Name Security Remove User M Edit [> Delete hee Te) Modi security Version Level Security < Back Cancel | 7 Click Add New Users And Rights To Selected Documents to modify the existing Share Lists for each document in the group. or Click Replace Share Lists For Selected Documents to create a new Share List that will replace the existing Share List for each document in the group. 8 In the Name text box, type the name of the user for which you want to modify sharing, then click Add User. 9 In the Share List, click the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights. 10 In the Rights for All Versions group box, click the rights you want to give the user to the selected group of documents. 11 If you want to specify sharing rights for specific versions, click Version Level Security, specify the rights for each version, then click OK. 12 Click Next. 13 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. 14 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents. 15 Click Finish to modify the document sharing. Changing Sharing Rights for Selected Documents 4 In your Mailbox or folders, select the document references for the documents for which you want to change sharing rights. 2 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 3 In the Operation group box, click Change Sharing. 324 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 Inthe Selection Method group box, click Use Currently Selected Documents, then click Next. 5 To modify the existing Share Lists for each document in the group, click Add New Users And Rights To Selected Documents. or To create a new Share List that will replace the existing Share List for each document in the group, click Replace Share Lists For Selected Documents. 6 In the Name text box, type the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights, then click Add User. 7 In the Share List, click the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights. 8 In the Rights for All Versions group box, click the rights you want to give the user to the selected group of documents. 9 If you want to specify sharing rights for specific versions, click Version Level Security, specify the rights for each version, then click OK. 10 Click Next. 11 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. 12 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents. 13 Click Finish to modify the document sharing. Changing Sharing Rights for Documents in a File 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Change Sharing. 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Documents Listed In A File. 4 Specify the name of the file that contains a list of the documents for which you want to change sharing rights, then click Next. You can specify any text file (ASCII or ANSI) as the source file for a change sharing operation as long as the file contains a list of document IDs. If you're creating a file, make sure that each document ID is at the beginning of a line and that there is only one document per line. If the file you specify is a log file from a previous operation, you can click Process Errors Only and GroupWise processes only the documents that generated errors during the previous session. 5 Click Add New Users And Rights To Selected Documents to modify the existing Share Lists for each document in the group. or Click Replace Share Lists For Selected Documents to create a new Share List that will replace the existing Share List for each document in the group. 6 In the Name text box, type the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights, then click Add User. Creating and Working with Documents 325 7 In the Share List, click the name of the user for whom you want to modify sharing rights. 8 In the Rights for All Versions group box, click the rights you want to give the user to the selected group of documents. 9 Ifyou want to specify sharing rights for specific versions, click Version Level Security, specify the rights for each version, then click OK. 10 Click Next. 11 Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be modified based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. 12 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing the Operation to see the outcome of the operation without actually modifying the documents. 13 Click Finish to modify the document sharing. Deleting a Group of Documents You can delete a group of documents using the Mass Document Operations Wizard. To delete a group of documents you must have Delete rights to the documents, or you must be a librarian for the library. In addition, you must have Delete rights to the library from which you want to remove the documents. When you delete a group of documents, all versions of the documents are deleted; however, the activity logs for the deleted documents are not removed. Document references that point to deleted documents are not deleted. If you click a document reference to a deleted document, a message appears telling you that the document has been deleted. This section contains the following topics: + “Deleting a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example” on page 326 + “Deleting a Group of Selected Documents” on page 328 + “Deleting a Group of Documents Listed in a File” on page 328 Deleting a Group of Documents Selected with Find by Example 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Delete. 326 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 3 [Mass Document Operations In the Selection Method group box, click Use Find By Example To Select Documents, then click Next. Find by Example a Il E | ul In the Library drop-down list, click the library you want to search. In each field, specify the information you want to look for. Click Next. Click Preview to see a sample of the documents that will be deleted based on the Find criteria you specified. You can click Close at any time in the Find Results dialog box to cancel the preview. Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing the Delete Operation to see the outcome of the delete without actually deleting the documents. Creating and Working with Documents 327 10 Click Finish to delete the documents. Deleting a Group of Selected Documents 4 In your Mailbox or folders, click the document references for the documents you want to delete. 2 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 3 In the Operation group box, click Delete. 4 Inthe Selection Method group box, click Use Currently Selected Documents, then click Next. 5 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing The Delete Operation to see the outcome of the delete without actually deleting the documents. 6 Click Finish to delete the documents. Deleting a Group of Documents Listed in a File 1 Click Tools, then click Mass Document Operations. 2 In the Operation group box, click Delete. 3 In the Selection Method group box, click Use Documents Listed In A File. 4 Specify the name of the file that contains the list of documents you want to delete, then click Next. If the file you specify is a log file from a previous delete operation, you can click Process Errors Only and GroupWise will process only the documents that generated errors during the previous session. 5 Specify the directory where you want to save the log file. 6 You can click Generate A Log File Without Performing the Delete Operation to see the outcome of the delete without actually deleting the documents. 7 Click Finish to delete the documents. Viewing Documents When Your Network or GroupWise Is Unavailable After you have edited and closed a document or documents in your Online Mailbox, you can have a copy of every document you edited placed in your Remote Library. This is called document echoing. Then when your network, GroupWise Library, or GroupWise post office is unavailable, you can open and modify your latest edited documents in Remote or Caching mode. You must have a Remote or Caching Mailbox on your machine for document echoing to occur. If you have chosen to use the same local mailbox for both your Remote Mailbox and Caching Mailbox, your echoed documents will be available in both Remote and Caching modes. If you run Remote mode and Caching mode from separate local mailboxes, you can echo documents to either your Remote Mailbox or your Caching Mailbox. Documents are echoed whenever you close or check in a document in your Online Mailbox. The document reference for the document is added to your Documents folder in your Remote/Caching Mailbox, and the document is copied to your Remote Library (which is used for both Remote and Caching mode). In Remote and Caching mode, you can use Tools > Manage Library Size to 328 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide remove unneeded documents that take up extra disk space. Document echoing does not occur when you close or check in documents in Remote or Caching mode. This section contains the following topics: + “Enabling Document Echoing” on page 329 + “Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library” on page 330 Enabling Document Echoing If you want to echo documents to a Caching Mailbox, it must be set up before you enable document echoing. If you want to use a Remote Mailbox, the document echoing process will help you create a basic Remote Mailbox if you don't have one already. 1 In Online mode, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the General tab. Documents Setup 27 xi] Library Configuration | Integrations General | r Document echoing Document echoing copies the documents you edit to your GroupWise Remote/Caching Mailbox. This makes it possible for you to open and edit these documents when your GroupWise post office is unavailable. € Echo documents to Remote Mailbox Path to Mailbox: <No remote mailbox exists> Cancel | 3 Click Echo Documents to Remote Mailbox. or Click Echo Documents to Caching Mailbox. This option is not available if you do not have a Caching Mailbox. Ifthe path to your Remote Mailbox and Caching Mailbox is the same, it does not matter which option you chose. Echoed documents will be available in both Remote and Caching mode. If you run Remote mode and Caching mode from separate mailboxes, you can echo documents to only one of these mailboxes. 4 Click OK. If you do not have a Remote Mailbox, GroupWise will help you create one for document echoing. Creating and Working with Documents 329 5 If prompted, type your Online Mailbox password, then follow the prompts in the Hit the Road wizard to set up a Remote Mailbox. Only a basic Remote Mailbox is created. If you want to download specific folders and items to your Remote Mailbox, you can run Hit the Road later. 6 If you are running GroupWise with a workstation install, you are prompted to install a local copy. If you click Yes, GroupWise exits and Setup starts. Follow the prompts for a standard install. Documents are copied (echoed) whenever you close or check in a document in your Online Mailbox. The document reference for the document is added to your Documents folder in your Remote/Caching Mailbox, and the document is copied to your Remote Library (which is used for both Remote and Caching mode). Deleting Unneeded Documents from Your Remote Library Deleting files from your Remote Library Disk Space Management will not remove them from the Master Library. It will also not remove the document references for the deleted documents. The files are removed only from the computer where you have your Remote Mailbox, freeing disk space for you. 1 In Remote mode, click Tools, then click Manage Library Size. 2 Click the documents you want to delete, then click Delete. 3 When you’re done, click Close. If you delete an In Use document, the status of the document in the Master Library is reset to Available the next time you connect. Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications Group Wise Integrations make it possible for you to link your applications to your GroupWise Mailbox. In an integrated application, you can see the documents in your Mailbox and folders when you select Open in the application. In addition, you can save a document as a new version using the application's Save As feature. Integrating makes it possible for you to create, edit, and save GroupWise documents within your applications. Group Wise can integrate with applications in one of two ways: through the Open Document Management API (ODMA) supplied by the application, or through a point-to-point integration macro. ODMA is an open standard that makes it possible for GroupWise Library and other document management programs to communicate with your applications. Each application vendor is responsible for implementing ODMA standards. If an application is ODMA-compliant, you can integrate it with GroupWise Library. This section contains the following topics: + “Integrating Applications During Setup” on page 331 + “Integrating Applications After Setup” on page 331 + “Turning Off Integrations” on page 331 + “Turning On Integrations” on page 332 + “Using Non-Integrated Applications” on page 333 330 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Integrating Applications During Setup If Setup detects that you have an ODMA-enabled application, such as WordPerfect, Microsoft Word, or Excel properly installed, Setup prompts you to specify whether you want GroupWise to integrate with the application. If you integrate your applications and later want to disable the integration, you can turn off the integration in the Documents Setup dialog box. Integrating Applications After Setup If you don't enable the integrations during Setup but later decide you do want to use integrations, you must run Setup again to install the integrations. After you've run Setup, you can turn integrations on or off for each application in the Integrations tab in Documents Setup. After you've enabled integrations, you can turn them on or off at any time. y g y y Turning Off Integrations You can turn off integrations for one application or for all your applications. When you turn off integrations, your applications work like non-integrated applications, and GroupWise can't monitor when you open and save documents. As a result, your documents are returned to the library when you close the application, not when you close the document. This section contains the following topics: + “Turning Off Integrations for All Your Applications” on page 331 + “Turning Off Integrations for One Application” on page 332 Turning Off Integrations for All Your Applications 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the Integrations tab. Documents Setup x| Library Configuration Integrations | General | T Enable integrations m Registered applications Adobe FrameMaker Document Bitmap Image M icrosoft HTML Document 5.0 WordPerfect Document (6.1) File WP Draw 3.0 Drawing ©) Enabled Le Advanced... | © Disabled 3 Deselect the Enable Integrations check box, then click OK. Creating and Working with Documents 331 Turning Off Integrations for One Application 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the Integrations tab. 3 Make sure the Enable Integrations check box is selected. 4 In the Registered Applications box, click the application for which you want to turn off integrations. 5 Click Disabled, then click OK. When an application integration is disabled, no text displays to the right of the application name in the Registered Applications list box. Turning On Integrations Application integration is enabled during GroupWise Setup. After Setup is finished, you can turn integration on for one application or for all your eligible applications. Before you turn on integration, verify that the application is ODMA-enabled or is supported by a point-to-point integration macro. The list of applications on the Integrations tab shows all the applications that are registered on your machine. It is not a list of ODMA-enabled applications; it is a list of registered applications. If you select an application that is not ODMA-enabled and try to turn on integration, GroupWise displays a message warning you that the application is not ODMA-enabled. If you proceed and register the non-ODMA application, the integration will not work for that application. If the application for which you are turning on integrations has two executable files (for example, WordPerfect) you must specify the name of the main executable file (such as wpwin.exe for WordPerfect) on the Executable tab in Advanced Integrations. Group Wise launches the executable you specify, and that executable launches the application. This section contains the following topics: + “Turning On Integrations for All Your Applications” on page 332 + “Turning On Integrations for One Application” on page 332 Turning On Integrations for All Your Applications 4 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the Integrations tab. 3 Select the Enable Integrations check box, then click OK. This turns on integrations for all your integrated applications. It doesn't have any affect on non- integrated applications. Turning On Integrations for One Application 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the Integrations tab. 3 Select the Enable Integrations check box. 4 In the Registered Applications list box, click the application for which you want to turn on integration. 332 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide The Registered Applications list box shows the applications that are registered on your machine. It doesn't mean that the applications listed are ODMA-enabled. 5 Most applications have only one executable filename; however, if the application you selected has two executable files, for example WordPerfect, click Advanced, then click the Executable tab. Type the name of the main executable file in the Dual-Executable Filename text box, then click OK. 6 Click Enabled, then click OK. Using Non-Integrated Applications If you're using non-integrated applications (most Windows 3.1 applications, MS-DOS applications, and many Windows 95 applications), you can't integrate Group Wise with your application; however, you can still use GroupWise documents with these applications. You cannot take advantage of the integrated Open and Save features. You can use the options on the Non-Integrated tab in Advanced Integration options to specify whether or not you want GroupWise to display a warning message when Group Wise loses contact with a non-integrated application. This message reminds you that you must manually return the document to the library. You can also specify how many seconds you want GroupWise to wait for non-integrated applications to open. This section contains the following topics: + “Turning the Warning Message for Non-Integrated Applications On or Off” on page 333 + “Specifying How Long GroupWise Should Wait for a Non-Integrated Application to Open” on page 333 Turning the Warning Message for Non-Integrated Applications On or Off Group Wise displays the warning message when it loses contact with the application. The message reminds you to manually return the document to the library. 4 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the Integrations tab, click Advanced, then click the Non-Integrated tab. 3 To turn on the warning message, make sure the Display Message check box is checked. or To turn off the warning message, deselect the Display Message check box. Specifying How Long GroupWise Should Wait for a Non-Integrated Application to Open Group Wise waits the number of seconds you specify for the non-integrated application to open. If Group Wise doesn't detect the application opening, GroupWise times out and loses contact with the document, which means Group Wise can't return it to the library. If this happens, you must manually return the document. If you have an application that loads very slowly, you can increase the wait interval to prevent Group Wise from timing out before the application opens. 4 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the Integrations tab. Creating and Working with Documents 333 3 Inthe Registered Applications list box, click the application for which you want to specify the wait interval. 4 Click Advanced, then click the Non-Integrated tab. Microsoft Word Document 27 xi] Non-Integrated | Executable | Message Display message for all non-integrated applications that cannot be tracked by GroupWise. Wait Setfor © This application (* Default for all applications Wait time to detect application: 1 = seconds. Cancel | 5 Click This Application to apply the wait interval to the selected application. or Click Default for All Applications to apply the wait interval to all non-integrated applications. 6 In the Wait Time to Detect Application text box, type the number of seconds GroupWise should wait for the application to open. 7 Click OK. Returning Documents to the Library Most of the time you open a document, make changes, and save it in the library without any interruptions; however, once in a while, the power goes out or the network goes down, and GroupWise can't copy your document back to the library. This also happens if you exit GroupWise while a document is open in an application or if you exit GroupWise before you close a non- integrated application. In these cases, GroupWise stores the document (including any changes) in a temporary directory called the staging directory. The document stays in the staging directory until you return it to the library; however, as long as the document is in the staging directory, the document status is open and no one (including you) can open or edit the document. When you have a document with an Open status in the staging directory, you can return it to the library and change its status two ways: you can use the Reset Document Status option, or you can use the Unreturned Documents dialog box. This section contains the following topics: + “Using Reset Document Status” on page 335 + “Using Reset Document Status in Remote/Caching Mode” on page 335 + “Using the Unreturned Documents Dialog Box” on page 336 334 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Using Reset Document Status Reset Document Status is available any time you right-click a document reference in your Mailbox or folders. You can use this option to immediately return a document to the library. When you do this, you can specify whether or not you want Group Wise to update the document in the library with the document in the staging directory. If you have GroupWise update the document, GroupWise moves the document out of the staging directory, updates the document in the library with any changes, and makes the document available. If you do not have GroupWise update the document, GroupWise deletes the document out of the staging directory and makes the document available. This section contains the following topics: + “Returning a Document to the Library and Marking it Available” on page 335 + “Marking a Document Available Only” on page 335 Returning a Document to the Library and Marking it Available 1 Right-click the document reference in your Mailbox or folder. 2 Click Reset Document Status. Reset Document Status 27 xi] IV Return the document to the library. Cancel | 3 Make sure that both Mark the Document as Available and Return the Document to the Library are selected, then click OK. Marking a Document Available Only 1 Right-click the document reference in your Mailbox or folder. 2 Click Reset Document Status. 3 Click Mark the Document as Available. 4 Make sure that Return the Document to the Library is not selected. 5 Click OK. Using Reset Document Status in Remote/Caching Mode When you use Reset Document Status in Remote or Caching mode, you can specify whether or not you want to return the document to the Master Library. Use the Make the Document Available in the Master Library option to remove the In Use status and make the document available in the Master Library without updating the document. 1 In Remote or Caching mode, right-click the document reference. 2 Click Reset Document Status. Creating and Working with Documents 335 Reset Document Status tr? x! M Return the document to the Remote library. [~ Mark the document as available in the Master library. Cancel | 3 To make the document available without updating the document in the Remote Library, click Mark the Document as Available in the Remote Library. or To make the document available and update the document in the Remote Library, click Mark the Document as Available in the Remote Library, then click Return the Document to the Remote Library. 4 To change the document status from In Use to Available in the Master Library, click Mark the Document as Available in the Master Library. Using the Unreturned Documents Dialog Box When you start or exit Group Wise, GroupWise checks the registry file to see if you have any documents open in the staging directory. If you do, GroupWise lists all the documents in the Unreturned Documents dialog box so you can decide what to do with them. At this point, you can click the check box to select the documents (by default all are selected) you want to return to the library, and have GroupWise return them. Or you can switch to the application in which you created the document and return the documents (by saving or closing them) yourself. If you switch to an integrated application, closing the document returns it to the library. If you switch to a non-integrated application, you must close the application to return the document to the library. You cannot manually access the Unreturned Documents dialog box. Use Reset Document Status to move documents from a staging directory when GroupWise is open. See “Using Reset Document Status” on page 335. Replacing a Document with a File from Backup You can replace a document in the library with a file you've restored from a backup system or with any other file. This is useful if documents have become corrupt through machine failures, network problems, and so on. To do this, you must be a librarian in the GroupWise library where the document is found, or you must be a librarian in any Group Wise library and have Edit rights to the document. Ifa file needs to be restored from a backup system and you are uncertain which one to restore, you can see a list of all the BLOB filenames that have ever been assigned to that document version. A BLOB (binary large object) is a document that has been compressed and encrypted in a GroupWise library. To restore a file from a backup, follow the directions for your standard backup software. Then you can replace the corrupt document with the restored file in GroupWise using Replace Document with Backup. You can use this feature in Remote Mode only if the document has been downloaded and marked In Use. 336 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 1 Click the document reference. 2 Click Tools, then click Replace Document with Backup. 3 Ifnecessary, look at the entire list of BLOB filenames that have been assigned to that document version and decide which file needs to be restored from backup files. or Skip to Step 6. 4 Ifnecessary, exit GroupWise. Using standard backup software, restore the file. 5 Start GroupWise and repeat Steps 1 and 2. 6 Specify the path and filename for the file that will replace the document. Creating and Working with Documents 337 338 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Customizing GroupWise Use Options to customize GroupWise? by setting defaults that are in effect each time you start GroupWise. You can set options that make your work more efficient, change how GroupWise looks, and accomplish specific tasks. For example, you can use Environment Options to change the interface language GroupWise uses, or you can use Send Options to specify that you get a return receipt for every message you send. You can also use Options to subscribe to Notify, specify an archive folder, and so forth. This section contains the following topics: + + + “Delaying Delivery of an Item” on page 339 “Getting a Return Receipt for Items You Send” on page 340 “Requesting a Reply for All Items You Send” on page 341 “Specifying Where Archived Items Are Stored” on page 341 “Changing the Priority of Items You Send” on page 342 “Customizing Headers” on page 342 “Changing the GroupWise Interface Language” on page 343 “Changing Your Default Views” on page 343 “Specifying How Long Before an Event an Alarm Sounds” on page 344 “Automatically Spell-Checking Every Message You Send” on page 345 “Customizing Your Toolbar” on page 345 “Customizing Your Library Settings” on page 346 “Using Startup Options” on page 347 Delaying Delivery of an Item 1 To delay the delivery of one item, open an item view, click the Send Options tab, then click General. or To delay delivery of all items you send, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Send. 2 Click Delay Delivery. 3 In the text box, specify how many days later you want the item delivered. or Select a date and time under Until. Customizing GroupWise 339 Send Options ISO Default 4 Click OK. Getting a Return Receipt for Items You Send 1 To get a return receipt for one item, open an item view, click the Send Options tab, then click Status Tracking. or To always get a return receipt for items you send, click Tools, click Options, double-click Send, then click the tab for the item type. Send Options 2 In the Return Notification group box, specify the type of return receipt you want. 340 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide You are automatically subscribed to Notify in Options. If you have deselected to receive alarms and notifications, you cannot receive notifications with Notify. For more information, see “Running Notify” on page 157. If you are sending an item to an Internet address, you can click Enable Delivery Confirmation. If the receiver's Internet e-mail system enables status tracking, you can receive status about the item you send. 3 Click OK. Requesting a Reply for All Items You Send 1 To request a reply for one item, open an item view, click the Send Options tab, then click General. or To request a reply for all items you send, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Send. 2 Click Reply Requested, then specify when you want to receive the reply. Send Options | Mai | Appointment] Task | Reminder Note | Security | © High Priority | Já Expiration date @ Standard Priority After [D = days C Low Priority Classification: Normal bd = Until I” Reply requested r er 1/25/2003 € when convenier — 11:59:00 PM | | © within 0 | days a — IV Notify recipients MIME Encoding: I Convert attachments 150 Default X The recipient sees & next to the message. If you select When Convenient, "Reply Requested: When convenient" appears at the top of the message. If you select Within x Days, "Reply Requested: By xx/xx/xx" appears at the top of the message. 3 Click OK. Specifying Where Archived Items Are Stored 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment, then click the File Location tab. Customizing GroupWise 341 General | Views File Location | Cleanup | Default Actions | Signature | Backup Options | Archive directory: Custom views: 0 Save, check out: 3 Specify the location of your archive directory in the Archive Directory text box. 4 Click OK. Setting the File Attachment Behavior 1 Click Tools > Options, then double-click Environment. 2 Click the Default Actions tab. 3 Select if you want to View in a New Window or Open Attachment. If you select to View in a New Window, the attachment is opened in a new window with the program associated with the file type. 4 Select if you want to be warned if the attachment is larger then what you specify in KiloBytes. 5 Click OK. Changing the Priority of Items You Send 1 To change the priority of one item, open an item view, click the Send Options tab, then click General. or To change the priority of all items you send, click Tools, click Options, then double-click Send. 2 Select High Priority, Standard Priority, or Low Priority. The small icon next to an item in the Mailbox is red when the priority is high, white when the priority is standard, and gray when the priority is low. 3 Click OK. Customizing Headers The following steps affect all of your Group Wise headers. Headers display above your Folder List, Mailbox, QuickViewer, and sent and received messages. These changes affect headers on your current workstation. 1 Right-click the header, then click Header Color. 342 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 2 Click a color, then click OK. 3 Right-click the header, then click Header Text Color. 4 Click a color, then click OK. 5 Right-click the header, click Header Font Size, then click a font size. 6 Ifyou don't want Quick Info to display, right-click the header, then select Disable Quick Info. The following step affects headers in the Quick Viewer and sent and received messages. 1 Right-click the header, then select or deselect Show Multiple Recipients, Separate To/CC/BC, and Align Colons. To restore headers to their original appearance, right-click a header, then click Reset to Default. Changing the GroupWise Interface Language 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment, then click the General tab. General | Views | File Location | Cleanup | Default Actions | Signature | Backup Options | Interface language: IV Prompt on empty filter English US [Y Prompt on empty find IV Read next after accept, decline or delete I Launch Notify at startup M Launch Messenger at startup View options : [ Check spelling before send | I Open new view after send [ interval ———— Every: fi = minutes jo aj seconds 3 Click a language in the Interface Language drop-down list, then click OK. Changing Your Default Views 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Environment, then click the Views tab. Customizing GroupWise 343 General Views | File Location | Cleanup | Default Actions | Signature | Backup Options | m Item type Views: Mai C i * Mal ARTO Mail (simple) C Phone C Reminder note Task C Calendar ( Group Posted I Use default views for reading Set Default View | m Default Compose View r Default Read View Plain Text @ Plain Text C HTML C HTML 3 Select an item type. 4 Select Group or Posted. 5 Click the view you want as your default in the Views box. 6 Click Set Default View. Group Wise marks the item as the default by placing an asterisk (*) next to the view name in the Views box. 7 Repeat Steps 3-6 until you have selected a default view for each item type. 8 Click OK. Specifying How Long Before an Event an Alarm Sounds 1 Click Tools, then click Options. 2 Double-click Date & Time, then click the Calendar tab. 3 Make sure Set Alarm When Accepted is selected. Date Time Options 12] [x | Calendar | Busy Search | Format | m Month Display Option m Line, Color Options S H TOWT F S Color Lines Elstofweek © OC CC CC C Appointments [Y Highlight days MT TT mV Reminder notes [4 [Y F Show week number Tasks M M — Appointment Options — Alarm Options IV Include myself on new appointments FN Set alarm when accepted Displ intment length © pager, mer Fen Default alarm time: C End date and time hours: minutes: E 3 minutes Default appointment length: fi 3 [o 2 m Work Schedule Start time: [E-004M o SMT TS End time: [5:00PM o Wok days: DC VM MM Mw I Cancel | 344 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide 4 Specify the number of minutes before an event that you want an alarm to sound. 5 Click OK. Automatically Spell-Checking Every Message You Send 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Environment. 2 Click Check Spelling Before Send, then click OK. Customizing Your Toolbar Use the toolbar to access many of the features and options found in GroupWise. The toolbar is context-sensitive, and changes depending on what view you are in. Each toolbar provides the options you need in that location. Use the Display drop-down list on the toolbar to change the display of your Item List. You can customize each toolbar by adding and deleting buttons, choosing button order, and placing separators between buttons. 1 Ifthe toolbar is not displayed, click View, then click Toolbar. 2 Right-click the toolbar, then click Customize Toolbar. 3 Click the Show tab. Toolbar Properties È 2) xi Show | Customize | © Picture Picture and text a || Y | a | | Address Book | Find | Property 6 Picture and selected text on the righi | ®7 Address Book | Q | | Display options © Single row of buttons only. ( Multiple rows of buttons, if necessary. All buttons will be displayed. D Show display settings drop-down list MV Show item context toolbar JV Show folder context toolbar 4 Click how you want the toolbar to display. Customizing GroupWise 345 5 To remove or show the display settings drop-down list, deselect or select the Show Display Settings Drop-Down List check box. 6 To show the buttons that are most useful for the selected item, select Show Item Context Toolbar. 7 To show the buttons that are most useful for the selected folder, select Show Folder Context Toolbar. 8 Click the Customize tab. 9 To add a button, click a category from the Categories list box, click a button in the Controls box, then click Add Button. Categories are menu titles in the Main Window. The buttons in the Controls box correspond to features found under the menu title. For example, the buttons for the File category are actions under the File menu (opening views, printing, saving, and so on). 10 To remove a button, drag it off the toolbar. 11 To change the order of a button on a toolbar, drag it to where you want it to display. 12 To add space between buttons, drag one button away from the other button. or To remove space between buttons, drag one button toward another button. 13 Click OK. Customizing Your Library Settings Group Wise lets you customize settings for the libraries where you store and create documents. You can specify a default library, default sharing rights, default document properties layout (such as the order and size of fields), and default values for document properties. You can also specify whether you want to use the short or long form of the property sheet. The library and property settings you specify only affect your library setup. You cannot modify other users' settings. Default Library You can change the default library. When you create, import, or copy a document in Group Wise, it is saved in the default library, unless you specify a different library. In addition, Find searches for documents in the default library first. See “Specifying a Default Library” on page 277. Default Property Values You can specify default values for the document property fields that can be edited. The default values are used when you create a new document or import a document into the selected library. If no default values have been specified for author and document type, GroupWise uses the creator's name as the author and Document as the document type. See “Specifying Document Properties” on page 278. Default Sharing Rights If you usually share your documents with the same users or groups, you can specify default sharing rights for all the documents you create. Once you've specified default sharing rights, GroupWise applies these rights to each document you create or import into the selected library. See “Specifying Default Sharing Rights for Documents” on page 290. 346 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Document Tab Configuration The Document tab appears each time you create, import, copy, or select Properties for a document. You can specify which fields you want to display on the Document tab. In addition, you can specify the number of lines in each field, the field's order on the dialog box, and you can insert blank lines and separators in the dialog box. See “Specifying Document Properties” on page 278. Document Property Sheets When you create a new document or a new version of a document, GroupWise prompts you to specify document properties. You can specify whether you want Group Wise to prompt you for the document subject only or for all the document properties. See “Specifying Document Properties” on page 278. Document Management Integration with Other Applications If you are using integrated applications, you can specify whether you want GroupWise Library features integrated with the application's Save and Open features. To use the integration, you must have installed Integrations during GroupWise Setup. If you didn't install Integrations, you can run Setup again to install them. See “Integrating GroupWise with Your Applications” on page 330. Setting the Default Library The default library is where all your documents are stored and the library where Find searches for documents. 1 Click Tools, click Options, then double-click Documents. 2 Click the library you want to use as a default. 3 Click Set Default, then click OK. Using Startup Options Group Wise has commands that you can use when you start the program. Some of them are for your convenience, and others are necessary to run GroupWise on your particular hardware. GroupWise Startup Options This Startup Option Does This /Qu-? Displays a login dialog box whenever you open GroupWise, allowing you to supply any necessary login information. /@u-USER ID Lets you use your GroupWise user ID to open GroupWise as yourself on another user's computer. The other user remains logged on to the network. /bl Prevents the GroupWise splash screen from being displayed when you enter the program. Ic Checks for unopened items. If there are unopened items, GroupWise opens as usual. Otherwise, GroupWise does not start. /cm Checks for unopened items. If there are unopened items, GroupWise opens minimized and a beep sounds. Otherwise, GroupWise does not start. Customizing GroupWise 347 This Startup Option Does This liabs Initializes the Address Book when GroupWise starts. /ipa-ip_address_or_name Lets you specify the IP address (x.x.x.x) or the name of the IP address when you are running in client/server mode. /ipp-port_number Lets you specify the IP port when you are running in client/server mode. A-xx Applies only if you have two or more language versions or language modules. This option instructs GroupWise to override the default environment language (under General Environment in Options) with the language specified by the language code (xx). The language codes are listed in the table below. Na-network_id Lets you log on to another user's computer using your network ID. The other user remains logged on to the network. /nu Turns off AutoRefresh. If this option is selected, click View, then click Refresh whenever you want to update the display with the items currently in your Mailbox. /ph-pathname Lets you specify the path to the post office. Ipc-path_to_caching_mailbox Opens GroupWise in Caching mode. GroupWise must be restarted when you change from Online to Caching. /ps-path_to_remote_mailbox Opens GroupWise in Remote mode. This startup option can be used in the Target text box only. GroupWise Language Codes The following table lists the languages the GroupWise client has been localized into for Group Wise 5.5 and later versions. Some versions might not include all of these languages. For the most current information, see your local reseller. Language Language Code Arabic AR Chinese Simplified CS Chinese Traditional CT Czech CZ Danish DK Dutch NL English-United States US Finnish SU French-National FR German-Germany DE Hebrew HE 348 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Language Language Code Hungarian MA Italian IT Japanese JP Korean KR Norwegian NO Polish PL Portuguese-Brazil BR Russian RU Spanish ES Swedish SV Thai TH Turkish TR Using a GroupWise Startup Option 1 Right-click the GroupWise icon on the desktop, then click Properties. 2 Click the Shortcut tab. 3 Inthe Target text box, after the GroupWise executable, type a space, type the startup option(s), then click OK. Separate multiple startup options with a space, like this: j:\grpwise.exe /ph-pathname /@u-? In this example, /ph- is the startup option to specify the path to the post office. The pathname is the path to the post office. The /@u-? option is used to display a login dialog box a user can supply with login information whenever he or she opens GroupWise. This option is useful when two or more users share a workstation but have separate Group Wise Mailboxes. 4 Restart Group Wise. Customizing GroupWise 349 350 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions The GroupWise 6.5 Client Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) is intended to help GroupWise client users who have not found the information they need in the GroupWise client online help or User Guides. The GroupWise 6.5 Client Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) contains the following sections: + + + + + “How Do I Find What I Need in the GroupWise Client Documentation?” “GroupWise Windows Client FAQ” “Group Wise Cross-Platform Client FAQ” “GroupWise WebAccess Client FAQ” “Non-GroupWise Clients FAQ” “GroupWise Client Comparison” “Where Do I Go for More Help?” GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions 351 352 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide Documentation Updates This section lists updates to the GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide that have been made since the initial release of GroupWise® 6.5. The information will help you to keep current on documentation updates and, in some cases, software updates (such as a Support Pack release). The information is grouped according to the date when the GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide was republished. The GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide has been updated on the following dates: September 19, + “September 19, 2005 (GroupWise 6.5 SP5)” on page 353 + “February 28, 2005 (GroupWise 6.5 SP4)” on page 354 + “October 20, 2004” on page 354 + “October 8, 2004” on page 355 + “December 18, 2003 (Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0)” on page 355 + “October 31, 2003” on page 356 + “July 16, 2003 (GroupWise 6.5 SP1)” on page 357 Location “Cabinet” on page 24 “Viewing Options in Your Mailbox” on page 30 “Logging in to Your Mailbox from a Shared Workstation” on page 40 “Delaying Delivery of an Item” on page 55 “Notifying Recipients About an Item You have Sent” on page 58 “Attaching a File to an Item” on page 68 “Rescheduling Recurring Appointments” on page 107 2005 (GroupWise 6.5 SP5) Update Added information on how to sort your subfolders in the Cabinet folder. Updated section with information on how to set options permanently and temporarily. Added a section on how to log in to GroupWise from a shared workstation. Added a section on how to delay delivery of an item. Added a section on how to notify recipients about items you have sent. Added additional information on how to attach a file by right-clicking the file from Windows. Added a section on how to reschedule recurring appointments. Documentation Updates 353 Location Chapter 6, “Using Your Calendar,” on page 127 “Setting How to Be Notified” on page 159 “Setting the Alarm Options” on page 159 “Setting Notify Options for Return Status Messages” on page 160 “Archiving Items Automatically” on page 163 “Creating a Rule to Forward All Mail to a Private Mail Account” on page 169 “Repairing Your Mailbox” on page 198 “Setting the File Attachment Behavior” on page 342 Chapter 15, “GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions,” on page 351 Update Added a paragraph explaining that items that are archived are no longer displayed on the calendar. Added a section about Notify options. Added a section about Alarm options in Notify. Added a section about return status notifications in Notify. Added information about what happens when you are working on a computer where archiving is not available. Added a section on how to forward all your mail to a private mail account. Added clarification about when the Repair Mailbox function is available on the menu. Added a section on how to set the default behavior for opening attachments. Added a section on how to access the GroupWise Frequently Asked Questions document. February 28, 2005 (GroupWise 6.5 SP4) Location “Repairing Your Mailbox” on page 198 October 20, 2004 354 Location “Using GroupWise Messenger from Within GroupWise” on page 103 Update Added section on how to repair your GroupWise mailbox. Update Removed sections that did not pertain specifically to GroupWise Messenger functionality within GroupWise. GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide October 8, 2004 Location Update “Creating a New Filter” on Changed the @ to *@* to make the rule work properly. page 187 “Setting Up Your Caching Removed steps 5-9 because they were not needed. In addition, added Mailbox” on page 258 a paragraph about Caching. December 18, 2003 (Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0) Location Update “GroupWise 6.5 Windows Added a paragraph under Documentation Updates about the Novell Client User Guide” on GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell® Nterprise™ Linux page 2 Services 1.0. “Using the Novell Add a section about setting up and using the Novell GroupWise 6.5 GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0. Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 18 “Folder and Item List Mentioned the new Remote (Offline) mode. Header” on page 21 “Remote (Offline) Mode Added a heading about the new Remote (Offline) mode. (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 27 “Logging In to the Novell Added a heading about logging in to the Novell GroupWise 6.5 GroupWise 6.5 Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0. Collaboration Client for Novell Nterprise Linux Services 1.0 (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0) on page 41 “Downloading POP3 and Added information about sharing IMAP4 folders to introduction. IMAP4 Accounts to GroupWise” on page 58 Mentioned a NetMail™ IMAP4 account in “Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to GroupWise” on page 60. Added two headings: “Sharing an IMAP4 Folder (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 67 and “Seeing IMAP4 Folders That Are Shared with You (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 67. “Scheduling anAppointment Added information about performing a busy search on users ina POP3 for Other Users” on or IMAP4 account that supports the CAP protocol. page 106 “Performing a Busy Search” Added information about performing a busy search on users ina POP3 on page 109 or IMAP4 account that supports the CAP protocol. Documentation Updates 355 Location Update “Checking When Everyone Added two headings: “Adding a CAP Account to GroupWise (v6.5 for Is Available” on page 109 NNLS 1.0)” on page 111 and “Modifying Properties of a CAP Account (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)” on page 111. “Using Busy Search in Added information about performing a busy search on users ina POP3 Remote Mode” on page 248 or IMAP4 account that supports the CAP protocol. “Remote (Offline) Mode Added this section about the new Remote (Offline) mode. (v6.5 for NNLS 1.0)’ on page 255 October 31, 2003 Location Update “Assigning a Category toan Added that if you assign one of the default categories to an item you Item” on page 83 are sending, the item arrives in the recipient's Mailbox with that category assigned. “Giving Other People Added: You can proxy for a user in a different post office or domain, as Access to Your Mailbox” on long as that person is in the same GroupWise system. You cannot page 171 proxy for a user in a different GroupWise system. “Using LDAP in the Address Added a new section, “Establishing a Secure Connection to a Directory Book” on page 211 Service” on page 213. “Running Notify” on Having a proxy receive alarms and notifications is supported only if the page 157 proxy is on the same post office you are. “Assigning Proxy Rights to Having a proxy receive alarms and notifications is supported only if the Another User” on page 172 proxy is on the same post office you are. “Handling Unwanted Mail” Added that this is sometimes called "white listing." on page 92 “Blocking or Junking E-Mail Added that the Block List and Junk List each have a 1000 entry From a User” on page 94 maximum. “Blocking or Junking E-Mail Added that the Block List and Junk List each have a 1000 entry From an Internet Domain” maximum. on page 95 “Using Startup Options” on Updated the list of languages and language codes. page 347 356 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide July 16, 2003 (GroupWise 6.5 SP1) Location “Icons Appearing Next to Items in Your Mailbox and Calendar’ on page 28 “Using Shortcut Keys” on page 34 “Formatting Bulleted and Numbered Lists” on page 50 “Adding a POP3 or IMAP4 Account to GroupWise” on page 60 “Opening Attached Files” on page 71 “Viewing and Composing Items in HTML” on page 100 “Accepting or Declining Scheduled Items” on page 117 “Narrowing an Advanced Find Using Filter Operators” on page 186, “Using Filter and Rule Wildcard Characters and Switches” on page 191, and “Using Filter and Rule Operators” on page 192 “Posting a New Discussion to a Newsgroup” on page 263 “Selecting the Method Used for Encrypting Items” on page 272 Update Added seven new icons that indicate status for received items that have been replied to, forwarded, and/or delegated. Added Alt+D that you can use in a new item to send it. Documented how Ctrl+Shift+L can be used in a message you are composing in Plain Text view to format bulleted and numbered lists. Added that Microsoft Secure Password Authentication is supported for accessing Exchange servers and MSN accounts. Documented that the GroupWise client warns you if you try to open an attachment that is larger than 1000 KB (1 MB). You can suppress the warning or change the warning threshold. Documented that, when you select Plain Text as your Default Item View, you can prevent HTML-only messages from being displayed automatically when no plain-text version is available. Explained that, when you decline an appointment, task, or reminder note and include a comment, the sender’s Send options determine how the sender can view your comment (properties of the sent item, mail receipt, or notify). Clarified that, when you create a rule or filter, or when you used Advanced Find, the [ ] Contains and [X] Does Not Contain operators use a word-based search. The = Matches and |-> Begins With operators use a string-based search. Documented that if there is a problem posting an item to a newsgroup, your message is saved in your Work in Progress folder. Explained that the encryption algorithms available for selection in the GroupWise client depend on the Web browser installed on your workstation. Documentation Updates 357 358 GroupWise 6.5 Windows Client User Guide